JP6725239B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Conventionally, a game called a pachi-slot provided with a plurality of reels provided with a plurality of symbols on each surface, a start switch, a stop switch, a stepping motor provided corresponding to each reel, and a control unit. The machine is known. The start switch detects that the start lever has been operated by the player (hereinafter also referred to as "start operation") after a game medium such as a medal or coin has been inserted into the game machine, and the rotation of all reels is detected. Output a signal requesting start. The stop switch detects that a stop button provided corresponding to each reel is pressed by the player (hereinafter, also referred to as "stop operation"), and outputs a signal requesting stop of rotation of the corresponding reel. To do. The stepping motor transmits the driving force to the corresponding reel. Further, the control unit controls the operation of the stepping motor based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch, and performs the rotation operation and the stop operation of each reel.

In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected, a lottery process using random numbers is performed on the program (hereinafter, referred to as “internal lottery process”), and a result of the lottery (hereinafter, “internal winning combination”). That is) and the rotation of the reel is stopped based on the timing of the stop operation. Then, when the rotation of all reels is stopped and the symbol combination relating to the establishment of the winning is displayed, the privilege corresponding to the symbol combination is given to the player. As an example of the privilege given to the player, payout of a game medium (medal, etc.), operation of a re-game (hereinafter also referred to as “replay”) in which the internal lottery process is performed again without consuming the game medium The operation of a bonus game that increases the chances of paying out game media, the operation of a function for navigating the establishment of a specific small winning combination by a lamp, and the like can be given.

On the other hand, it is known that the gaming machine is provided with a plurality of setting values (for example, stages 1 to 6), and the gaming machine is set to any of these, and many of the above-mentioned benefits are set in the gaming machine. The player is given a lottery with a probability according to the set value. Therefore, it is an important factor for the player to determine the set value in order to improve the benefit, but the player generally estimates the set value by actually proceeding with the game. Therefore, a gaming machine that executes an effect that suggests a set value has been proposed (for example, Patent Documents 1 to 3).

JP, 2008-006014, A Japanese Patent No. 38569667 JP, 2005-096175, A

However, in the gaming machines as disclosed in the cited documents 1 to 3, the effect suggesting the set value is notified at a predetermined timing based on the actual set value, and the reliability of the effect suggesting the set value changes. Therefore, the set value of the gaming machine in which the player is playing is discriminated early from the start of the game, and the gaming machine that is less likely to be given the privilege is shunned and is more likely to be given the privilege. As a result of only gaming machines being played, there is a possibility that profits on the side of managing gaming machines may be greatly impaired.

The present invention has been made to solve the above problems, and it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the reliability of an effect that suggests a set value as a game continues.

In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine having the following configuration.

The gaming machine of the present invention,
Bet operation detection means (for example, a medal sensor 35S described later) for detecting a bet operation of the game value,
Start operation detecting means (for example, a start switch 16S described later) for detecting a start operation by the player based on the detection of the bet operation by the bet operation detecting means,
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process described later (step S6 of FIG. 165)) that determines an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means,
A variable display means (for example, three reels 3L, 3C, 3R and three described later, which is composed of a plurality of display rows, and which variably displays a symbol required for a game based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means. Stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R),
Stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch 17S described later) for detecting a stop operation by the player,
Based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determination means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means, stop control means for stopping the variable display of the symbols (for example, reel stop control processing described later),
Setting values for setting the probabilities of various benefits given to the player are provided in a plurality of stages, and setting means for setting a setting value in any one of the plurality of setting values provided (for example, , Key switches and operating levers described later),
A privilege probability storage unit (for example, a main ROM 52, a sub ROM 82) that stores the winning probability for each privilege in association with each of the internal winning combinations for each of the plurality of setting values.
Privilege lottery means (for example, an internal lottery process described later (step S6 of FIG. 165)) that randomly determines whether or not to grant the privilege to the player based on the set value that is set as the internal winning combination. ART lottery processing (step S556 in FIG. 191, step S819 in FIG. 207),
A setting value suggesting means capable of executing an effect suggesting a setting value of a stage based on the number of times of lottery of the privilege by the internal winning combination and the number of times of winning actually winning the privilege (for example, determination of a suggested setting value ( 253, step S2204), and a suggestion effect content determination process (step S2205 in FIG. 253)),
The effect suggesting the setting value is provided in association with each of the setting values of the plurality of stages,
The setting value suggesting means refers to the setting value of the stage based on the lottery number and the winning number, from among the effects suggesting the setting value associated with each setting value of the plurality of stages, predetermined It is characterized in that an effect that suggests one set value can be executed according to the selected probability of selection.

According to the above configuration, the gaming machine refers to the setting value set in any of the settings of the plurality of stages, and determines whether to grant the privilege based on the probability associated with this setting value. To do. On the other hand, the gaming machine determines a setting value to be suggested to the player based on the number of winnings of the privilege actually won, without referring to the setting value actually set. Then, the gaming machine notifies the effect suggesting the determined set value.
As a result, the gaming machine does not refer to the set value actually set, but determines the set value suggested to the player based on the number of times the prize is actually won, and the effect suggesting this set value is obtained. To do. Therefore, the set value determined from the number of times the prize is actually won is expected to be close to the actual set value as the game is continued, so that the reliability of the set value suggested by the performance is determined by the game. It can be improved as it continues.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the privilege may be a transition to a state of notifying information of a stop operation for assisting winning of a small winning combination.

According to the above-mentioned configuration, the player is notified of the information of the stop operation for assisting the winning of the small winning combination, compared with the privilege of winning the predetermined internal winning combination, which is not all notified to the player. Since it is a privilege, it is possible to make the suggested setting value easily coincide with the setting value estimated by the player, and it is possible to obtain the player's confidence in the gaming machine.

It is possible to improve the reliability of the effect that suggests the set value according to the continuation of the game.

It is a figure for explaining the functional flow of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a perspective view showing the appearance structure of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a schematic front view of the vicinity of the liquid crystal display device of the game machine in the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing the internal structure of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a block diagram showing the whole circuit composition with which a game machine of one embodiment of the present invention is provided. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the sub-control circuit in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of a symbol arrangement table in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 1) in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (4) in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of a bonus operation time table in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of RT transition table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table determination table in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table (RT0) (the 1) for general game states in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table (RT0) for the normal gaming state (the 2) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT1 in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT2 in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT3 in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of an internal lottery table for RT4 in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for general game states (BB carryover) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for general gaming states (RT0 BB in general) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table (RT1 RB carryover) for general game states in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table (the 1) for RB game states in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table (the 2) for RB game states in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the small winning combination/replay internal winning combination determination table in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of the internal winning combination determination table for bonuses in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the rotation cylinder stop number selection table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the rotation cylinder stop number selection table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel stop initialization table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop table for 1st stop at the time of forward push in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the control change table at the time of forward pressing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop table for 2nd-3rd stop at the time of forward pushing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the irregular pressing stop table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the attraction priority table selection table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the attraction-in priority table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the search order table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol corresponding winning operation flag data table in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a game lock lottery table in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the combo generation random determination table during the RT4 game state in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the combo continuation rate random determination table in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of a combo continuation random determination table in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the display combination storage area in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of a game state flag storage area in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation stop button storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pressing order storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol code storage area in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the attraction-in priority data storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the game lock flag storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence table (BB non-carrying over) (the 1) of a winning combination and a stop order in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence table (BB non-carried over) (2) of a winning combination and a stop order in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence table (BB1-4 carrying over) between a winning combination and a stop order in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence table (BB5 carryover) between a winning combination and a stop order in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence table (RB carry-over in BB) between the winning combination and the stop order in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence table of the winning combination, the stop order, and the RT transition mode in the embodiment of the present invention. It is a transition flow diagram of the RT gaming state of the gaming machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is the transition flow figure of the sub game state of the game machine in one execution form of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting mode specific mode MAP lottery table in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of the next specific mode MAP lottery table (MAP1) (the 1) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of the next specific mode MAP lottery table (MAP1) (the 2) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the random selection table for specific mode (mode A) (No. 1) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific mode transfer lottery table (mode A) (the 2) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the high precision stock lottery table in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of an ART lottery table (without high-precision stock) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of an ART lottery table (with high-precision stock) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of a CZ initial FS point lottery table in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the FS point random determination table in CZ in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table at the time of CZ end in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the high-precision stock lottery table at the time of CZ end in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the PTR stock lottery table after reaching the regulation point in CZ in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of an ART grade lottery table (CZ) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of an ART grade lottery table (RTG) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of an ART grade lottery table (BB5) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the EX point acquisition lottery table (the 1) on standby for the end of ART in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the EX point acquisition lottery table (the 2) on standby for ART termination in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the EX point acquisition lottery table (the 3) on standby for ART termination in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the EX point acquisition random determination table (the 1) in the level 1 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the EX point acquisition random determination table (the 2) in the level 1 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the EX point acquisition random determination table (the 3) in the level 1 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of the EX point acquisition random determination table (the 1) in the level 3 in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the EX point acquisition random determination table (the 2) in the level 3 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the EX point acquisition random determination table (the 3) in the level 3 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the EX point acquisition random determination table (the 1) in the level 4 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the EX point acquisition random determination table (the 2) in the level 4 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the EX point acquisition random determination table (the 3) in the level 4 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the EX point acquisition random determination table (enemy A) (the 1) in the level 2 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the EX point acquisition random determination table (enemy A) (the 2) in the level 2 in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the EX point acquisition random determination table (enemy A) (the 3) in the level 2 in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the EX point acquisition random determination table (enemy B) (the 1) in the level 2 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the EX point acquisition random determination table (enemy B) (the 2) in the level 2 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the EX point acquisition random determination table (enemy B) (the 3) in the level 2 in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of the EX point acquisition random determination table (enemy C) (the 1) in the level 2 in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of the EX point acquisition random determination table (enemy C) (the 2) in the level 2 in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of the EX point acquisition random determination table (enemy C) (the 3) in the level 2 in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of the EX point acquisition lottery table (enemy D) (the 1) in the level 2 in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the EX point acquisition random determination table (enemy D) (the 2) in the level 2 in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the EX point acquisition random determination table (enemy D) (the 3) in the level 2 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for EX point acquisition in slap RUSH (BR mode A) (the 1) in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the EX point acquisition lottery table (BR mode A) (the 2) in the slap RUSH in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for EX point acquisition in slap RUSH (BR mode A) (the 3) in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for EX point acquisition in slap RUSH (BR mode B) (the 1) in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the EX point acquisition lottery table (BR mode B) (the 2) in the BIN RUSH in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the EX point acquisition lottery table (BR mode B) (the 3) in the BINTA RUSH in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for EX point acquisition in BB (the 1) in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table for EX point acquisition in BB (the 2) in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the initial EX point acquisition lottery table at the time of level transfer in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the PTR stock lottery table (level 1) after reaching a regulation point in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the PTR stock lottery table (level 2) after reaching a regulation point in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the PTR stock lottery table (level 3) after reaching a regulation point in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the PTR stock lottery table (level 4) after reaching a regulation point in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the PTR stock lottery table (level 5) after reaching a regulation point in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the level 2 loop rate random determination table (1st time) in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the level 2 loop rate random determination table (other than the 1st time) in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the LV.2 loop lottery table in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of an opponent lottery table (level 2) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of an opponent lottery table (level 4) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the opponent mode random determination table (level 4) at the time of setting change in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the specialization type random determination table at the time of PTR winning in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the PREMIUM medium addition lottery table in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the premium addition game number lottery table (the 1) in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the premium addition game number lottery table (the 2) in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of the number-of-games lottery table at the time of PREMIUM combo in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the FIGHTING middle loop rate random determination table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the FIGHTING inside continuation random determination table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the FIGHTING intermediate addition lottery table (RT0) in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the FIGHTING intermediate addition lottery table (RT1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the FIGHTING intermediate addition lottery table (RT2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the FIGHTING middle addition lottery table (RT3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the FIGHTING intermediate addition lottery table (RT4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of the number-of-games lottery table (the 1) in FIGTING in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the number-of-games lottery table (the 2) in FIGHTING in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the number-of-games lottery table (the 3) in FIGHTING in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BURNING middle additional lottery table in one embodiment of this invention. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a BURNING mid-game addition lottery table (No. 1) in the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the number-of-games random determination table (the 2) in BURNING in one embodiment of this invention. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a BURNING mid-game addition lottery table (No. 3) in the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the bintar RUSH mode transfer lottery table in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the binta RUSH omen game number lottery table (the 1) in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the binta RUSH precursor game number lottery table (the 2) in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the PTR addition lottery table in the bintar RUSH in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the bintar RUSH middle additional game number random determination table (1G) (the 1) in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the bintar RUSH mid-game addition lottery table (1G) (the 2) in one embodiment of this invention. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a binter RUSH mid-game addition lottery table (1G) (Part 3) in the embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the bintar RUSH loop rate random determination table (the 1) in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the bintar RUSH loop rate random determination table (the 2) in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the bintar RUSH continuation random determination table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the RTG transfer lottery table in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the PTR stock loop rate random determination table (the 1) in RTG in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the PTR stock loop rate random determination table (the 2) in RTG in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the PTR stock lottery table in RTG in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific Lip Navi conversion lottery table in BB (normal BB) in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific Lip Navi conversion lottery table (ARTBB) in BB in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the BB fake specific lip navigation conversion lottery table in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific Lip Navi conversion lottery table (level 1) in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART specific LipNavi conversion lottery table (level 3) in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific Lip Navi conversion lottery table (level 1) in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the fake specific lip navigation conversion lottery table (levels 1 and 3) in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART specific Lip Navi conversion lottery table (level 2) in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART specific Lip Navi conversion lottery table (level 4) in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the navigation classification random determination table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the navigation classification random determination table (the 2) in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the navigation classification random determination table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the navigation classification random determination table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the navigation classification random determination table (the 5) in one embodiment of this invention. It is a main flow chart which shows the example of processing of the main control circuit of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of medal acceptance / start check processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of internal lottery processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of lottery value change processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the game lock lottery processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of reel stop initialization processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of lock processing at the time of game start in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a pull-in priority storage processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the pull-in priority table selection processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the design code storage processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of reel stop control processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of stop button detection processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the number determination processing of a sliding piece in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the 2nd and 3rd stop processing in one embodiment of the present invention. 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of line change bit check processing according to an embodiment of the present invention. 6 is a flowchart illustrating an example of line mask data change processing according to the embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of priority attraction-in control processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of control change processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the control change processing after the 2nd stop in one embodiment of the present invention. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of RT control processing according to an embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the bonus end check processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the bonus operation check processing in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of interruption processing by control of the main CPU in one embodiment of the present invention. It is the entire flowchart at the time of operating the start lever, which shows a processing example of the sub control circuit of the gaming machine in the embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart (the 1) which shows an example of the lottery processing during CZ of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart (the 2) which shows an example of the lottery process during CZ of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart (the 3) which shows an example of the lottery processing during CZ of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of BB specific Lip navigation conversion fake lottery processing of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the specialization start processing of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the BB specific LipNavi conversion lottery processing of the gaming machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the lottery processing during MICHI of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart (the 1) which shows an example of BB time lottery processing during ART of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart (the 2) which shows an example of BB time lottery processing during ART of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart (the 3) which shows an example of BB time lottery processing during ART of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart (the 4) which shows an example of BB time lottery processing during ART of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of BB illegal lottery processing of a game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart (the 1) which shows an example of the process at the time of the sub state transition of the game machine in one embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (the 2) which shows an example of the process at the time of the sub state transition of the game machine in one embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart (the 3) which shows an example of the process at the time of the sub state transition of the game machine in one embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart (4) which shows an example of the process at the time of a sub state transition of the game machine in one embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart (the 5) which shows an example of the processing at the time of sub state shift of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart (the 1) which shows an example of the lottery processing during normal of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart (the 2) which shows an example of the lottery processing during normal of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart (the 3) which shows an example of the lottery processing during normal of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart (the 4) which shows an example of the lottery processing during normal of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart (the 1) which shows an example of processing at the time of BB end of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart (the 2) which shows an example of processing at the time of BB end of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart (the 1) which shows an example of the process in LV.1 of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart (the 2) which shows an example of the processing in LV.1 of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart (the 3) which shows an example of the process in LV.1 of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the LV.1,3 middle fake specific lip navigation conversion lottery process of the gaming machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of LV.1, 3 and 5 specific Lipnavi conversion lottery processing of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the addition specialization shift processing of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart (the 1) which shows an example of the processing in LV.2 of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart (the 2) which shows an example of the processing in LV.2 of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart (the 3) which shows an example of the processing in LV.2 of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of LV.2,4 specific Lipnavi conversion lottery processing of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the conversion processing of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart (the 1) which shows an example of the processing in LV.3 of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart (the 2) which shows an example of processing in LV.3 of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart (the 3) which shows an example of the process in LV.3 of the gaming machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart (the 1) which shows an example of the processing in LV.4 of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart (the 2) which shows an example of the processing in LV.4 of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart (the 3) which shows an example of the processing in LV.4 of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart (the 1) which shows an example of the processing in LV.5 of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart (the 2) which shows an example of the processing in LV.5 of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flowchart (the 3) which shows an example of the process in LV.5 of the game machine in one embodiment of this invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of the PTR stock loop lottery processing of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during specialization preparation of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during PREMIUM of a game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart (the 1) which shows an example of processing during FIGHYING of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart (the 2) which shows an example of processing during FIGHING of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during BURNING of a game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart (the 1) showing an example of processing during B_RUSH of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart (the 2) which shows an example of processing during B_RUSH of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during RTG of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart (the 1) which shows an example of an ART end waiting process of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart (the 2) which shows an example of the processing while waiting for the ART to end in the gaming machine in the embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of a spinning machine stop of a game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart (the 1) which shows an example of the 3rd stop operation time processing of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart (the 2) which shows an example of the 3rd stop operation time processing of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart (the 3) which shows an example of the 3rd stop operation time processing of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing during game lock of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of change of settings of a game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for explaining the functional flow of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the process of the pachi-slot regarding the suggestion effect of the setting value in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure showing an example of a suggestion production correspondence table in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of power-on of a game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a flow chart which shows an example of setting value suggestion processing after ART lottery of the game machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting difference table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting value determination table in one Embodiment of this invention.

(First embodiment)
Hereinafter, a pachi-slot is taken as an example of a gaming machine showing an embodiment to which the present invention can be applied, and its configuration and operation will be described with reference to the drawings. In this embodiment, the assist time (hereinafter referred to as “AT”), which is a function of navigating the establishment of a specific winning combination by a lamp or the like, and the winning probability of replay when a specific symbol combination is displayed. A pachi-slot having a function of operating a gaming state higher than normal, that is, a function of assist replay time (hereinafter referred to as "ART") that simultaneously operates with a function of replay time (hereinafter referred to as "RT") will be described. ..

<Function flow>
First, the functional flow of the pachi-slot will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachi-slot of the present embodiment, medals are used as a game medium for playing a game. In addition to medals, for example, coins, game balls, game point data, tokens, or the like can be applied as the game medium.

When a player inserts a medal into a pachi-slot and operates a start lever, one value (hereinafter referred to as a random number value) is extracted from random numbers in a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535).

The internal lottery means performs lottery based on the extracted random number value and determines an internal winning combination. The internal lottery means is one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit described later. By the determination of the internal winning combination, the combination of symbols that is allowed to be displayed along the below-described activated line (winning determination line) is determined. The types of symbol combinations are classified into those related to "winning prizes" in which benefits such as payout of medals, operation of replay (replay), operation of bonuses, etc. are given to the player, and so-called "outliers". The related items are provided.

Further, when the start lever is operated, the plurality of reels are rotated. After that, when the player presses the stop button corresponding to the predetermined reel, the reel stop control means performs control for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing when the stop button is pressed. To do. The reel stop control means is one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit described later.

In the pachi-slot, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel within a specified time (190 msec or 75 msec) from when the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reel within this specified time is referred to as the “number of sliding pieces”. In the present embodiment, when the specified period is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding pieces (maximum number of sliding pieces) is set to 4 symbols, and when the specified period is 75 msec, the maximum sliding piece is set. The number is set to one pattern.

The reel stop control means, when the internal winning combination permitting the combination display of the symbols relating to the winning is determined, the combination of the symbols is normally placed on the activated line within a prescribed time of 190 msec (for 4 symbols). The rotation of the reel is stopped so as to be displayed as much as possible. Furthermore, the reel stop control means uses various prescribed times corresponding to the gaming state, and stops the rotation of the reel so that a combination of symbols which is not permitted to be displayed by the internal winning combination is not displayed along the activated line. Let

In this way, when the rotations of the plurality of reels are all stopped, the winning determination means determines whether the combination of symbols displayed along the activated line is related to winning. This winning determination means is also one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit described later. Then, when it is determined by the winning determination means that the displayed combination of symbols is related to winning, a bonus such as payout of medals is given to the player. In the pachi-slot, the above-described series of flows is performed as one game (unit game).

Further, in the pachi-slot, in the flow of the above-mentioned series of game operations, video display performed by a display device such as a liquid crystal display device, light output performed by various lamps, sound output performed by a speaker, or a combination thereof is performed. Various performances are performed by using it.

Specifically, when the start lever is operated, a random number value for production (hereinafter referred to as a random number value for production) is extracted in addition to the random number value used for determining the internal winning combination described above. When the random number value for effect is extracted, the effect content determination means randomly determines the effect to be executed this time from the plurality of kinds of effect content associated with the internal winning combination. The effect content determining means is one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the sub-control circuit described later.

Next, when the effect content is determined by the effect content determining means, the effect executing means responds to each of the triggers such as when the reel starts rotating, when each reel stops rotating, and when the presence or absence of a prize is determined. To execute. In this way, in the pachi-slot, the player has an opportunity to know or anticipate the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of symbols to be aimed) by executing the effect contents associated with the internal winning combination. It is provided, and the interest of the player can be improved.

<Pachislot structure>
Next, the structure of the pachi-slot in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Appearance structure]
First, the external structure of the pachi-slot 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3. FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing an external structure of the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 3 is a schematic front configuration diagram near the liquid crystal screen of the pachi-slot 1.

The pachi-slot 1 includes an exterior body 2, as shown in FIG. The exterior body 2 has a cabinet 2a that houses reels, circuit boards, and the like, and a front door 2b that is attached to the cabinet 2a so as to be openable and closable.

Handles 7 are provided on both side surfaces of the cabinet 2a (in FIG. 2, only the handle 7 on one side is shown). The handle 7 is composed of a concave member, and an operator's hand is hung on the handle 7 when carrying the pachi-slot 1.

Inside the cabinet 2a, as shown in FIG. 3 and FIG. 4 described later, three reels 3L, 3C, 3R (variable display means) are provided, and the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are arranged in the lateral direction (reel). Are arranged in a line in a direction orthogonal to the rotation direction of the. Hereinafter, the reels 3L, 3C and 3R are referred to as the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R, respectively. Each reel (display row) has a reel main body formed in a cylindrical shape, and a translucent sheet material mounted on the peripheral surface of the reel main body. On the surface of the sheet material, a plurality of (for example, 21) symbols are drawn along the circumferential direction (rotational direction of the reel), and symbols adjacent to each other along the symbol arrangement direction are arranged at a predetermined interval. It

The front door 2b includes a door body 9, a front panel 10, a liquid crystal display device 11 (see FIG. 3), and a waist panel 12. The door body 9 is openably and closably attached to the cabinet 2a using a hinge (not shown). The hinge is provided on the left side end of the door body 9 when the door body 9 is viewed from the front side (player side) of the pachi-slot 1.

The liquid crystal display device 11 (notifying means) is attached to the upper part of the door body 9 and executes an effect by displaying an image. As shown in FIG. 3, the liquid crystal display device 11 includes a display section (including three display windows 4L, 4C, 4R for displaying symbols drawn on the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively). Display screen) 11a. In the present embodiment, an image is displayed and an effect is executed by using the entire display section 11a including the three display windows 4L, 4C, 4R.

The three display windows 4L, 4C, 4R are formed of a transparent member such as an acrylic plate, for example. The three display windows 4L, 4C, 4R are provided at positions overlapping with the arrangement area of the three reels when viewed from the front (player side), and located in front of the three reels (player side). It is provided to do. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the three reels provided behind them through the three display windows 4L, 4C, 4R.

In the present embodiment, when the rotation of the corresponding reel provided behind the display window is stopped, each display window is arranged continuously among the plurality of symbols drawn (arranged) on each reel. The size is set to display one pattern. Therefore, in the frame of each display window, as shown in FIG. 3, upper, middle, and lower symbol display areas (hereinafter, referred to as upper area, middle area, and lower area, respectively) are provided for each reel. One symbol is displayed in each symbol display area. That is, the symbols are displayed in the three display windows 4L, 4C, and 4R in a 3×3 array form. In the present embodiment, the line (cross-up line) that connects the lower area of the left reel 3L, the middle area of the middle reel 3C, and the upper area of the right reel 3R is an effective line for determining whether or not to win. Define.

The front panel 10 is attached to the upper part of the door body 9 so as to cover the peripheral portion of the display screen (display part 11a) of the liquid crystal display device 11, and is arranged so as to overlap the front surface of the display part 11a. It The front panel 10 includes a decorative frame 101 in which three panel openings 101a exposing a necessary display screen area in the display section 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11 are formed, and a transparent panel 101 that closes the three panel openings 101a in the decorative frame 101. 2 has a protective cover 102 (see FIG. 2).

Further, the decorative frame 101 is provided with a lamp group 21 and effect switches 22L and 22R (hereinafter referred to as left effect switch 22L and right effect switch 22R).

The lamp group 21 includes, for example, a lamp 21a provided on the left side of the decorative frame 101 and a lamp 21b provided on the right side of the decorative frame 101 when viewed from the player side (see FIG. 3). Each of the lamps included in the lamp group 21 is configured by an LED (Light Emitting Diode) or the like, and turns on and off the light in a pattern corresponding to the effect contents.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the left effect switch 22L is provided on the left side of the decorative frame 101 when viewed from the player side, and at the lower left corner of the protective cover 102 when viewed from the player side. Will be placed. On the other hand, the right effect switch 22R is provided on the right side of the decorative frame 101 when viewed from the player side, and is arranged at the lower right corner of the protective cover 102 when viewed from the player side.

Further, a central movable unit 105, a left movable unit 106, and a right movable unit 107 are attached to the decorative frame 101.

The central movable unit 105 is arranged in the central portion near the upper end in the decorative frame 101 and has a movable component 309. The central movable unit 105 rotates, for example, a movable component 309 at an initial position (see FIG. 3) around a shaft extending in the left-right direction and lowers the movable component 309 when a specific effect is performed. As a result, the movable component 309 moves to a position that covers a part of the display unit 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11.

The left movable unit 106 is arranged near the left end of the decorative frame 101 and has a left door 188. The right movable unit 107 is arranged near the right end of the decorative frame 101 and has a right door 189. The left movable unit 106 rotates, for example, the left door 188 at the initial position (see FIG. 3) around an axis extending in the vertical direction when a predetermined effect is performed. Further, the right movable unit 107 rotates the right door 189 in the initial position around an axis extending in the vertical direction, for example, when a predetermined effect is performed. In the pachi-slot 1, one of the left door 188 and the right door 189 may be rotated, or both the left door 188 and the right door 189 may be rotated, when a predetermined effect is performed.

As shown in FIG. 2, the waist panel 12 is provided substantially at the center of the door body 9, and the waist panel 12 has a pedestal 13 formed therein. Further, the pedestal portion 13 has various devices (medal slot 14, MAX bet buttons 15A, 1BET button 15B, start lever 16, three stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R, clearing button 18, etc. which are objects to be operated by the player. ) Is provided.

The medal slot 14 is provided to receive medals that are dropped from the outside by the player onto the pachi-slot 1. The medals received from the medal insertion slot 14 are used for one game with a predetermined number (for example, 3) set in advance as an upper limit, and the number of medals exceeding the predetermined number is deposited inside the pachi-slot 1. It is possible (so-called credit function).

The MAX bet button 15A and the 1BET button 15B are provided to determine the number of coins to be used for one game from the medals stored in the pachi-slot 1. The payment button 18 is provided for pulling out (discharging) the medals stored inside the pachi-slot 1 to the outside.

The start lever 16 is provided to start rotation of all reels (3L, 3C, 3R). The stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R are provided in association with the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively, and each stop button is provided to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel. Hereinafter, the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R are referred to as the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R, respectively.

Although not shown in FIG. 2, the pedestal portion 13 is provided with a 7-segment display 6 (see FIG. 5) including a 7-segment LED (Light Emitting Diode). The 7-segment display 6 is stored in the pachi-slot 1 and a payout number display 6a that displays the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a privilege (hereinafter referred to as the payout number) with a two-digit number. The number of stored medals (hereinafter, referred to as the number of credits) is displayed as a two-digit number, and the stored number display 6b is provided.

Although not shown in FIG. 2, the pedestal portion 13 is provided with a bet number display LED 8 (see FIG. 5) adjacent to the 7-segment display unit 6. The bet number display LED 8 is composed of three LED lamps. Specifically, at the start of three unit games, a 1BET lamp 8a that lights when the player drops the first medal on the pachi-slot 1 and a 2BET that lights when the second medal drops. It is composed of a lamp 8b and a 3BET lamp 8c which lights up when a third medal is dropped.

A medal payout opening 24, a medal receiving tray 25, two speakers 20L, 20R, etc. are provided at the bottom of the door body 9. The medal payout opening 24 guides the medals discharged by driving a medal payout device 33, which will be described later, to the outside. The medal tray 25 stores the medals discharged from the medal payout opening 24. In addition, the two speakers 20L and 20R output sound effects and music such as music corresponding to the effect contents.

[Internal structure]
Next, the internal structure of the pachi-slot 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the internal structure of the pachi-slot 1, and is a diagram showing a state when the front door 2b is opened with respect to the cabinet 2a.

The cabinet 2a is configured by a box-shaped member having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape with one surface open on the front side (front door 2b side).

A main board 31 mounted with a main control circuit 41 (see FIG. 5) described later is provided near the upper end of the cabinet 2a. The main control circuit 41 is a circuit for determining an internal winning combination. The specific configuration of the main control circuit 41 will be described in detail later.

A reel unit including a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R is provided near the center of the cabinet 2a. Although not shown in FIG. 4, each reel is connected to a corresponding stepping motor (one of stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R in FIG. 5) described later via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio. ..

A medal payout device 33 (hereinafter referred to as a hopper 33) having a structure capable of accommodating a large number of medals and discharging them one by one is provided near the lower end of the cabinet 2a. Further, in the vicinity of the lower end of the cabinet 2a, a power supply device 34 that supplies necessary power to each device included in the pachi-slot 1 is provided on one side part (left side in the example shown in FIG. 4) of the hopper 33. To be

A sub-board 32, on which a sub-control circuit 42 (see FIGS. 5 and 6) described later is mounted, is provided near the upper end on the back surface side (the side opposite to the display screen side) of the front door 2b. The sub-control circuit 42 is a circuit that controls execution of effects such as display of images. The specific configuration of the sub control circuit 42 will be described in detail later.

Further, a selector 35 is provided near the substantially central portion on the back surface side of the front door 2b. The selector 35 is a device for selecting whether or not the material, shape, etc. of the medal inserted from the outside through the medal insertion slot 14 (see FIG. 2) are proper, and the medals determined to be proper are in the hopper 33. I will guide you to. Although not shown in FIG. 4, a medal sensor 35S (see FIG. 5) for detecting that a proper medal has passed is provided on the path of the medal in the selector 35.

A payout control board (not shown) on which a payout control circuit (see FIG. 5) described later is mounted is provided in the cabinet 2a. The payout control circuit is a circuit that performs various controls such as control of the operation of the medal payout device 33. The specific structure of the payout control circuit will be described later.

<Circuit structure of pachi-slot>
Next, the configuration of the circuit included in the pachi-slot 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. Note that FIG. 5 is a block configuration diagram of the entire circuit included in the pachi-slot 1. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of the sub control circuit.

As shown in FIG. 5, the pachi-slot 1 includes a main control circuit 41, a sub control circuit 42, and peripheral devices (actuators) electrically connected to these circuits.

[Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 41 is mainly composed of a microcomputer 50 mounted on a circuit board (main board 31). As other components, the main control circuit 41 includes a clock pulse generation circuit 54, a frequency divider 55, a random number generator 56, a sampling circuit 57, a display drive circuit 64, a hopper drive circuit 65, and a payout completion signal circuit. Including 66.

The microcomputer 50 includes a main CPU (Central Processing Unit) 51, a main ROM (Read Only Memory) 52, and a main RAM (Random Access Memory) 53.

The main ROM 52 stores control programs for various processes executed by the main CPU 51, a data table such as an internal lottery table, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control circuit 42, and the like. Further, the main RAM 53 is provided with a storage area for temporarily storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by executing the control program.

A clock pulse generation circuit 54, a frequency divider 55, a random number generator 56, and a sampling circuit 57 are connected to the main CPU 51. The clock pulse generation circuit 54 and the frequency divider 55 generate (generate) a clock pulse. Then, the main CPU 51 executes various control programs based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 56 also generates a random number in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). Then, the sampling circuit 57 extracts one value from the generated random numbers.

Various switches and various sensors are connected to the input port of the microcomputer 50. The main CPU 51 receives input signals from various switches and controls operations of peripheral devices such as the stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R.

The stop switch 17S (stop operation detection means) detects that the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R are pressed by the player (stop operation). The start switch 16S (start operation detection means) detects that the start lever 16 has been operated by the player (start operation). The settlement switch 18S detects that the player has pressed the settlement button. Further, the bet switch 15S detects that the bet button (MAX bet button 15A or 1BET button 15B) has been pressed by the player.

The medal sensor 35S (insertion operation detection means) detects that a medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 14 has passed through the selector 35.

Further, as the peripheral devices whose operations are controlled by the microcomputer 50, there are three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R (variation display means), a 7-segment display 6 and a hopper 33. A drive circuit for controlling the operation of each peripheral device is connected to the output port of the microcomputer 50. Specifically, the motor drive circuit 62, the display drive circuit 64, and the hopper drive circuit 65 are connected to the output port of the microcomputer 50.

The motor drive circuit 62 controls driving of three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R provided corresponding to the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively. The reel position detection circuit 63 detects, for each reel, a reel index indicating that the reel has made one rotation, by an optical sensor having a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion. The reel position detection circuit 63 is connected to the input port of the microcomputer 50 and outputs the detection result to the microcomputer 50.

Each of the three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R has a configuration in which the momentum thereof is proportional to the number of output pulses, and the rotation axis can be stopped at a designated angle. Further, the driving force of each stepping motor is transmitted to the corresponding reel via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio. Then, each time a pulse is output to each stepping motor, the corresponding reel rotates at a constant angle.

The main CPU 51 detects the reel index of each reel and then counts the number of times the pulse is output to the corresponding stepping motor to determine the rotation angle of each reel (specifically, how many symbols the reel has. Just rotate).

Here, a method of managing the rotation angle of each reel will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to each stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter (not shown) provided in the main RAM 53. Then, each time the pulse counter counts the output of a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 times) required to rotate one symbol, the value of the symbol counter (not shown) provided in the main RAM 53 is set to "1. Is added. The symbol counter is provided for each reel. Then, the value of the symbol counter is cleared when the reel position detection circuit 63 detects the reel index.

That is, in the present embodiment, by managing the value of the symbol counter, it is managed how many symbols have been rotated after the reel index is detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol on each reel is detected based on the position where the reel index is detected.

The display drive circuit 64 controls the operation of the 7-segment display 6. The hopper drive circuit 65 controls the operation of the hopper 33. Further, the payout completion signal circuit 66 manages the detection of medals performed by the medal detection unit 33S provided in the hopper 33, and checks whether or not the number of medals discharged from the hopper 33 to the outside reaches a predetermined payout number. To do. The payout completion signal circuit 66 is connected to the input port of the microcomputer 50 and outputs the check result to the microcomputer 50.

[Sub control circuit]
As shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. 6, the sub control circuit 42 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 41 and performs processing such as effect content determination and execution based on a command transmitted from the main control circuit 41. .. As shown in FIG. 6, the sub control circuit 42 basically includes a sub CPU 81, a sub ROM 82, a sub RAM 83, a rendering processor 84, a drawing RAM 85, and a driver 86. Further, the sub control circuit 42 includes a DSP (Digital Signal Processor) 90, an audio RAM 91, an A/D (Analog to Digital) converter 92, an amplifier 93, a central movable unit drive circuit 96, a left movable unit drive circuit 97, and a right movable unit. It includes a unit drive circuit 98 and a rotating lamp drive circuit 99.

The sub CPU 81 controls the output of video, sound, and light according to the control program stored in the sub ROM 82 based on the command transmitted from the main control circuit 41. The sub ROM 82 basically has a program storage area and a data storage area.

Various control programs executed by the sub CPU 81 are stored in the program storage area. In the control program stored in the program storage area, for example, a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 41, a random number value for performance is extracted to determine the content of performance (performance data), and An effect registration task for performing registration, a drawing control task for controlling display of an image on the liquid crystal display device 11 based on the determined effect contents, a lamp control task for controlling light output by the lamp group 21, and a speaker. A program such as a voice control task for controlling the sound output by 20L and 20R is included.

In the data storage area, for example, a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data that forms various effect contents, a storage area for storing animation data related to image creation, and BGM (Back-Ground Music). And various storage areas such as a storage area for storing sound data regarding sound effects and a storage area for storing lamp data regarding a pattern of turning on/off light.

The sub RAM 83 has a storage area for registering the determined effect contents, effect data, and the like, a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control circuit 41, and the like.

In the sub-control circuit 42, as shown in FIG. 6, the liquid crystal display device 11, the speakers 20L and 20R, the lamp group 21, the left effect switch 22L, the right effect switch 22R, the central movable unit 105, and the left movable unit. Peripheral devices such as 106, the right movable unit 107, and the rotating lamp 124 are connected. That is, the operations of these peripheral devices are controlled by the sub control circuit 42.

In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 81, the rendering processor 84, the drawing RAM 85 (including a frame buffer), and the driver 86 create a video according to the animation data specified by the effect contents, and the created video is displayed by the liquid crystal display device 11. Is displayed.

The sub CPU 81, the DSP 90, the audio RAM 91, the A/D converter 92, and the amplifier 93 output sounds such as BGM from the speakers 20L and 20R according to the sound data specified by the effect contents. In addition, the sub CPU 81 turns on and off the lamp group 21 according to the lamp data specified by the effect contents.

The sub CPU 81 and the central movable unit drive circuit 96 drive the central movable unit 105 in accordance with the central movable unit drive data designated by the effect contents. That is, the central movable unit 105 is driven when a specific effect is performed, and moves the movable component 309 to a position that covers a part of the display unit 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11.

Further, the sub CPU 81 and the left movable unit drive circuit 97 drive the left movable unit 106 in accordance with the left movable unit drive data designated by the effect contents. The sub CPU 81 and the right movable unit drive circuit 98 drive the right movable unit 107 according to the right movable unit drive data designated by the contents of the effect. Further, the sub CPU 81 and the rotating lamp driving circuit 99 drive the rotating lamp 124 according to the rotating lamp driving data designated by the effect contents.

Furthermore, each of the left effect switch 22L and the right effect switch 22R detects that the player has pressed the switch, and transmits the detection result to the sub-control circuit 42 described later.

<Structure of data table stored in main ROM>
Next, the configuration of various data tables stored in the main ROM 52 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Design placement table]
First, the symbol arrangement table will be described with reference to FIG. The symbol arrangement table, the position of each symbol in the respective rotation directions of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, and data specifying the type of symbol arranged at each position (hereinafter, symbol code (in FIG. 7) Refer to the symbol code table))))).

In the symbol arrangement table, the position of the symbol located in the middle area of each reel in the frame of the display window is defined as "0" when the reel index is detected. Then, in each reel, in the order of advancing in the rotation direction of the reel with reference to the symbol position "0" (direction from the symbol position "19" to the symbol position "0" in FIG. 7), the value of the symbol counter corresponds to " "0" to "19" are assigned to each symbol as symbol positions.

That is, by referring to the value of the symbol counter (“0” to “19”) and the symbol arrangement table, the symbols displayed in the upper area, the middle area and the lower area of each reel in the frame of the display window. The type of can be specified. For example, when the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the left reel 3L is "7", the symbol position "8" is set in each of the upper area, the middle area and the lower area of the left reel 3L in the frame of the left display window 4L. The symbol “cherry”, the symbol “watermelon” at the symbol position “7”, and the symbol “Replay 1” at the symbol position “6” are displayed.

[Design combination table]
Next, the symbol combination table (No. 1 to No. 4) will be described with reference to FIGS. The symbol combination table defines a correspondence between a symbol combination predetermined according to the type of privilege, a display combination (storage area), and the number of payouts. In the present embodiment, for convenience of description, the symbol combination table has not only a symbol combination relating to a privilege (bonus, medal payout, re-gaming), but also a symbol which is a trigger when the RT gaming state shifts to the RT1 gaming state. A combination (see the symbol combination related to the code name “HZR01” (G_bell spilled eye 1) in FIG. 8) is also described as a display combination.

In the present embodiment, when the symbol combination displayed by the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R along the activated line (cross-up line) matches the symbol combination defined in the symbol combination table. Is determined to be a prize. Then, when it is determined that the prize is won, the player is provided with a privilege such as payout of medals and operation of a replay (replay). In addition, when the symbol combination displayed along the activated line does not match any of the symbol combinations defined in the symbol combination table, the so-called “out” occurs. In other words, in the present embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to “off” is not defined in the symbol combination table, so that the symbol combination “out” is defined. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the “combination” item may be directly defined by providing a “combination” item in the symbol combination table.

Various data described in the display combination column in the symbol combination table are data for identifying the symbol combination displayed along the activated line. The "data" in the display combination column is represented by 1-byte data, and a unique symbol combination (content of display combination) is assigned to each bit in the data.

The data in the "storage area" of the display combination column is data for designating a display combination storage area (see FIG. 43 described below) in which the corresponding display combination is stored, which will be described later. In this embodiment, 32 display combination storing areas are provided. In the present embodiment, display combinations having the same bit pattern (1-byte data pattern) and different contents are managed as different display combinations due to the difference in "storage area".

The numerical value described in the payout number column in the symbol combination table indicates the number of medals to be paid out to the player. In a combination of symbols in which a numerical value of 1 or more is given as the "payout number" data, the same number of medals as the numerical value is paid out.

For example, in the present embodiment, when the display combination (G_9-bell) associated with any of the code names “FR01” to “FR05” is determined as the display combination for the number of inserted medals, Nine medals are paid out (see FIG. 10). Further, for example, when the display combination (G_CD watermelon, G_middle watermelon, G_CU watermelon) associated with any of the code names “FR06” to “FR08” is determined as the display combination with respect to the number of inserted medals. In this case, four medals are paid out (see FIG. 10).

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, when a display combination related to replay as the display combination (for example, a symbol combination of the display combination (G_RT1 transition rep 1) related to the code name “RP01” in FIG. 8) is determined, the replay is performed. Works. Further, in the present embodiment, for example, as a display combination, a display combination related to “BB (big bonus)” (a symbol combination of display combinations (G_BB1 to G_BB5) related to code names “BB01” to “BB05” in FIG. 8) Is determined, the BB is activated.

[Bonus table]
Next, the bonus operation time table will be described with reference to FIG. The bonus operation time table is stored in a game state flag storage area (see FIG. 44 described later) provided in the main RAM 53, a bonus end number counter, a game possible number counter and a prize winning number counter when a bonus operation is performed. Data to be specified.

The game state flag is data for identifying the type of bonus game in operation. In this embodiment, a big bonus (hereinafter referred to as “BB”) and a regular bonus (hereinafter referred to as “RB”) are provided as types of bonus games. “RB” is what is called a first-class special accessory. "BB" is called an accessory continuous operation device related to the first-class special accessory, and increases the probability that "RB" operates.
In addition, as "BB" according to the present invention, "RB" may be continuously operated. In this case, "RB" is also operating when "BB" is operating.

The bonus end number counter is a counter (data) for managing whether or not the payout number of medals exceeds a specified number that triggers the end of the bonus game. In the present embodiment, when the symbol combination corresponding to the display combination associated with the code names “BB01” to “BB05” in the symbol combination table shown in FIG. 8 is stopped and displayed on the activated line, “BB” operates, After that, when the medals exceeding the prescribed number “44” are paid out, the “BB” ends.

In the operation of "BB" described above, first, at the start of the bonus, the numerical value (specified number) specified in the bonus operation table is stored in the bonus end number counter. Next, each time a medal is paid out during the bonus operation, the value of the bonus end number counter is decremented. Then, when the value of the bonus end number counter is updated to a value less than "0", the bonus in operation ends.

The playable number counter is a counter (data) for managing the number of remaining games that can be played when the "RB" is activated, that is, a so-called playable number. The possible winning number counter is a counter (data) for managing the number of remaining games in which a combination of symbols related to winning can be displayed when the “BB (RB)” is activated, that is, a so-called possible winning number. ..

[RT transition table]
Next, the RT transition table will be described with reference to FIG. The RT transition table defines the correspondence relationship between the transition condition of the RT gaming state and the RT gaming states of the migration source and the migration destination.

In this embodiment, as the RT gaming state, five types of states, RT0 gaming state to RT4 gaming state, in which the type of internal winning combination of replay and the winning probability thereof are different from each other, are provided. Then, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13, the symbol combination relating to a predetermined internal winning combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line, or the prescribed number of games is exhausted as a transition condition between the RT game states. Become.

Specifically, the transition source is RT1 gaming state, RT3 gaming state, RT4 gaming state, code name "FR14" (G_L1st miss 1), "FR15" (G_L1st miss 2), "FR16" (G_L1st miss 3) , "FR17" (G_L1st miss 4), "FR18" (G_L1st miss 6), "FR19" (G_L1st miss 6), "FR20" (G_L1st miss 7), "FR21" (G_L1st miss 8), "FR22" ( G_C1st miss 1), "FR23" (G_C1st miss 2), "FR24" (G_C1st miss 3), "FR25" (G_C1st miss 4), "FR26" (G_R1st miss 1), "FR27" (G_R1st miss 2), "FR28" (G_R1st miss 3), "FR29" (G_R1st miss 4), "FR30" (G_R1st miss 5) and "FR31" (G_R1st miss 6) The symbol combination of the display combination (the pushing order failure combination). ) Is stopped and displayed on the activated line, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT0 gaming state. In addition, when the transition source is the RT2 gaming state, when the prescribed number of games (for example, 20 games) is exhausted, the RT gaming state is shifted to the RT0 gaming state. Further, when the combination of symbols corresponding to RB is stopped and displayed on the activated line, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT0 gaming state.

In addition, the transition source is the RT0 gaming state, the RT3 gaming state, the RT4 gaming state, and the code names “RP01” (G_RT1 transition rep 1), “RP02” (G_RT1 transition rep 2), “HZR01” (G_bell spill 1 ), "HZR02" (G_bell spilled eye 2), "HZR03" (G_bell spilled eye 3) and "HZR04" (G_bell spilled eye 4), which is a combination of symbols of the display combination (push order failure combination). When is stopped and displayed on the activated line, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT1 gaming state. Further, when the RB is determined as the internal winning combination, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT1 gaming state.

Further, when the transition source is the RT0 gaming state or the RT1 gaming state, and the symbol combination of the display combination related to the code name “RP03” (G_RT2 transition lip) is stopped and displayed on the activated line, the RT gaming state is: Transition to RT1 gaming state. Further, when the transition source is the RT1 gaming state or the RT4 gaming state, and the symbol combination of the display combination relating to the code name “RP04” (G_RT3 transition lip) is stopped and displayed on the activated line, the RT gaming state is: Move to RT3 gaming state. Further, in the RT3 gaming state, when the symbol combination of the display combination related to the code name “RP05” (G_RT4 shift rip) is stopped and displayed on the activated line, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT4 gaming state.

The characteristics of each RT gaming state and the transition flow between RT gaming states will be described later in detail with reference to the drawings.

[Internal lottery table determination table]
Next, the internal lottery table determination table will be described with reference to FIG. The internal lottery table determination table defines a correspondence relationship between each gaming state, the number of inserted medals, the internal lottery table, and the number of lottery set in each gaming state.

Specifically, in the normal gaming state (the number of medals inserted is "3"), the internal gaming state internal lottery table is used, and "91" is set as the lottery number. In the RB game state (the number of inserted medals is "3"), the internal lottery table for RB is used, and "88" is set as the number of lottery.

[Internal lottery table]
Next, the internal lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. The internal lottery table defines the correspondence relationship between the winning number and the lottery value when each winning number is determined in each of the normal gaming state (RT0 gaming state to RT4 gaming state) and the RB gaming state.

In addition, the lottery value is defined for each setting (settings 1 to 6) for adjusting the expected value of the internal lottery such as a preset bonus or a small winning combination. This setting is changed using, for example, a reset switch (not shown) and a setting key switch (not shown).

In the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, first, a random number value (external random number value) extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (for example, 0 to 65535) is set to a lottery value defined corresponding to each lottery number. And subtract sequentially. Next, a determination (internal lottery) is made as to whether or not the result of the subtraction becomes negative (whether a so-called "carry" has occurred). Then, when the result of the subtraction in the predetermined winning number becomes negative (a "digit" occurs), it means that the winning number has been won.

Therefore, in the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, the larger the numerical value defined as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the assigned data (data pointer described later) is determined. The winning probability of each winning number can be represented by “lottery value defined for each winning number/the number of all random number values that may be extracted (random number denominator: 65536)”.

(1) Internal lottery table for general gaming state (RT0)
FIG. 15 and FIG. 16 are views showing the structure of the internal lottery table (RT0) for the general gaming state. This internal lottery table for the general gaming state is referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state (non-bonus gaming state). The internal lottery table for general gaming state (RT0) defines the relationship between the winning numbers "1" to "91" and the lottery value.

For example, in the RT0 gaming state (general gaming state), referring to the setting 6 of the internal lottery table for the general gaming state, the winning number "2" (abbreviation "F_RT01 maintenance rep 1") is the winning probability "1394/ 65536". When the winning number "2" is won, "2" is acquired as a small win/replay data pointer described later.

(2) Internal lottery table for general gaming state (RT1)
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing the structure of the internal lottery table (RT1) for the general gaming state. The internal lottery table for general gaming state (RT1) is a table referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state (non-bonus gaming state). The internal lottery table (RT1) for the general gaming state defines the relationship between the winning numbers "1" to "41" and the lottery value.

If the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state, the lottery values defined in the winning number "1" to "41" columns of the internal gaming state internal lottery table (RT0) shown in FIG. The lottery numbers are changed to the lottery values defined in the columns of the winning numbers “1” to “41”. At this time, the same lottery value is used without changing the lottery values of the winning numbers other than the winning numbers "1" to "41" of the general gaming state internal lottery table (RT0).

(3) Internal lottery table for general gaming state (RT2)
FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a configuration of an internal lottery table (RT2) for a general gaming state. The internal lottery table for general gaming state (RT2) is a table referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state (non-bonus gaming state). The internal lottery table for general gaming state (RT2) defines the relationship between the winning numbers "1" to "41" and the lottery value.

When the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state, the lottery values defined in the columns of the winning numbers “1” to “41” of the general gaming state internal lottery table (RT0) shown in FIG. The lottery numbers are changed to the lottery values defined in the columns of the winning numbers “1” to “41”. At this time, the same lottery value is used without changing the lottery values of the winning numbers other than the winning numbers "1" to "41" of the general gaming state internal lottery table (RT0).

(4) Internal lottery table for general gaming state (RT3)
FIG. 19 is a view showing the structure of the general gaming state internal lottery table (RT3). The internal lottery table for general gaming state (RT3) is a table referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state (non-bonus gaming state). The internal lottery table for general gaming state (RT3) defines the relationship between the winning numbers "1" to "41" and the lottery value.

When the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state, the lottery values defined in the lot numbers “1” to “41” of the internal gaming state internal lottery table (RT0) shown in FIG. The lottery numbers are changed to the lottery values defined in the columns of the winning numbers “1” to “41”. At this time, the same lottery value is used without changing the lottery values of the winning numbers other than the winning numbers "1" to "41" of the general gaming state internal lottery table (RT0).

(5) Internal lottery table for general gaming state (RT4)
FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the configuration of the general gaming state internal lottery table (RT4). The internal lottery table for general gaming state (RT4) is a table referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT4 gaming state (non-bonus gaming state). The internal lottery table for general gaming state (RT4) defines the relationship between the winning numbers "1" to "41" and the lottery value.

If the RT gaming state is the RT4 gaming state, the lottery values defined in the winning number "1" to "41" columns of the internal gaming state internal lottery table (RT0) shown in FIG. The lottery numbers are changed to the lottery values defined in the columns of the winning numbers “1” to “41”. At this time, the same lottery value is used without changing the lottery values of the winning numbers other than the winning numbers "1" to "41" of the general gaming state internal lottery table (RT0).

(6) Internal lottery table for general game status (BB carryover)
FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a configuration of an internal lottery table for general game state (BB carryover). The internal lottery table for general game state (BB carryover) is a table referred to when the BB is being carried over (non-bonus game state). In the carryover mode, any of BB1 to BB5 is determined as an internal winning combination, and the internal winning combination is stored as a carryover combination in a carryover combination storing area described later. The internal carryover combination stored in the internal carryover combination storage area is held without being cleared until the combination of the corresponding symbols is displayed on the activated line. The internal lottery table for general gaming state (BB carry-over) defines the relationship between the winning numbers “1” to “41” and “89” to “91” and the lottery value.

When the BB is carried over, the lottery values defined in the columns of the winning numbers "1" to "41" and "89" to "91" of the internal gaming state internal lottery table (RT0) shown in FIG. , The lottery values defined in the columns of the winning numbers “1” to “41” and “89” to “91” of the internal lottery table for the general game state (BB carryover). At this time, the same lottery value is used without changing the lottery values of the winning numbers other than the winning numbers “1” to “41” and “89” to “91” of the internal lottery table (RT0) for the general gaming state. To be

(7) Internal lottery table for general gaming state (RT0 BB in general)
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a configuration of an internal lottery table for general gaming state (RT0 BB in general). The internal lottery table for general gaming state (RT0 BB in general) is a table referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state (in BB). The internal lottery table for general gaming state (RT0 BB in general) defines the relationship between the winning numbers “1” to “41” and “89” to “91” and the lottery value.

In the case of RT0 gaming state (during BB), the winning numbers “1” to “41” and “89” to “91” of the internal gaming state internal lottery table (RT0) shown in FIG. 15 are defined. The lottery value is changed to the lottery value defined in the columns of the winning numbers “1” to “41” and “89” to “91” in the general game state internal lottery table (RT0 BB general). At this time, the same lottery value is used without changing the lottery values of the winning numbers other than the winning numbers “1” to “41” and “89” to “91” of the internal lottery table (RT0) for the general gaming state. To be

(8) Internal lottery table for general gaming state (RT1 RB carryover)
FIG. 23 is a diagram showing the configuration of the internal lottery table for the general gaming state (RT1 RB carryover). The internal lottery table for general gaming state (RT1 RB carryover) is a table referred to when the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state (RB carryover). The internal lottery table for general gaming state (RT1 RB carry-over) defines the relationship between the winning numbers “1” to “41” and “89” to “91” and the lottery value.

In the case of RT1 game state (RB carryover), the winning numbers “1” to “41” and “89” to “91” of the general game state internal lottery table (RT0) shown in FIG. 15 are defined. The determined lottery value is changed to the lottery value defined in the columns of the winning numbers “1” to “41” and “89” to “91” in the general game state internal lottery table (RT1 RB carryover). At this time, the same lottery value is used without changing the lottery values of the winning numbers other than the winning numbers “1” to “41” and “89” to “91” of the internal lottery table (RT0) for the general gaming state. To be

(9) RB Gaming State Internal Lottery Table FIGS. 24 and 25 are diagrams showing the configuration of the RB gaming state internal lottery table. The internal lottery table for the RB gaming state is a table referred to when the gaming state is the RB gaming state (BB gaming state). The internal lottery table for the RB gaming state defines the relationship between the winning numbers “1” to “88” and the lottery value.

For example, in the RB gaming state (BB gaming state), the probability of winning the winning number “54” (abbreviation “F_common bell”) with reference to the internal lottery table for RB is “21681/65536”.

Further, as is clear from the various internal lottery tables shown in FIGS. 15 to 25, in the present embodiment, “out” occurs in the internal lottery process. Although not shown in FIGS. 15 to 25, a winning number “0” is assigned to “out”.

[Internal winning combination determination table]
Next, the internal winning combination determination table will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27. The internal winning combination determination table defines the correspondence between the data pointers and the internal winning combinations. That is, when the small win/replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer are determined, the internal winning combination is uniquely acquired.

The small win/replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer are data acquired based on the winning number acquired as a result of the lottery performed by referring to the internal lottery table, and are defined by the internal winning combination determination table. This is data for designating an internal winning combination to be performed.

Although not shown in FIG. 26 and FIG. 27, in the column of “internal winning combination” in the internal winning combination determination table, not only the code name and abbreviation indicating the internal winning combination but also the display along the effective line is permitted. , Data for identifying the combination of symbols on the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R is defined. Specifically, the identification data of the “internal winning combination” is represented by a combination of 1-byte data and a storage area, like the “display combination” in the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. A unique symbol combination is assigned to each bit in the 1-byte data.

In addition, the mark “◯” in the internal winning combination determination table indicates the internal winning combination to be won in the acquired data pointer. When the data pointer is “0”, the content of “internal winning combination” is “out”, but this is a combination of all symbols defined by the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 8 to 11. Indicates that the display of is not allowed.

FIG. 26 shows a small winning combination/replay internal winning combination determination table. The small winning combination/replay internal winning combination determination table defines the small winning combination and the internal winning combination relating to the replay (replay) for "1" to "58" of the small winning/replaying data pointer. That is, the small win/replay internal winning combination determination table defines the correspondence relationship between the small win/replay data pointer, the internal winning combination related to payout of medals, the internal winning combination related to the operation of replay, and the like.

For example, when "1" is acquired as the small win/replay data pointer, the code names "RP06" (G_upper rep), "RP07" (G_middle rip), "RP08" ( G_lower row lip) and “RP09” (G_CU lip) are won in duplicate.

In the present embodiment, the code names “HZR01” (G_bell spilled eye 1), “HZR02” (G_bell spilled eye 2), “HZR03” (G_bell spilled eye 3), “HZR04” (in FIG. 26). G_bell spilled eye 4) is not an internal winning combination. Designations related to code names "HZR01" (G_bell spilled eye 1), "HZR02" (G_bell spilled eye 2), "HZR03" (G_bell spilled eye 3), "HZR04" (G_bell spilled eye 4) ( Bell drop) may be displayed when the symbol combination corresponding to the internal winning combination relating to the bell described later cannot be stopped and displayed.

FIG. 27 shows a bonus internal winning combination determination table. The bonus internal winning combination determination table defines the internal winning combinations related to the operation of the bonus game for the bonus data pointers "1" to "6". That is, the bonus internal winning combination determination table defines the correspondence between the bonus data pointer and the internal winning combination related to the operation of the bonus game. As shown in FIG. 27, for example, when “5” is acquired as the bonus data pointer, the code name “BB05” (G_BB5) is won as the internal winning combination.

For example, when the winning number "59" is won, "1" is acquired as the small win/replay data pointer, and "5" is acquired as the bonus data pointer. As a result, the code names “RP06” (G_upper lip), “RP07” (G_middle lip), “RP08” (G_lower lip), “RP09” (G_CU lip), “BB05” (G_BB5) as internal winning combinations. ) Will win twice. In addition, when the winning number “59” is won during the BB carryover and the general BB, since the BB has already been determined as the internal winning combination, the code name “BB05” (G_BB5) of the winning number “59” is assigned. The internal winning combination becomes invalid.

[Circuitary stop number selection table]
Next, the rotating cylinder stop number selection table will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29. FIG. 28 shows a spinning cylinder stop number selection table (No. 1). The turning cylinder stop number selection table (No. 1) defines the correspondence between the small win/replay data pointer and the turning cylinder stop number. It should be noted that the spinning cylinder stop number is data used when acquiring various data required in a reel stop initialization process (see FIG. 30, which will be described later) described later.

FIG. 29 shows a spinning cylinder stop number selection table (No. 2). The turning cylinder stop number selection table (No. 2) defines the correspondence relationship between the bonus data pointer and the small win/replay data pointer and the turning cylinder stop number. It should be noted that in the present embodiment, from the time when the bonus data pointer is acquired until the corresponding combination of the symbols of BB is displayed, the number for spinning cylinder stop number is referred to by referring to the number for spinning cylinder stop selection table (No. 2). Is selected.

The turning cylinder stop number selection table of the present embodiment defines different turning cylinder stop numbers for each data pointer. Specifically, the small winning/replaying data pointers "0" to "58" are associated with the turning cylinder stop numbers "0" to "58", respectively, and the bonus data pointers "1" to "6". , Respectively, are associated with turning cylinder stop numbers “59” to “64”. Therefore, for example, when the small win/replay data pointer is "3", the revolving cylinder stop number "3" is selected.

In the present embodiment, the rotating cylinder stop number selection table defines different rotating cylinder stop numbers for each data pointer, but the present invention is not limited to this. In the turn cylinder stop number selection table according to the present invention, the same turn cylinder stop number may be defined for different data pointers to reduce data.

[Reel stop initial setting table]
Next, the reel stop initialization table will be described with reference to FIG. The reel stop initialization table defines the correspondence relationship between the spinning cylinder stop number and various data used for the pull-in priority table selection process, which will be described later, and the sliding frame number determination process, which will be described later. Specifically, the reel stop initial setting table includes the number for spinning cylinder stop, the pull-in priority table selection table number, the pull-in priority table number, the table selection data when pressing forward, the table change data when pressing forward, and the table changing data when pressing forward. The correspondence with the table change initial data and the table selection data at the time of irregular pressing is defined.

The pull-in priority table selection table number and the pull-in priority table number are data used in the pull-in priority table selection process. For example, if the pull-in priority table number corresponding to the spinning cylinder stop number is defined in the reel stop initialization table, the pull-in priority table defined in the pull-in priority table (see FIG. 36 described later) described later. It is possible to obtain data regarding the priority order of the display combination corresponding to the number.

If the pull-in priority table number corresponding to the spinning cylinder stop number is not specified in the reel stop initialization table, the pull-in priority table selection table (see FIG. 35 described later) is referred to and the pull-in priority table number is referred to. The pull-in priority table number corresponding to the priority table selection table number is determined.

The push-time table selection data, the push-time table change data, and the push-time table change initial data specify a stop table (see FIGS. 31 to 33 described later) to be referred to when the push is performed. Is data for. The "forward push" referred to in the present specification is a stop operation when the first stop operation (first stop operation) is performed on the left reel 3L. Corresponds to the pressing order of "left center right" and "left center right".

The irregular press time table selection data is data for designating a stop table (see FIG. 34 described later) to be referred to when the irregular press is performed. The "irregular pressing" referred to in the present specification is a stop operation when the first stop operation is performed on the middle reel 3C or the right reel 3R, and includes "middle left and right", "middle right left", and "middle right left". Corresponds to the pressing order of "Right Middle Left" and "Right Left Middle".

In the present embodiment, for example, in the normal game state (non-bonus game state), after the stop operation is detected by the stop switch 17S, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped at a predetermined position within 190 msec. In this reel stop operation, in the reel on which the stop operation has been performed, the number of sliding pieces "0" to "4" is added to the value of the symbol counter of the reel when the stop operation is detected. Then, the symbol position corresponding to the value obtained by the addition is determined as the symbol position at which the rotation of the reel is stopped (this is referred to as the "scheduled stop position"). The symbol position corresponding to the value of the symbol counter of the reel when the stop operation is detected is the symbol position where the rotation of the reel starts to be stopped, and this is referred to as the “stop start position”.

That is, the number of sliding pieces is the rotation amount of the predetermined reel after the stop switch 17S detects the stop operation for the predetermined reel until the rotation of the predetermined reel is stopped. In other words, it is the number of symbols passing through the middle area of the predetermined reel of the display window in the period from when the stop switch 17S detects the stop operation for the predetermined reel to when the rotation of the predetermined reel is stopped. .. This is grasped by the value of the symbol counter updated after the stop operation by the stop switch 17S is detected.

Referring to a stop table described later, the number of sliding pieces is acquired according to the stop start position of each reel. In the present embodiment, the number of sliding pieces is acquired based on the stop table, but this is tentative and the scheduled stop position of the reel is not immediately determined by the acquired number of sliding pieces.

Further, in the present embodiment, when there is a more appropriate number of sliding pieces than the number of sliding pieces (hereinafter referred to as “sliding piece number determination data”) acquired based on a stop table (see FIG. 31 described later) described later, The number of sliding pieces is changed with reference to a pull-in priority table (see FIG. 36 described later) which will be described later. Then, the number-of-slip-pieces determination data is for determining the search order when comparing the priorities of the respective symbols from the stop start position to the symbol position four or one that is the maximum number of sliding symbols. Used.

In the present embodiment, different stop tables are used according to the order of pressing the stop buttons for forward pressing and irregular pressing. Specifically, if it is a forward push, a first push stop table for forward push described later (see FIG. 31 described later) and a second stop stop table for second push/third stop described later (see FIG. 33 described later). See) and. On the other hand, in the case of an irregular push, the irregular push stop table (see FIG. 34 to be described later) described later is referred to.

[Stop table for first stop when pressing forward]
Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the first stop table for forward pressing will be described. The forward-pressing first stop table shown in FIG. 31 is a stop table referred to when the forward-pressing table selection data is “01”. The forward stop first stop table defines the correspondence between the stop start positions “0” to “19” of the left reel 3L, the sliding piece number determination data, and the change status.

For example, when the stop start position of the left reel 3L is "15", the sliding piece number determination data becomes "0" and the change status becomes "1". The change status is used when referring to a forward-pressing control change table (see FIG. 32 described later) described later.

[Control change table when pressing forward]
Next, the forward change control change table will be described with reference to FIG. The forward press control change table shown in FIG. 32 is a change table referred to when the forward press table change data is “00”. The forward-press control change table defines a correspondence relationship between the change target position (scheduled stop position of the left reel 3L), the change status, the change status, and the second-third stop stop-time table numbers when the forward press is performed.

For example, if the change status acquired based on the first stop table for forward pressing (see FIG. 31) is "1" and the planned stop position of the left reel 3L is "15", the change status is " It becomes "0", and the stop table number for the second and third stops at the time of forward pressing becomes "12". If the change status and the stop table number for second/third stop during forward pressing are not registered in the target position in the forward change control change table, the stop table number is not changed.

[Stop table for 2nd and 3rd stop when pressing forward and stop table for anomalous pressing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 33 and FIG. 34, the forward pressing second/third stopping stop table and the irregular pressing stop table will be described. The forward stop second/third stop table and the irregular stop table define 1-byte stop data according to each of the symbol positions “0” to “20”.

The stop table for second/third stop during forward pressing shown in FIG. 33 is referred to when the stop table number for second/third stop during forward pressing is “08”. Further, the irregular pressing stop table shown in FIG. 34 is referred to when the irregular pressing table selection data is “07”.

The stop data specified by each stop table of the second/third stop table at the time of forward push and the stop table at anomalous is appropriate for the position of the symbol associated with itself as the position at which the rotation of the reel is stopped. It has information on whether or not. Then, this stop data includes information as to whether or not the corresponding symbol position is appropriate as a position for stopping the rotation of the reel, a bit corresponding to the column of "A line" and a column of "B line" in each stop table. To the bit corresponding to. The stop data is defined by allocating information of which of these two types of information should be adopted to the bit corresponding to the column of "line change" in each stop table.

That is, the forward pressing second/third stop table and the irregular stop table define a plurality of methods for determining the position at which the reel rotation is stopped. Therefore, even if the stop start position is the same symbol position, it is possible to change the position to stop the rotation of the reel based on the stop position at the first stop. By adopting such a configuration, information can be compressed.

The determination of the number-of-slip-pieces determination data is performed as follows. First, which of the eight bit strings (the data in the leftmost column in the figure corresponding to bit 1) forming the stop data is designated according to the type of the stop button in which the stop operation is detected is designated. For example, when the middle stop button 17C is pressed, the column of "medium reel A line data" of bit 4 is designated.

Then, referring to the designated bit string, for each symbol position from the stop start position to the range of the maximum number of sliding symbols, a search is sequentially performed to determine whether or not "1" is defined as the corresponding data. As a result of this search, the difference from the stop start position to the symbol position for which "1" is defined as the corresponding data is calculated, and this difference is used as the sliding piece number determination data.

It should be noted that whether or not to change the reference bit string from the "A line" column to the "B line" column is referred to the "line change" column, and "1" is defined in the data corresponding to the stop start position. It is determined by whether or not it has been done. Then, when it is decided to change the line, the column of "B line" is designated thereafter, and the above search is performed.

[Import priority table selection table]
Next, the attraction-in priority table selection table will be described with reference to FIG. The pull-in priority table selection table defines the correspondence between the combination of the pull-in priority table selection table number and the pressing order of the stop button, and the pull-in priority table number in each combination. The attraction-in priority table number is data for obtaining information regarding the priority of the display combination defined in the attraction-in priority table described later (see FIG. 36 described later).

When the left reel 3L is stopped for the first time, the data in the column of "first left rotation cylinder stop" in the pull-in priority table selection table is referred to. For example, when the left reel 3L is stopped for the first time and the pull-in priority table selection table number is "01", the pull-in priority table number "00" is first acquired. Then, in this case, as shown in FIG. 35, when the middle reel 3C is stopped for the second time, the pull-in priority table number “01” is acquired. On the other hand, when the right reel 3R is stopped for the second time, the pull-in priority table number "00" is maintained.

In the pull-in priority table selection table, if the pull-in priority table number is not registered in the target position column in the table, the number shown in the right column of the right reel first stop column is It is acquired as the pull-in priority table number. For example, when the middle reel 3C is stopped for the first time and the pull-in priority table selection table number is "00", the pull-in priority table number is not registered in the column of the target position corresponding to the pressing order. Therefore, in this case, the right column of the right reel first stop column corresponding to the pull-in priority table selection table number "00" is referred to, and "01" is acquired as the pull-in priority table number.

[Importance priority table]
Next, the attraction-in priority table will be described with reference to FIG. The attraction-in priority table defines a correspondence relationship between attraction-in data for each storage area type and a predetermined priority in each of attraction-in priority table numbers “00” to “09”.

The pull-in priority table is used for searching whether or not there is a more appropriate number of sliding pieces in addition to the number of sliding pieces obtained based on the stop table. The priority order is data that defines the order in which the symbols are preferentially stopped and displayed (pulled in) between the types of symbol combinations related to winning. Further, each pull-in data is represented by 1-byte data, like the “display combination” in the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 8 to 11, and a symbol unique to each bit in the 1-byte data. Are assigned.

In the present embodiment, first, the number of sliding pieces is acquired based on the above-mentioned first stop table for first stop during forward pressing (see FIG. 31). However, if there is a more appropriate number of sliding pieces other than this number of sliding pieces, the number is changed to the appropriate number of sliding pieces. In other words, in the present embodiment, the more appropriate number of sliding pieces is determined based on the priority of the combination of symbols that the stop display is permitted by the internal winning combination, regardless of the number of sliding pieces acquired from the stop table.

In the present embodiment, in the attraction-in priority table, the stop display (drawing) of the symbol combination corresponding to the internal winning combination having the higher priority is the combination of the symbols corresponding to the internal winning combination having the lower priority. It is given priority over the stop display.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 36, not only the priority of the internal winning combination is different according to the drawing priority table number, but also the number of divisions of the priority is different. For example, when the attraction-in priority table number is "00", the number of divisions of the priority order is 3, and when the attraction-in priority table number is "36", the number of divisions of the priority order is 2. ..

Here, in order to simplify the description, the priority order when the attraction-in priority table number is “00” will be described, and the description of the priority order in the other attraction-in priority table numbers will be omitted. When the attraction-in priority table number is "00", the attraction-in data corresponding to the code name "RP06" is defined in the priority "1".

When the attraction-in priority table number is "00", the attraction-in data corresponding to the code names "RP01" to "RP05" and "RP07" to "RP32" is defined in the priority "2". When the attraction-in priority table number is "00", the attraction-in data corresponding to the code names "FR01" to "FR31" and "HZR01" to "HZR05" is defined.

[Search order table]
Next, the search order table will be described with reference to FIG. The search order table is a priority order (hereinafter, referred to as “search order”) from a range of predetermined numerical values as the number of sliding pieces (“0” to “4” when the maximum number of sliding pieces is four). Is defined). The search order table shown in FIG. 37 is a table to be referred to when the stop control is performed with the maximum number of sliding pieces being four.

The search order table defines the number of sliding pieces determination data obtained based on the stop table described above and the search order. That is, in the present embodiment, the order of numerical values to be preferentially applied is determined based on the sliding piece number determination data. Further, the search order table is provided on the assumption that there are a plurality of sliding pieces having the same priority order, and the search order table having a higher search order is applied. Further, in this embodiment, the stop control is performed for all reels with the maximum number of sliding pieces being 4.

In the present embodiment, as will be described later in the priority attraction-in control process of FIG. 181, each numerical value is sequentially searched from the lowest search order “5” (or “2”) in the search order table, The number corresponding to the search order “1” is preferentially applied as the number of sliding pieces.

[Symbol corresponding winning operation flag data table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 38, a symbol corresponding winning operation flag data table will be described. The symbol corresponding winning operation flag data table defines the correspondence between the reel type and the data of the internal winning combination that can be displayed according to the symbol of each reel displayed on the activated line. That is, by referring to the symbol corresponding winning operation flag data table, it is possible to determine the internal winning combination that can be displayed at that time. The symbol corresponding winning operation flag data table is provided corresponding to the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 8 to 11).

For example, when the symbol "white 7" is stopped and displayed on the activated line of the left reel 3L, it is displayed in the storage areas 1 to 32 corresponding to the symbol code "00000001" (white 7) in the reel type "left". “1” is stored in the bit corresponding to the possible internal winning combination. The data defined by the symbol corresponding winning operation flag data table is logically stored in the data stored in the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 47 described later) described later and stored.

[Game lock lottery table]
In the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, when a specific internal winning combination is won, lottery for game lock is performed. When the lottery is won, a predetermined reel effect (game lock) is performed during the reel acceleration process. It should be noted that while the game lock is generated, even if the insertion operation or the stop operation is performed, the detection thereof is treated as invalid or delayed. The game lock lottery table described here is mainly used when determining various patterns of game locks performed during the reel acceleration process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 39, a game lock lottery table will be described. The game lock lottery table defines the lottery value of the type (lock number) of the game lock to be won according to the lottery number (data pointer) determined by the internal lottery.

The game lock lottery table shown in FIG. 39 has a winning number "59" (abbreviation "F_BB5+F_RT no transition rep"), "60" (abbreviation "F_BB5+F_SP rep") and "61"-(abbreviation "F_BB4+F_chance rep 1")- In each of "88" (abbreviation "F_BB2+F_strong cherry"), the lottery values of various game locks (lock numbers 0 to 7) are defined.

In the game lock lottery process using the game lock lottery table of the present embodiment, first, a random number for effect extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (for example, 0 to 255) is associated with each lock number. Subtract sequentially with the specified lottery value. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction becomes negative (whether or not a so-called "carry" has occurred). Then, when the result of the subtraction becomes negative in the predetermined lock number (a "carry" occurs), it means that the lock number has been won.

For example, when the winning number is “59” (abbreviation “F_BB5+F_RT no transition rep”), the lock number 3 (no lock+next lock 3) or the lock number 4 (no lock+next freeze) is selected. To be done. If the winning number is “60” (abbreviation “F_BB5+F_SP Lip”), lock number 5 (no lock+first freeze), lock number 6 (lock 1+first freeze) and lock number 7 (lock 2+) One of the game locks of the first freeze) is selected.

If the winning number is "61"-(abbreviation "F_BB4+F_chance rep 1")-"88" (abbreviation "F_BB2+F_strong cherry"), lock number 0 (no effect)-lock number 2 (lock 2) Either game lock is selected.

The lock number 0 (no effect) corresponds to a pattern in which the reels are not locked (normal reel acceleration processing). Further, lock number 1 (lock 1) and lock number 2 (lock 2) correspond to a lock effect pattern called "short lock". Further, lock number 3 (no lock+next lock 3) to lock number 7 (lock 2+first freeze) correspond to predetermined lock effect patterns, respectively.

[RT4 lottery table for playing combo during game state]
In the present embodiment, in the RT4 game state (PTR described later), the game lock may be executed when a PREMIUM game described below is being played. While the game is locked in this PREMIUM game, the reel effect is triggered by the operation of the start lever 16 to notify the success or failure of the combo.

The "combo" in the present embodiment is "addition of the number of games in ART (PTR)". If the combo is successful, red 7 is arranged along the center line to perform a reel effect, and the number of addition games is increased. This is notified by the liquid crystal display device 11. On the other hand, if the combo is unsuccessful, the reel effect in which the red 7 is not aligned along the center line is performed.

The combo occurrence lottery table during the RT4 gaming state will be described with reference to FIG.
The RT4 gaming state combo occurrence lottery table is used to determine the success (or failure) of the first (first) combo and the lock effect pattern for notifying the success or failure of the combo in each game of PREMIUM described later. This RT4 gaming state combo occurrence lottery table is specifically referred to in the combo occurrence lottery processing in the game lock lottery processing (see FIG. 169 described later) described later.

The RT4 gaming state combo occurrence lottery table defines the lottery value of the type (lock number) of the gaming lock to be won according to the winning number (data pointer) determined by the internal lottery in the RT4 gaming state.

In the combo occurrence lottery process using the combo occurrence lottery table during the RT4 gaming state of the present embodiment, first, a random number value for effect extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (for example, 0 to 255) is set for each lock number. The lottery value defined in accordance with is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction becomes negative (whether or not a so-called "carry" has occurred). Then, when the result of the subtraction becomes negative in the predetermined lock number (a "carry" occurs), it means that the lock number has been won.

The lock number 0 (out of sync) corresponds to a pattern (normal reel acceleration process) in which the reel effect (reel lock) related to the combo is not performed. The lock number 11 (deviated by one step from the tilt) corresponds to the first combo failure lock effect pattern for notifying that the combo has failed. In the first combo failure lock effect pattern, for example, the reels rotate forward and red 7 is likely to line up along the center line, that is, a so-called “raising” is performed once, and then red 7 follows the center line. It is a reel production that does not line up.

Further, the lock number 12 (deviated from the second stage of the tilt) corresponds to the second combo failure lock effect pattern for notifying that the combo has failed. The second combo failure lock effect pattern is, for example, that the reels rotate in the reverse direction, and the red 7 is likely to line up along the center line. So-called “fanning” is performed twice, and then red 7 follows the center line. It is a reel production that does not line up.

The lock number 13 (successful forward combo) corresponds to the first combo success lock effect pattern for notifying that the combo has succeeded. The first combo success lock effect pattern is, for example, a reel effect in which the reels rotate forward and red 7 is lined up along the center line. Also, the lock number 14 (reverse stop combo success) corresponds to the second combo success lock effect pattern for notifying that the combo has succeeded. The second combo success lock effect pattern is, for example, a reel effect in which the reels rotate in the reverse direction and red 7 is lined up along the center line.

[Combo continuation rate lottery table]
In the RT4 game state (PTR, which will be described later), when the PREMIUM game, which will be described later, is being played, if the first (first) combo succeeds, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to continue the combo, and the combo fails. Until then, the addition of the number of games in ART continues.

The combo continuation rate lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. 41. The combo continuation rate lottery table is used when determining the combo continuation rate in the PREMIUM game described later. This combo continuation rate lottery table is specifically referred to in the combo continuation rate lottery process in the game lock lottery process (see FIG. 169, which will be described later), which will be described later.

The combo continuation rate lottery table defines the lottery value of the type of the PRE loop rate to be won according to the lottery number (data pointer) determined by the internal lottery in the RT4 gaming state. In the combo continuation rate random determination process using the combo continuation rate random determination table of the present embodiment, first, a random number for performance extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (for example, 0 to 255) is associated with each lock number. Then, the lottery values specified are sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction becomes negative (whether or not a so-called "carry" has occurred). Then, when the result of the subtraction becomes negative at the predetermined PRE loop rate (“digit” occurs), it means that the PRE loop rate is won.

[Combo continuous lottery table]
The combo continuous lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The combo continuous lottery table is used when determining whether or not to perform the combo success rate in the game of PREMIUM which will be described later. This combo continuous lottery table is specifically referred to in the combo continuous lottery process in the game start lock process (see FIG. 171 described later) described later.

The combo continuous lottery table defines the lottery value of the type (lock number) of the game lock to be won according to the type of the PRE loop rate determined by the combo continuous lottery process.

In the combo continuous lottery processing using the combo continuous lottery table of the present embodiment, first, a random number for effect extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (for example, 0 to 255) is associated with each lock number. Subtract sequentially with the specified lottery value. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction becomes negative (whether or not a so-called "carry" has occurred). Then, when the result of the subtraction becomes negative in the predetermined lock number (a "carry" occurs), it means that the lock number has been won.

The lock number 15 (revival) corresponds to the third combo success lock effect pattern that notifies that the combo has succeeded. The third combo success lock effect pattern is, for example, a reel effect in which the reels rotate forward and red 7 does not line up along the center line, and then the reels rotate backward and red 7 lines up along the center line.

<Structure of storage area provided in main RAM>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 43 to 49, the configuration of various storage areas provided in the main RAM 53 will be described. Although not described here (not shown), the main RAM 53 is also provided with storage areas for various control data, various flags, various counters and the like used in the above-described various reel effects (various game locks) and the like.

[Display combination storage area, internal winning combination storage area, carryover combination storage area]
First, the configuration of the display combination storing area will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the display combination storing area is composed of the display combination storing areas 1 to 62 each represented by 1-byte data.

In each of the display combination storing areas 1 to 32, when "1" is set in a predetermined bit (when stored), a combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined bit is displayed on the activated line. Indicates. On the other hand, when all the bits are “0”, it indicates that the combination of symbols related to winning and the combination of symbols that triggers the transition to the RT gaming state are not displayed on the activated line.

Further, the main RAM 53 is provided with an internal winning combination storing area (not shown). The internal winning combination storing area is configured similarly to the display winning combination storing area shown in FIG. In the internal winning combination storing areas 1 to 32, when "1" is set in a plurality of bits, the display of the symbol combination corresponding to each bit is permitted. When all the bits are “0”, the content of the internal winning combination is “out”.

Further, the main RAM 53 is provided with a carryover combination storing area (not shown). Further, the internal carryover combination storage area is configured similarly to the storage area 1 of the display combination storage area shown in FIG. As a result of the internal lottery, any one of “C_BB5”, “C_BB4”, “C_BB3”, “C_BB2-1”, “C_BB2-2”, “C_BB1-1”, “C_BB1-2”, and “C_RB” as an internal winning combination. When it is decided, the internal winning combination is stored in the carryover combination storing area as a carryover combination. The carryover combination stored in the carryover combination storing area is cleared until the corresponding symbol combination (for example, "white 7"-"white 7"-"white 7" of "C_BB5") is displayed on the activated line. Retained without. While the carryover combination is stored in the carryover combination storing area, the carryover combination is stored in the internal winning combination storing area in addition to the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery.

[Game status flag storage area]
Next, with reference to FIG. 44, the configuration of the game state flag storage area will be described. The game state flag storage area is composed of game state flag storage areas 1 and 2 each represented by 1-byte data. In this embodiment, in the game state flag, a unique bonus type or RT type is assigned to each bit of the game state flag storage areas 1 and 2.

In each of the gaming state flag storage areas 1 and 2, when "1" is stored (standing) in a predetermined bit, a bonus game or RT operation corresponding to the predetermined bit is being performed. Indicates. For example, when "1" is stored in bit 0 of the gaming state flag storage area 1, it indicates that the BB is operating and the gaming state is the BB gaming state.

[Operation stop button storage area]
Next, with reference to FIG. 45, the configuration of the operation stop button storage area will be described. The operation stop button storage area stores an operation stop button flag consisting of 1 byte. In the operation stop button flag, the operation state of the stop button is assigned to each bit.

For example, when the left stop button 17L is the stop button pressed this time, that is, the operation stop button, "1" is stored in bit 0 of the operation stop button storage area. Further, for example, when the left stop button 17L is a stop button that has not been pressed yet, that is, a valid stop button, "1" is stored in bit 4. The main control unit 40 identifies the stop button that has been pressed this time and the stop button that has not been pressed, based on the data stored in the operation stop button storage area.

[Pressing order storage area]
Next, with reference to FIG. 46, the configuration of the pressing order storage area will be described. The pressing order storage area stores a pressing order flag composed of 1 byte. In the press order flag, the type of the stop button press order is assigned to each bit. For example, if the pressing order of the stop buttons is "left middle right", "1" is stored in bit 0 of the pressing order storage area.

[Design code storage area]
Next, the configuration of the symbol code storage area will be described with reference to FIG. In the symbol code storage area, for each activated line, the symbol code of the symbol of the reel most recently stopped and operated (symbol code storage area 1) and a displayable symbol combination (symbol code storage areas 2 to 33) are stored. It After all reels are stopped, the symbol codes corresponding to the display combination are stored in the symbol code storage areas 2-33.

In the present embodiment, when the stop control position is determined, the winning operation flag data corresponding to the symbol (code) of the stop control position is read from the symbol corresponding winning action flag data table (see FIG. 38), and the winning action flag is read. The data is ANDed with the data already stored in the symbol code storage area. Then, the ANDed data is stored in the symbol code storage area shown in FIG. 47. When a plurality of effective lines are provided, the same number of symbol code storage areas as the number of effective lines are provided. Further, in this case, the effective line may be changed according to the number of bets or the game state.

[Entrance priority data storage area]
Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the configuration of the attraction-in priority data storage area will be described. The pull-in priority data storage area includes a left reel pull-in priority data storage area, a middle reel pull-in priority data storage area, and a right reel pull-in priority data storage area. That is, the pull-in priority data storage area is provided with a storage area for priority data for each reel type.

In each attraction priority data storage area, attraction priority data determined according to each symbol position “0” to “19” of the corresponding reel is stored. In the present embodiment, by referring to the attraction-in priority data storage area, it is searched whether or not there is a more appropriate number of sliding pieces in addition to the number of sliding pieces determined based on the above-mentioned stop table.

The contents of the priority attraction-in data stored in the attraction-in priority data storage area differ depending on the type of attraction-in priority table number in the attraction-in priority table (see FIG. 36) referred to when determining the attraction-in priority data. .. The larger the value of the attraction-in priority data, the higher the priority.

By referring to the attraction-in priority data, it is possible to make a relative evaluation of the priority among the symbols arranged on the peripheral surface of the reel. That is, the symbol for which the largest value is determined as the attraction-in priority data is the symbol with the highest priority. Therefore, it can be said that the attraction-in priority data indicates the order between the symbols arranged on the peripheral surface of the reel. In addition, when there are a plurality of symbols having the same value of the attraction-in priority data, one symbol is determined according to the search order defined by the above-described search order table (see FIG. 37).

[Game lock flag storage area]
Next, the configuration of the game lock flag storage area will be described with reference to FIG.
The game lock flag storage area is composed of the game lock flag storage areas 1 and 2 each represented by 1-byte data. In the present embodiment, in the game lock flag, a unique lock number is assigned to each bit of the game lock flag storage areas 1 and 2.

In the present embodiment, when the lock number is determined by referring to the game lock lottery table (see FIG. 39), the RT4 gaming state combo occurrence lottery table (see FIG. 40), and the combo continuous lottery table (see FIG. 42). , The lock number is stored in the game lock flag storage area. For example, when the determined lock number is "1", "1" is stored in bit 0 of the game lock flag storage area 1.

<Correspondence table between internal winning combination and stop order>
Next, with reference to FIG. 50 to FIG. 54, the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination and the reel stop order will be described.

50 and 51 are tables showing the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination (data pointer) and the stop order of the BB non-carried over (non-BB), and the internal winning combination (data pointer) and the stop order of the reel. The type of display combination corresponding to the combination is shown. 50 and 51, only the internal winning combination in which the role of the internal winning combination with respect to the game is different depending on the pressing order is shown for simplification of description.

For example, when the data pointer is “2”, the code names “RP03” (G_RT2 transition lip), “RP06” (G_upper lip), “RP07” (G_middle lip) and “RP10” (G_specific lip). The internal winning combination according to 1) is won in duplicate (see FIG. 26). In this case, when the reels are stopped in the order of “left middle right” (stop order “123” in FIG. 50), the symbol combination of the internal winning combination associated with the code name “RP06” (G_upper rip) is on the activated line. It will be stopped. On the other hand, the reels are “left and right center” (stop order “132” in FIG. 50), “center left and right” (stop order “213” in FIG. 50), “center right left” (stop order “231” in FIG. 50). ), "right left middle" (stop order "312" in FIG. 50) or "right middle left" (stop order "321" in FIG. 50), the code name "RP03" (G_RT2 transition lip) The symbol combination of the internal winning combination according to is stopped and displayed on the activated line.

For example, when the data pointer is "44", code names "FR05" (G_9 sheets bell 5), "FR09" (G_corner cherry 1), "FR14" (G_L1st miss 1), "FR15" (G_L1st). Miss 2), "FR16" (G_L1st miss 3), "FR17" (G_L1st miss 4), "FR22" (G_C1st miss 1), "FR23" (G_C1st miss 2), "HZR01" (G_bell spill 1), The internal winning combinations related to “HZR02” (G_bell spill 2), “HZR03” (G_bell spill 3) and “HZR04” (G_bell spill 4) are won in duplicate (see FIG. 26).

In this case, when the reels are stopped in the order of "left and right middle" (stop order "132" in FIG. 51), the symbol combination of the internal winning combination associated with the code name "FR05" (G_9 bell 5) is on the activated line. The display is stopped and 9 medals are paid out. On the other hand, the reels are “left center right” (stop order “123” in FIG. 51), “center left and right” (stop order “213” in FIG. 51), “center right left” (stop order “231 in FIG. 51. ”), “Right Left Middle” (stop order “312” in FIG. 51) or “Right Middle Left” (stop order “321” in FIG. 51), the code name “FR14” (G_L1st miss 1) ), "FR15" (G_L1st miss 2), "FR16" (G_L1st miss 3), "FR17" (G_L1st miss 4), "HZR01" (G_bell spill 1), "HZR02" (G_bell spill 2), " The symbol combination of the internal winning combination relating to either "HZR03" (G_bell spill 3) or "HZR04" (G_bell spill 4) is stopped and displayed on the activated line.

FIG. 52 is a table showing a correspondence relationship between internal winning combinations (data pointers) of BB1 to BB4 carry-over (non-BB) and stop order, and combinations of internal winning combinations (data pointer) and reel stop order. Indicates the type of display combination corresponding to. In order to simplify the description, FIG. 52 shows only internal winning combinations in which the role of the internal winning combination with respect to the game is different depending on the pressing order.

As shown in FIG. 52, during carryover of BB1 to BB4 (during non-BB), when the data pointers are “4” to “7” and “40” to “53”, the BB not shown in FIGS. Even if the push order is the same as that during carryover, the reel stop display mode is different.

For example, when the data pointer is "4", the internal winning combinations related to the code names "RP03" (G_RT2 transition rip), "RP07" (G_middle rip) and "RP10" (G_specific rip 1) are duplicated. Win the prize. In this case, when the reels are stopped in the order of “middle right and left” (stop order “312” in FIG. 51) or “middle right and left” (stop order “321” in FIG. 50), the code name “RP07” (G_ The symbol combination of the internal winning combination related to the middle rip) is stopped and displayed on the activated line. On the other hand, the reels are "left center right" (stop order "123" in FIG. 50), "left right center" (stop order "132" in FIG. 50), "center left and right" (stop order "213 in FIG. 50". )) or “middle right left” (stop order “231” in FIG. 50), the symbol combination of the internal winning combination associated with the code name “RP03” (G_RT2 transition rip) is stopped and displayed on the activated line. It

When the data pointer is “40”, the code name “RP01” (G_RT1 transition rep 1), “RP02” (G_RT1 transition rep 2), “RP04” (G_RT3 transition rep), “RP06” (G_ Upper tier), "RP07" (G_middle tier), "RP08" (G_lower tier), "RP09" (G_CU rep), "RP13" (G_chance rep1), "RP17" (G_chance rep5), "RP18" (G_SP Lip 5), "RP19" (G_Special Lip 1), "RP22" (G_Special Lip 4), "RP28" (G_Carryover Lip 1), "RP29" (G_Carryover Lip 2) , “RP30” (G_carrying-in-earn rep 3), “RP31” (G_carrying-in-the-middle rip 4), and “RP32” (G_carrying-in-the-middle rip 5), the internal winning combinations are duplicated.

In this case, no matter which pressing order is used to stop the reels, the code names "RP28" (G_carrying-in-earn rep 1), "RP29" (G_carrying-in-runn rep 2), "RP30" (G_carrying-in-run rep3), The symbol combination of the internal winning combination relating to "RP31" (G_carrying-in-earnip 4) and "RP32" (G_carrying-in-earn 5) is stopped and displayed on the activated line. When the data pointer is “40” during BB non-carryover, “RP06” (G_upper lip), “RP07” (G_middle lip), “RP08” (G_lower lip), “RP09” ( The symbol combination relating to any one of (G_CU Lip) is stopped and displayed on the activated line.

When the data pointer is “42”, code names “FR03” (G_9 sheets bell 3), “FR05” (G_9 sheets bell 5), “FR14” (G_L1st miss 1), “FR15” (G_L1st). Miss 2), "FR16" (G_L1st miss 3), "FR17" (G_L1st miss 4), "FR22" (G_C1st miss 1), "FR23" (G_C1st miss 2), "HZR01" (G_bell spill 1), The internal winning combinations relating to “HZR02” (G_bell spill 2), “HZR03” (G_bell spill 4) and “HZR04” (G_bell spill 4) are won in duplicate.

In this case, even if the reels are stopped in any pressing order, the symbol combination of the internal winning combination related to the code name "FR03" (G_9 bell 3) is stopped and displayed on the activated line. When the data pointer is "42" while the BB is not carried over, and the reels are stopped in the order of "left middle right" (stop order "123" in FIG. 51), the code name "FR05" (G_9 The symbol combination of the internal winning combination relating to the sheet bell 5) is stopped and displayed on the activated line. On the other hand, the reels are “left and right center” (stop order “132” in FIG. 51), “center left and right” (stop order “213” in FIG. 51), “center right left” (stop order “231” in FIG. 51). ), “Right left middle” (stop order “312” in FIG. 51) or “right middle left” (stop order “321” in FIG. 51) in that order, “FR14” (G_L1st miss 1), “ "FR15" (G_L1st miss 2), "FR16" (G_L1st miss 3), "FR17" (G_L1st miss 4), "HZR01" (G_bell spill 1), "HZR02" (G_bell spill 2), "HZR03" ( The symbol combination relating to either G_bell spill 4) or "HZR04" (G_bell spill 4) is stopped and displayed on the activated line.

FIG. 53 is a table showing a correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination (data pointer) and the stop order of the internal winning combination (data pointer) during the carryover of BB5 (non-BB), and corresponding to the combination of the stopping order of the reels. Indicates the type of display combination to be performed. In order to simplify the description, FIG. 53 shows only internal winning combinations in which the role of the internal winning combination with respect to the game is different depending on the pressing order.

As shown in FIG. 53, during BB5 carryover (during non-BB), when the data pointers are “4” to “7” and “39” to “53”, BB noncarryover shown in FIGS. 50 and 51. Even if the pressing order is the same, the stop display mode of the reels is different.

In addition, when the data pointers during BB5 carryover (non-BB) are "4" to "7" and "40" to "53", the data pointers during BB1 to BB4 carryover (non-BB) are "4". ~"7", "40" to "53" have the same stop mode in the pressing order.

For example, when the data pointer is “39”, the code name is “RP06” (G_upper lip), “RP07” (G_middle lip), “RP08” (G_lower lip), “RP09” (G_CU lip). , "RP18" (G_SP lip), "RP19" (G_special lip 1), "RP22" (G_special lip 4), and "RP25" (G_special lip 7), the internal winning combinations related to the overlapping wins (FIG. 26). reference). In this case, even if the reels are stopped in any pressing order, the symbol combination of the internal winning combination related to the code name “RP07” (G_middle rip) is stopped and displayed on the activated line.

When the data pointer is "39" while the BB is not carried over, the reel is "left middle right" (stop order "123" in FIG. 51) or "left right center" (stop order "in FIG. 51". 132"), the symbol combination related to any one of the code names "FR06" (G_upper lip), "RP08" (G_lower lip), "RP09" (G_CU lip) is stopped and displayed on the activated line. To be done. On the other hand, the reels are “middle left and right” (stop order “213” in FIG. 51), “middle right left” (stop order “231” in FIG. 51), “right left middle” (stop order “312” in FIG. 51). ) Or “right middle left” (stop order “321” in FIG. 51) in that order, the symbol combination of the internal winning combination associated with the code name “RP07” (G_middle lip) is stopped and displayed on the activated line. It

When the small win/replay data pointer is "2" during carryover of BB1 to BB5 that was won during ART, the stop order is "right right middle" (stop order "312" in FIG. 51). Notify me. If the small win/replay data pointer is "3", "stop right and left" (stop order "132" in FIG. 50) is notified as the stop order. When the small win/replay data pointer is "4", "stop right/left" (stop order "312" in FIG. 51) is notified as the stop order.

Further, when the small win/replay data pointer is "5" during carryover of BB1 to BB5 won during the ART, the stop order is "right middle left" (stop order "321" in FIG. 50). To inform. If the small win/replay data pointer is “6”, “middle left and right” (stop order “213” in FIG. 50) is notified as the stop order. If the small win/replay data pointer is "7", "middle right left" (stop order "231" in FIG. 50) is notified as the stop order.

When the winning hands/replay data pointers are "2" to "7" during carryover of BB1 to BB5 that was won during the ART, and the stop operation is performed in the above stop order, the code name is "FR06". The symbol combination relating to (G_upper lip) or “RP07” (G_middle lip) is stopped and displayed on the activated line.

In BB1 to BB5 carryover during ART, the above stop order is notified (navi), and the symbol combination relating to the code name "RP03" (G_RT2 transition lip) in BB1 to BB5 noncarryover during ART is on the activated line. This is the same as the notification for avoiding the stop display. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from determining that the BB1 to BB5 are being carried over during the ART by not giving an uncomfortable feeling due to the suspension of the above notification.

FIG. 54 is a table showing a correspondence relationship between an internal winning combination (data pointer) and a stop order during carryover of RB in BB, and a display combination corresponding to a combination of an internal winning combination (data pointer) and a stop order of reels. Indicates the type of. In addition, in order to simplify the description, FIG. 54 shows only internal winning combinations in which the role of the internal winning combination with respect to the game is different depending on the pressing order.

As shown in FIG. 54, in the RB carry-over in the BB, when the data pointer is “2” to “13”, even if the push order is the same as that in the BB non-carry-over carry shown in FIG. 50 and FIG. The stop display mode is different.

As described above, when the data pointer is "2", the code names "RP03" (G_RT2 transition rep), "RP06" (G_upper rep), "RP07" (G_middle rep) and "RP10" ( The internal winning combination related to G_specific lip 1) is won in duplicate (see FIG. 26).

For example, when the data pointer is "2" during RB carryover in BB, the reels are "left center right" (stop order "123" in FIG. 54) or "left right center" (stop order in FIG. 54). When stopped in the order of "132"), the symbol combination of the internal winning combination associated with the code name "RP10" (G_specification 1) is stopped and displayed on the activated line. Moreover, when the reels are stopped in the order of "middle left and right" (stop order "213" in FIG. 54), the symbol combination of the internal winning combination related to the code name "RP03" (G_RT2 transition rip) is stopped and displayed on the activated line. To be done.

Further, when the data pointer is "8" in the BB mid-RB carryover, the reel is "middle right left" (stop order "231" in FIG. 54), "right left middle" (stop order "in FIG. 54". 312”) or “right middle left” (stop order “321” in FIG. 54) in that order, the symbol combination of the internal winning combination related to the code name “RP07” (G_middle rip) stops on the activated line. Is displayed.

When the data pointer is “8”, the code names “RP03” (G_RT2 transition rep), “RP04” (G_RT3 transition rep), “RP06” (G_upper rep), “RP07” (G_middle rep). ), “RP08” (G_lower lip), “RP10” (G_specification lip 1), “RP11” (G_specification lip 2) and “RP12” (G_specification lip 3), the internal winning combinations related to the double winning ((). See FIG. 26).

For example, when the data pointer is "8" in the RB in BB carryover, the reels are "left center right" (stop order "123" in FIG. 54) or "left right center" (stop order in FIG. 54). If you stop in the order of "132"), the symbol combination relating to any of "RP10" (G_specific lip 1), "RP11" (G_specific lip 2), "RP12" (G_specific lip 3) is on the activated line. Will be stopped. Moreover, when the reels are stopped in the order of "middle left and right" (stop order "213" in FIG. 54), the symbol combination of the internal winning combination related to the code name "RP03" (G_RT2 transition rip) is stopped and displayed on the activated line. To be done.

Further, when the data pointer is "8" in the BB mid-RB carryover, the reel is "middle right left" (stop order "231" in FIG. 54), "right left middle" (stop order "in FIG. 54". 312”) or “right middle left” (stop order “321” in FIG. 54) in that order, the symbol combination of the internal winning combination related to the code name “RP07” (G_middle rip) stops on the activated line. Is displayed.

When the data pointer is "8" while the BB is not carried over and the reels are stopped in the order of "left middle right" (stop order "123" in FIG. 50), the code name "RP04" (G_RT3). The symbol combination related to (transition lip) is stopped and displayed on the activated line. Further, when the reels are stopped in the order of “left and right middle” (stop order “132” in FIG. 51), the symbol combination of the internal winning combination related to the code name “RP06” (G_upper lip) is stopped and displayed on the activated line. To be done.

Further, when the data pointer is "8" while the BB is not carried over, the reels are "center left and right" (stop order "213" in FIG. 51), "center right left" (stop order "231 in FIG. 51. ”), “middle right/left” (stop order “312” in FIG. 51) or “middle right/left” (stop order “321” in FIG. 51), the code name “RP03” (G_RT2 transition report) The symbol combination related to) is stopped and displayed on the activated line.

In the present embodiment, in the BB, when the F_RT4 specific lip (“RP10” (G_specific lip 1), “RP11” (G_specific lip 2), “RP12” (G_specific lip 3)) is won, the lottery is obtained. Whether to stop and display the symbol combination related to the F_RT4 specific lip (whether to perform navigation) is determined according to the point (FS point or EX point described later).

F_RT4 In the navigation for stopping and displaying the symbol combination related to the specific lip, points having a certain value or more must be determined. Therefore, when the symbol combination related to the F_RT4 specific lip is stopped and displayed, points of a certain value or more are added. In this way, the stop display of the symbol combination related to the F_RT4 specific lip is one of the effects that suggests that points of a certain value or more are added.

<Correspondence table of internal winning combination, stop order and RT transition>
Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination, the reel stop sequence, and the RT transition will be described. FIG. 55 is a correspondence table of the internal winning combination (data pointer), the stop order of the reels, and the RT transition, and the transition destination of the RT gaming state corresponding to the combination of the internal winning combination (data pointer) and the stop order of the reels. Indicates.

The "maintenance replay" shown in FIG. 55 is a replay that is not a transition role of the RT game state, and is code name "RP06" (G_upper rep), "RP07" (G_middle rep), "RP08" ( G_lower stage lip) and “RP09” (G_CU lip). Further, the "RT1 transition replay" is a replay set as a transition role for transitioning the RT game state to the RT1 game state, and code names "RP01" (G_RT1 transition rep 1) and "RP02" (of this embodiment). This is equivalent to G_RT1 transition lip 2).

The “RT2 transition replay” is a replay set as a transition role for transitioning the RT game state to the RT2 game state, and corresponds to the code name “RP03” (G_RT2 transition lip) of the present embodiment. Further, the "RT3 transition replay" is a replay set as a transition role for transitioning the RT game state to the RT3 game state, and corresponds to the code name "RP04" (G_RT3 transition rep) of the present embodiment.

The “RT4 transition replay” is a replay set as a transition role for transitioning the RT game state to the RT4 game state, and corresponds to the code name “RP05” (G_RT4 transition lip) of the present embodiment. Further, the "specific replay" is a re-playing role related to a stop mode in which two or more "replay 3" symbols are stopped and displayed along a straight line connecting each display area, and in the present embodiment, The code names correspond to “RP10” (G_specification lip 1), “RP11” (G_specification lip 2), and “RP12” (G_specification lip 3).

"White 7 incline" is a replay game related to a stop mode in which two "white 7" symbols are arranged along a straight line connecting each display area when the timing of the stop operation is the first timing. It is a role. This "white 7 incline" corresponds to the code names "RP25" (G_special lip 7), "RP26" (G_special lip 8), and "RP27" (G_special lip 9) in this embodiment. In the stop control related to "white 7 incline", it is expected that the three "white 7" symbols are lined up along the straight line connecting the display areas, but the three "white 7" symbols are not lined up. It becomes a stop mode.

"White 7 set" means a replay game related to a stop mode in which three "white 7" symbols are arranged along a straight line connecting each display area when the timing of the stop operation is the first timing. It is a role. This “white 7 set” corresponds to the code names “RP22” (G_special lip 4), “RP23” (G_special lip 5), and “RP24” (G_special lip 6) in this embodiment.

"Red 7 incline" is a replay related to a stop mode in which two "Red 7" symbols are arranged along a straight line connecting each display area when the timing of the stop operation is the second timing. It is a role. This "red 7 incline" corresponds to the code names "RP17" (G_chance lip 5) and "RP21" (G_special lip 3) in this embodiment. In the stop control related to "red 7 incline", it is expected that three "red 7" symbols are lined up along a straight line connecting each display area, but the three "red 7" symbols are not lined up. It becomes a stop mode.

"Red 7 complete" means that when the timing of the stop operation is the second timing, the replay game related to the stop mode in which the three "Red 7" symbols are arranged along the straight line connecting the respective display areas It is a role. This "red 7 set" corresponds to the code names "RP19" (G_special lip 1) and "RP20" (G_special lip 2) of this embodiment.

For example, when the data pointer is "2" (abbreviation "F_RT01 maintenance rep 1") during non-BB carryover, the reels are "left center right" (stop order in FIG. 55) as described in FIG. When stopped in the order of "123"), the symbol combination of the internal winning combination related to "maintenance replay (code name "RP06" (G_upper rip))" is stopped and displayed on the activated line. Since this display combination is not the transition role of the RT gaming state, the RT gaming state does not transition in this case.

On the other hand, when the reels are stopped in an order other than "left middle right", the symbol combination of the internal winning combination related to "RT2 transition replay (code name "RP03" (G_RT2 transition rep))" is stopped and displayed on the activated line. .. This display role is a transition role that shifts the RT gaming state to the RT2 gaming state (see FIG. 13), so in this case, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT2 gaming state.

Further, for example, when the data pointer is “10” (abbreviation “F_RT3 transition rip 3”) during non-BB carryover, the reels are moved in the order of “middle left and right” (stop order “213” in FIG. 55). When stopped, the symbol combination of the internal winning combination related to "RT3 transition replay (code name "RP04" (G_RT3 transition rep))" is stopped and displayed on the activated line. This display role is a transition role for shifting the RT gaming state to the RT3 gaming state (see FIG. 13), and in this case, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state.

On the other hand, when the reels are stopped in a sequence other than "middle left and right", the symbol combination of the internal winning combination relating to "RT2 transition replay (code name "RP03" (G_RT2 transition rip))" is stopped and displayed on the activated line, and RT The game state shifts to the RT2 game state.

Further, for example, when the data pointer is “25” (abbreviation “F_RT4 specific rep 1”) during non-BB carryover, the reel is “left middle right” (stop order “123” in FIG. 55) or “. When left and right middle" (stop order "132" in FIG. 55) is stopped in this order, the inside of the "specific replay (code name "RP10" (G_specific lip 1) or "RP11" (G_specific lip 2))" The symbol combination of the winning combination is stopped and displayed on the activated line. This display combination is a combination that is a condition for setting a high probability state described later.

Further, for example, when the data pointer is "31" (abbreviation "F_RT4 special rep 1") during non-BB carryover, the reel is "left center right" (stop order "123" in FIG. 55) or ". When left/right middle” (stop order “132” in FIG. 55) and the stop operation timing is stopped at the first timing, “white 7 fluttering” (code name “RP25” (G_special lip 7), “ The symbol combination of the internal winning combination relating to “RP26” (G_special lip 8) or “RP27” (G_special lip 9))” is stopped and displayed on the activated line.

On the other hand, when the reels are stopped in the order of “middle left and right” (stop order “213” in FIG. 55), the symbol combination of the internal winning combination relating to “maintenance replay (code name “RP09” (G_CU rip)) is effective. It is displayed as a stop on the line. Further, when the reels are stopped in the order of “middle right left” (stop order “231” in FIG. 55), the symbol combination of the internal winning combination relating to “specific replay (code name “RP10” (G_specific lip 1))” Is stopped and displayed on the activated line.

The reels are "middle right and left" (stop order "312" in FIG. 55) or "right middle left" (stop order "321" in FIG. 55), and the timing of the stop operation is the second timing. When stopped with, the symbol combination of the internal winning combination relating to "Red 7 set (code name "RP19" (G_special lip 1))" is stopped and displayed on the activated line.

<Game flow>
Next, in the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment, a transition operation between RT game states in various RT game states controlled by the main controller 40 will be described with reference to FIG. 56. FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a transition flow of the RT game state controlled by the main control unit 40.

In addition, various code names indicating the transition winning combination that triggers the transition of the RT gaming state described in FIG. 53 correspond to, for example, the code names defined in the symbol combination table of FIGS. 8 to 11.

[RT game state transition flow]
In the present embodiment, as described above, as the RT gaming state, five types of states, RT0 gaming state to RT4 gaming state, in which the type of internal winning combination of replay and the winning probability thereof are different from each other, are provided.

(1) RT0 game state The RT0 game state is an RT game state set in the initial state, and is a game state in which the winning probability of replay is low.

In the RT0 gaming state, there are cases where symbol combinations related to code names “HZR01” (G_bell spilled eye 1) to “HZR04” (G_bell spilled eye 4) are displayed. This bell spilled eyes (code name "HZR01" (G_bell spilled eyes 1) to "HZR04" (G_bell spilled eyes 4)), that is, the symbol combination related to "bell spilled eyes" is a trigger for transition to the RT1 gaming state. Becomes

In the present embodiment, in the RT0 game state, a small win (9-bell win) associated with the "bell" in which the number of paid out medals is nine, and a push order failure win to be described later overlap. Then, in this case, if the pressing order of the stop button is correct (probability of ⅙ in this embodiment), a 9-bell winning combination is won, and the RT gaming state does not shift.

On the other hand, if the pressing order of the stop button is incorrect (probability of 5/6 in the present embodiment), the symbol combination of the pressing order failure combination or the bell spill is displayed. If the push order failure combination is won, the RT gaming state does not shift. Also, when the bell spilled eye is displayed, the state shifts to the RT1 gaming state.

In the RT0 gaming state, the internal winning combination associated with the code name “RP03” (G_RT2 transition rip) may be determined. In addition, the symbol combination of the internal winning combination related to the code name “RP03” (G_RT2 transition rip) becomes a trigger (transition combination) to the RT2 gaming state.

(2) RT1 gaming state The RT1 gaming state is a gaming state in which the winning probability of replay is high.
In the RT1 gaming state, the internal winning combination (pushing order failure combination) related to the code names “FR14” (G_L1st miss 1) to “FR31” (G_R1st miss 6) may be determined. In addition, the symbol combination of the pushing order failure combination becomes a trigger (transition combination) to the RT0 gaming state.

In the present embodiment, in the RT1 game state, the 9-bell combination (the small combination related to the bell for which 9 medals are paid out) is configured to be duplicated when the push-order failure combination is internally won. Then, in this case, if the pressing order of the stop button is correct (probability of ⅙ in this embodiment), a 9-bell winning combination is won, and the RT gaming state does not shift.

On the other hand, if the pressing order of the stop button is incorrect (probability of 5/6 in the present embodiment), the symbol combination of the pressing order failure combination or the bell spill is displayed. When the push order failure combination is won, it shifts to the RT0 gaming state, and when the bell spill is displayed, it shifts to the RT1 gaming state.

In addition, in the RT1 gaming state, an internal winning combination (RT2 transition replay) associated with the code name “RP03” (G_RT2 transition replay) may be determined. In addition, the symbol combination of the RT2 transition replay becomes a transition trigger (transition hand) to the RT2 gaming state.

In the present embodiment, in the RT1 game state, the maintenance replay (replay without RT transition) is configured to be duplicated when the RT2 transition replay is internally won. Then, in this case, if the pressing order of the stop button is correct (probability of 1/6 in this embodiment), the maintenance replay is won, and the RT gaming state is not shifted. On the other hand, if the pressing order of the stop button is incorrect (probability of 5/6 in this embodiment), the RT2 transition replay is won and the RT2 game state is entered.

Further, in the RT1 gaming state, an internal winning combination (RT3 transition replay) related to the code name “RP04” (G_RT3 transition replay) may be determined. In addition, the symbol combination of the RT3 transition replay becomes a transition trigger (transition hand) to the RT3 gaming state.

In the present embodiment, in the RT1 game state, when the RT3 transition replay is internally won, the maintenance replay (RT transition non-replay) and the RT2 transition replay are configured to overlap. Then, in this case, if the pressing order of the stop button is correct (probability of 1/6 in the present embodiment), the RT3 transition replay is won, and the RT3 game state is entered.

On the other hand, if the pressing order of the stop button is incorrect (probability of 5/6 in this embodiment), the maintenance replay (replay without RT transition) or the RT2 transition replay wins. If the maintenance replay (replay without RT transition) wins, the RT gaming state does not shift, and if the RT2 transition replay wins, it shifts to the RT2 gaming state.

(3) RT2 gaming state The RT2 gaming state is a gaming state in which the winning probability of replay is low.
In the RT2 gaming state, the internal winning combination associated with the code name “RP03” (G_RT2 transition rip) may be determined, but the internal winning combination corresponding to the symbol combination that triggers the transition to another RT gaming state is determined. Not done. In this RT2 game state, the transition to the RT0 game state is triggered by exhausting the specified number of games (for example, 20 games).

(4) RT3 gaming state The RT3 gaming state is a gaming state in which the winning probability of replay is high.
In the RT3 gaming state, the press order failure combination, the 9-bell combination, and the bell spilled combination are configured to be redundantly determined as an internal winning combination. Then, if the pressing order of the stop button is correct (probability of 1/6 in the present embodiment), the 9-bell combination wins, and the RT gaming state does not shift.

On the other hand, when the pressing order of the stop button is incorrect (probability of 5/6 in the present embodiment), the winning of the winning combination in the pressing order or the bell-shaped eye is displayed according to the timing of the stop operation. When the push order failure combination is won, it shifts to the RT0 gaming state, and when the bell spill is displayed, it shifts to the RT1 gaming state.

In the present embodiment, in the RT3 gaming state, the RT1 transition replay, the maintenance replay (RT transition non-replay) and the specific replay are duplicated as an internal winning combination. The specific replay is an internal winning combination associated with the code names “RP10” (G_specification rep1) to “RP12” (G_specification rep3) illustrated in FIG.

In this case, if the pressing order of the stop buttons is correct (probability of 1/6 in this embodiment), the maintenance replay (replay without RT transition) is won, and the RT gaming state does not transition. On the other hand, if the pressing order of the stop button is incorrect (probability of 5/6 in this embodiment), the RT1 transition replay or the specific replay is won. If the RT1 transition replay wins, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT1 gaming state, and if the specific replay wins, the RT gaming state does not shift.

In the present embodiment, if the RT1 transition replay, the maintenance replay, and the specific replay overlap and win as an internal winning combination, the maintenance replay wins with a probability of 1/6 (push order correct answer) and the probability of 2/3 ( The RT1 transition replay wins with a push order incorrect answer), and the specific replay wins with a probability of 1/6 (push order incorrect answer).

Further, in the RT3 gaming state, an internal winning combination (RT4 transition replay) associated with the code name “RP05” (G_RT4 transition replay) may be determined. In addition, the symbol combination of the RT4 transition replay becomes a transition trigger (transition hand) to the RT4 gaming state.

In the present embodiment, in the RT3 gaming state, the RT4 transition replay, the maintenance replay (RT transition non-replay), the RT1 transition replay, and the specific replay are configured so as to be won as an internal winning combination.

In this case, if the pressing order of the stop buttons is correct (probability of ⅕ in the present embodiment), the RT4 transition replay is won, and the RT4 game state is entered. On the other hand, if the pressing order of the stop button is incorrect (probability of 4/5 in the present embodiment), maintenance replay (replay without RT transition), RT1 transition replay, or specific replay wins. When the maintenance replay (replay without RT transition) or the specific replay wins, the RT gaming state does not transition, and when the RT1 transition replay wins, the RT1 gaming state transitions.

(5) RT4 gaming state The RT4 gaming state is a gaming state in which the winning probability of replay is high.
In the RT3 gaming state, the press order failure combination, the 9-bell combination, and the bell spilled combination are configured to be redundantly determined as an internal winning combination. Then, if the pressing order of the stop button is correct (probability of 1/6 in the present embodiment), the 9-bell combination wins, and the RT gaming state does not shift.

On the other hand, if the pressing order of the stop button is incorrect (probability of 5/6 in the present embodiment), the pressing order failure combination or the bell spill will be awarded according to the timing of the stop operation. When the push order failure combination is won, the game is transferred to the RT0 game state, and when the bell spill is won, the game is transferred to the RT1 game state.

In the present embodiment, in the RT4 gaming state, the RT3 transition replay, the specific replay and the maintenance replay (replay without RT transition) are duplicated as an internal winning combination. In this case, with a probability of 1/2 (pushing order), the RT3 transition replay wins and the state shifts to the RT3 gaming state. In addition, the maintenance replay (replay without RT transition) wins with a probability of 1/6 (pushing order), and the RT gaming state does not transition. Also, the specific replay wins with a probability of 1/3 (pushing order), and the RT gaming state does not shift.

In the RT4 gaming state, the internal winning combination (special replay) related to the code names “RP19” (G_special rep 1) to “RP27” (G_special rep 9) may be determined. In the RT4 gaming state, the internal winning combination (chance replay) for the code names “RP13” (G_chance rep 1) to “RP17” (G_chance rep 5) may be determined.

In the present embodiment, in the RT4 game state, special replay, chance replay, specific replay, and maintenance replay (replay without RT transition) are duplicated as an internal winning combination. In this case, the specific replay wins with a probability of 1/6 (pushing order), and the maintenance replay (replay without RT transition) wins with a probability of 1/6 (pushing order).

Also, the special replay wins with a probability of 1/3 (pushing order). When the special replay is won, for example, "red 7" and "white 7" are stopped and displayed along the center line which is a line connecting the middle stages of the respective symbol display areas and the cross-up line.

Also, chance replay wins with a probability of 1/3 (pushing order). The combination of symbols of this chance replay is a display mode in which, for example, "red 7" and "white 7" are stopped and displayed along the center line when the second stop operation is completed. The stop symbol along the center line of the reel stopped in the third stop operation is a symbol other than "red 7" and "white 7". That is, when the chance replay is won, the fake effect of "red 7" and "white 7" is set.

During the BB carryover shown in FIG. 56, the winning probability of the internal winning combination relating to the replay is different from the RT1 to RT4 gaming states. That is, during the BB carryover, the internal winning combination is determined by referring to the internal gaming state internal lottery table (BB carryover).

Also, as shown in FIG. 56, during BB, either the RT0 gaming state or the RT1 gaming state is entered. When the BB is started, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT0 gaming state. Then, when the RB is won and the RB is carried over, the RT gaming state is shifted to the RT1 gaming state. Further, when the RB gaming state ends, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT0 gaming state.

When BB ends, the RT game state at that time is maintained and the game state returns to the normal game state. That is, when BB ends during the RT0 gaming state, the RT0 gaming state of the normal gaming state is entered. On the other hand, when the BB ends while the RB is carried over in the RT1 gaming state, the RT1 gaming state of the normal gaming state is set. Further, in the present embodiment, when the RB is won, a notification of a stop operation such that the symbol combination of the RB is not stopped and displayed is made to avoid the transition to the RT0 gaming state, and the RT1 gaming state while the RB is carried over To finish BB.

During the RT0 game state during BB and the RT1 game state during carryover of RB, the winning probability of the internal winning combination relating to the replay is RT1 game state during which BB is not during BB and RT1 game state during which BB is not carried over (RB carryover). Different from the inside. That is, during the RT0 game state in BB, the internal winning combination is determined by referring to the internal lottery table for general game state (RT0 BB in general). In addition, during the RT1 game state during RB carryover, the internal winning combination is determined by referring to the internal lottery table for general game state (RT1 RB carryover).

<Explanation of sub game state>
Next, with reference to FIG. 57, the sub game state will be described.
In the present embodiment, various game states related to effects controlled by the sub control circuit 42 (sub CPU 81) are referred to as "sub game states". In this embodiment, the normal state, CZ (chance zone), MICHI, R_ART, PTR, and RTG are set as the sub game state.

[Normal state]
In the normal state, the internal lottery table (see FIGS. 15 to 18) is referred to for each game, and the internal lottery is performed to determine whether or not the BB is won.

In the internal lottery during the normal state, BB1 to BB4 are won, and when the symbol combination corresponding to each BB is stopped and displayed, the sub game state shifts to CZ (chance zone). On the other hand, in the internal lottery during the normal state, BB5 is won, and when the symbol combination corresponding to BB5 is stopped and displayed, the sub game state shifts to MICHI.

In the normal state, the winning probability of ART in BB(CZ) is usually a low probability state, and when a specific replay is won, a predetermined number of games (for example, 10 games) are consumed. It becomes a high probability state. During the high probability state, the winning probability of ART in BB(CZ) becomes a specific probability that is higher than a predetermined probability. That is, the winning probability of ART is higher when the player wins BB during the high probability state than when the player wins BB during the low probability state.

In the present embodiment, the winning probabilities of the ART in the BB (CZ) in the low-probability state and the high-probability state are made different, but as the pachi-slot of the present invention, the rare role and the bell in the low-probability state and the high-probability state are used. The winning combination may be different in the probability of winning. In addition, the "rare combination" in the present embodiment is a winning number "37", "38", "55", "56", "57", "58", and is basically a replay or a bell. The winning probability is lower than that of the internal winning combination.

[CZ (Chance Zone)]
CZ is a sub game state executed during BB1 to BB4. Incidentally, during BB, it becomes the RT0 game state or the RT1 game state, and the RT1 game state becomes the RB carryover (see FIG. 56). If the BB ends while the RB is carried over, the RB's right (winning) becomes invalid. When BB ends, CZ ends.

During CZ, FS points are awarded by satisfying a predetermined condition. Then, when the total of the FS points given during the CZ reaches a specified value (for example, 100 points), the shift of R_ART is determined. Further, when the CZ ends without reaching the prescribed value of the FS points, the ART lottery based on the total of the FS points given up to that point is performed, and in the case of winning, the transfer of R_ART is determined.

When the shift of R_ART is not decided in the CZ, the shift to the normal state is made. That is, when R_ART is not determined in BB1 to BB4, the sub game state after the end of BB is shifted from CZ to the normal state.

The BB ends on the condition that 44 or more medals have been paid out. On the other hand, when the symbol combination of the 9-bell combination is displayed, 9 medals (game media) are paid out. Therefore, when the symbol combination of the 9-bell combination is displayed five times, 45 medals are paid out, and the BB ends.

If the BB is finished by displaying the symbol combination of the 9-bell combination five times, the BB finish condition may be any of paying out 37 to 43 medals. However, for example, if the ending condition of BB is to pay out 37 medals, the symbol combination of another combination (rare combination) is displayed, and 2 to 4 medals are paid out, and the pattern of the 9-bell combination is displayed. The BB may end at the timing when the combination is displayed four times. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the BB end condition is set to 44 (or more), which is close to the total of 45 medals obtained when the symbol combination of the 9-bell combination is displayed 5 times, so that another combination is achieved. It is possible to increase the number of times that the display of the symbol combination (rare part) is allowed. Further, even if the rare part is won during the BB, it is possible to prevent the end time of the BB from being advanced so that the interest of the game is not deteriorated.

[MICHI]
MICHI is a sub-game state executed during BB5. When the sub game state is transferred to MICHI, it is determined to transfer to R_ART after the end of MICHI (BB5). It is also decided to shift from R_ART to PTR.

[R_ART]
R_ART is a sub-game state executed during the RT3 game state. During R_ART, EX points are given by satisfying a predetermined condition. Further, R_ART is composed of "LV.1" to "LV.4" and "PTR" to which a predetermined number of games (for example, 20 games) are assigned.

When a predetermined number of games are consumed in each LV (level) and the total number of EX points reaches a specified value (for example, 100 points), the LV (level) is increased (promoted). On the other hand, when a predetermined number of games are consumed in each LV (level) and the total number of EX points does not reach the specified value, the LV (level) is downgraded (degraded).

For example, when the predetermined number of games is exhausted in "LV.3" and the total number of EX points reaches the specified value, the value is increased to "LV.4". On the other hand, if the total number of EX points has not reached the specified value when the predetermined number of games has been exhausted in “LV.3”, the game goes down to “LV.2”.

When the predetermined number of games is consumed in "LV.1" and the total of EX points does not reach the specified value, R_ART ends and the sub game state shifts to the normal state. On the other hand, when the predetermined number of games is exhausted in "LV.4" and the total number of EX points reaches the specified value, it is determined to start "PTR".

In "PTR", first, "PREMIUM", "FIGHTING" or "BURNING" is started to determine the initial number of games of "PTR". The determined initial game number is set in the PTR game number counter, and when the PTR game number counter reaches “0”, “PTR” ends.

In “PREMIUM”, a predetermined number of games is given when “Red 7” can be aligned along the center line during the first number of games (for example, 10 games). If "Red 7" can be aligned along the center line, the combo occurrence lottery is performed with reference to the above-mentioned RT4 gaming state combo occurrence lottery table (see FIG. 40). Then, when the success of the combo (addition of the number of games in PTR) is determined, the addition of a specific number of games (for example, 123 games) is determined. That is, the specific game number is added to the PTR game number counter.

In "FIGHING", a predetermined replay symbol combination (for example, "watermelon"-"replay 3"-"bell 1" ("replay 3" is aligned along the crossdown line)) is determined in advance. The addition of one game number among the plurality of game numbers (for example, 10 games, 30 games, 50 games) is determined. That is, one of the plurality of predetermined game numbers is added to the PTR game number counter.

Note that "FIGHTING" ends when the reels stopped and displayed becomes a specific display mode. As a specific display mode, for example, “replay 1” or “replay 2” is displayed in the middle area corresponding to the left reel 3L, the lower area corresponding to the middle reel 3C, and the middle area corresponding to the right reel 3R. Display modes can be mentioned.

“BURNING” ends when the second number of games (for example, 5 games) is exhausted. In this "BURNING", the number of games to be added is determined according to the type of internal winning combination (or display combination) in each game. Then, the determined additional game is added to the PTR game number counter.

In addition, even during the “PTR”, EX points are awarded by satisfying a predetermined condition. Then, when the total of EX points reaches the specified value during “PTR”, it is determined to start “B_RUSH”.

“B_RUSH” sets a third game number (for example, three games) as one set, and notifies the number of additional games determined by lottery in each game. Then, the game with the number of games in one set added is continued until it is removed from the continuous lottery.

As shown in FIG. 57, when the CZ shifts to the R_ART, it starts from "LV.3" of the R_ART. Therefore, even if R_ART ends without leveling up even once, the number of R_ART games is three times or more the predetermined number of games.

On the other hand, when MICHI shifts to R_ART, it is determined to start from “LV.1” of R_ART, and to level up to “LV.4” and start of “PTR”. Therefore, the number of R_ART games when MICHI shifts to R_ART is at least eight times the predetermined number of games and the total number of games consumed in “PTR”.

[RTG]
RTG is a sub game state executed during the RT4 game state. For the RTG, “PTR” is added (stock) every time “white 7” is aligned along the center line during the fourth number of games (for example, 20 games). Further, when the RTG ends, the sub game state shifts to R_ART, and "PTR" is started. The initial number of "PTR" games in this case is set to a predetermined value (50 games) set in advance.

<Structure of data table stored in sub ROM>
Next, the configuration of various data tables stored in the sub ROM 82 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 to 164.

[Specific mode MAP lottery table when changing settings]
First, the setting specific mode MAP lottery table will be described. The setting change specific mode MAP lottery table is used when the specific mode MAP lottery is performed in the setting change process.

The setting change specific mode MAP lottery table defines the correspondence relationship between the map type set for each set value and the lottery value.

In the specific mode MAP random determination process using the setting change specific mode MAP random determination table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (in the present embodiment, 0 to 32767, random number denominator=32768) is set to When the setting is changed, the lottery value of the map type defined in the specific mode MAP lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction becomes negative (whether or not a so-called "carry" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“carrying” occurs), it means that the map type at that time has been won.

[Next Specific Mode MAP Lottery Table]
Next, the next specific mode MAP lottery table will be described. The next specific mode MAP lottery table is used when the next lottery of the map type of the specific mode is performed in the normal processing described later.

FIG. 59 is a diagram showing the configuration of the next specific mode MAP lottery table (MAP1) (No. 1). FIG. 60 is a diagram showing the configuration of the next specific mode MAP lottery table (MAP1) (part 2). The next specific mode MAP lottery table (MAP1) is referred to when the current MAP type is “MAP1”.

In the present embodiment, MAP1 to 20 are set as the types of MAP, and the next specific mode MAP lottery table corresponding to each of MAP1 to 20 is provided. However, since the next specific mode MAP lottery table for each MAP has the same configuration, here, the next specific mode MAP lottery table for MAP1 (see FIGS. 59 and 60) is extracted, and the next specific mode MAP lottery table The illustration and description of the specific mode MAP lottery table are omitted.

The next specific mode MAP lottery table defines the correspondence between the map type and the lottery value set for each mode type and setting value.

In the specific mode MAP lottery process using the next specific mode MAP lottery table (MAP1), first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator=32768 in this embodiment) is set. Next, the lottery values of the map types defined in the next specific mode MAP lottery table (MAP1) are sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction becomes negative (whether or not a so-called "carry" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“carrying” occurs), it means that the map type at that time has been won.

[Specific mode transition lottery table]
Next, the specific mode transfer lottery table will be described. The specific mode transition lottery table is used when the next specific mode transition lottery is performed in the later-described normal processing.

FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a configuration of a specific mode transfer lottery table (mode A) (No. 1). In addition, FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a configuration of a specific mode transfer lottery table (mode A) (part 2). The specific mode transition lottery table (mode A) is referred to when the current mode type is “mode A”.

In the present embodiment, modes A to E are set as the types of the specific mode. Modes A to E change the value of the initial FS point described later (see FIG. 66 described later). Then, since the value of the initial FS point is different, the winning probability of R_ART in CZ is different. That is, if the value of the initial FS points is large, the total of the FS points easily reaches the specified value (for example, 100 points), and the winning probability of R_ART during CZ increases. If the total of FS points does not reach the specified value and CZ ends, ART lottery based on the total of FS points given up to that point is performed. Therefore, if the value of the initial FS points is large, R_ART The winning probability of becomes higher.

Further, in the present embodiment, a specific mode transition lottery table corresponding to each of the modes A to E is provided. However, since the specific mode transition lottery table for each mode has the same configuration, here, the specific mode transition lottery table for mode A (see FIGS. 61 and 62) is extracted, and the modes B, C, and D are extracted. , The figure showing the specific mode transfer lottery table for E and the description thereof are omitted.

The specific mode transition lottery table (mode A) defines the correspondence between the mode type set for each type and set value of the internal winning combination and the lottery value.

In the specific mode transition lottery process using the specific mode transition lottery table (mode A), first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined range of numerical values (0 to 32767, random number denominator=32768 in the present embodiment) is set. , The specific mode transition lottery table (mode A) is sequentially subtracted by the lottery values of the mode types defined in the lottery table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction becomes negative (whether or not a so-called "carry" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“carrying” occurs), the mode type at that time is won.

[High-precision stock lottery table]
Next, the highly accurate stock lottery table will be described. The high-probability stock lottery table is used when performing the high-probability stock lottery in the 3OFF time process described later.
FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a configuration of a highly accurate stock lottery table.

The high-probability stock lottery table defines the correspondence relationship between the high-probability stock number set for each type and set value of the internal winning combination and the lottery value.

In the highly accurate stock lottery process using the highly accurate stock lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined range of numerical values (0 to 32767, random number denominator=32768 in this embodiment) is set to the highly accurate stock lottery process. The lottery value of the high-precision stock number specified in the lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction becomes negative (whether or not a so-called "carry" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (a "carry" occurs), the high-precision stock number at that time is won.

[ART lottery table]
Next, the ART lottery table will be described. The ART lottery table is used when performing the ART lottery in the later-described normal medium process.

FIG. 64 is a diagram showing the structure of the ART lottery table (without high-precision stock). This ART lottery table (without high-precision stock) is referred to when there is no high-precision stock, that is, in the low probability state.
Further, FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a configuration of the ART lottery table (with high-precision stock). This ART lottery table (with high-probability stock) is referred to when there is a high-probability stock, that is, in the high probability state.

The ART lottery table (without high-precision stock) and the ART lottery table (with high-precision stock) are the winning/non-winning (missing) of the ART, which is set for each type and setting value of the internal winning combination, and its lottery value and The correspondence relationship between

In the ART lottery process using the ART lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined range of numerical values (0 to 32767, random number denominator=32768 in the present embodiment) is defined in the highly accurate stock lottery table. The winning/non-winning (missing) lottery value of the ART thus given is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction becomes negative (whether or not a so-called "carry" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“carrying” occurs), it means that the winning or non-winning (disappearance) of the ART at that time is won.

[CZ initial FS point lottery table]
Next, the CZ initial FS point lottery table will be described. The CZ initial FS point lottery table is used when performing the CZ initial FS point lottery in the later-described normal processing.
FIG. 66 is a diagram showing the structure of the CZ initial FS point lottery table.

The CZ initial FS point lottery table defines the correspondence relationship between the FS points set for each mode type and set value and the lottery value.

In the CZ initial FS point random determination process using the CZ initial FS point random determination table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator=32768 in the present embodiment) is set to CZ. The lottery value of the FS points defined in the initial FS point lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction becomes negative (whether or not a so-called "carry" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“carrying” occurs), the FS point at that time is won.

[CZ FS point acquisition lottery table]
Next, the lottery table for obtaining FS points in CZ will be described. The in-CZ FS point acquisition lottery table is used when the in-CZ FS point acquisition lottery is performed in the after-CZ process.
FIG. 67 is a diagram showing the structure of a FS mid-CZ FS point acquisition lottery table.

The CZ FS point acquisition lottery table defines the correspondence relationship between the FS points and the lottery value set for each type and setting value of the internal winning combination.

In the CZ medium FS point acquisition lottery process using the CZ medium FS point acquisition lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator=32768 in the present embodiment) is set. , The FS point lottery table defined in the CZ FS point acquisition lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction becomes negative (whether or not a so-called "carry" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“carrying” occurs), the FS point at that time is won.

[ART lottery table at the end of CZ]
Next, the ART lottery table at the end of CZ will be described. The CZ end ART lottery table is used when performing CZ end ART lottery in the CZ mid-process described later.
FIG. 68 is a diagram showing the structure of the ART lottery table at the end of CZ.

The CZ end ART lottery table defines a correspondence relationship between the winning/non-winning (disappearance) of the ART, which is set for each FS point and set value, and the lottery value.

In the CZ end ART lottery process using the CZ end ART lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator=32768 in this embodiment) is set to CZ. At the end, the lottery values of the winning/non-winning (out) of the ART defined in the ART lottery table are sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction becomes negative (whether or not a so-called "carry" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“carrying” occurs), it means that the winning or non-winning (disappearance) of the ART at that time is won.

[High-precision stock lottery table at the end of CZ]
Next, the high accuracy stock lottery table at the end of CZ will be described. The CZ end high accuracy stock lottery table is used when the CZ end high accuracy stock lottery is performed in the BB end processing described later.
FIG. 69 is a view showing the structure of the high-accuracy stock lottery table at the end of CZ.

The high-probability stock lottery table at the end of CZ defines the correspondence relationship between the high-probability stock number set for each type and set value of the RT gaming state and the lottery value.

In the CZ end high accuracy stock lottery process using the CZ end high accuracy stock lottery table, first, a random number extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator=32768 in the present embodiment). Numerical values are sequentially subtracted by the lottery value of the winning/non-winning (outside) of ART defined in the highly accurate stock lottery table at the end of CZ. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction becomes negative (whether or not a so-called "carry" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (a "carry" occurs), the high-precision stock number at that time is won.

[PTR stock lottery table after reaching specified points in CZ]
Next, the PTR stock lottery table after reaching the specified point in the CZ will be described. The PTR stock lottery table after reaching the specified point during CZ is used when performing the PTR stock lottery after reaching the specified point during CZ in the later-described CZ process.
FIG. 70 is a diagram showing the structure of the PTR stock lottery table after the specified point in the CZ is reached.

The PTR stock lottery table after reaching the specified point in the CZ defines the correspondence relationship between the winning/non-winning (missing) of the PTR stock, which is set for each type and setting value of the internal winning combination.

In the PTR stock lottery processing after reaching the specified point during CZ using the PTR stock lottery table after reaching the specified point during CZ, first, from the range of a predetermined numerical value (0 to 32767 in this embodiment, random number denominator=32768). The extracted random number value is sequentially subtracted by the winning/non-winning lottery value of the PTR stock defined in the PTR stock lottery table after reaching the specified point in the CZ. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction becomes negative (whether or not a so-called "carry" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (a "carrying" occurs), it means that the PTR stock is won or not (win).

[ART Grade Lottery Table]
Next, the ART grade lottery table will be described. The ART grade lottery table is used when performing the ART grade lottery in the CZ mid-process described later.

FIG. 71 is a diagram showing the structure of the ART grade lottery table (CZ). This ART grade lottery table (CZ) is referred to during the CZ.
FIG. 72 is a diagram showing the structure of the ART grade lottery table (RTG). This ART grade lottery table (RTG) is referred to when the RTG is in progress.
FIG. 73 is a diagram showing the structure of the ART grade lottery table (BB5). This ART grade lottery table (BB5) is referred to when it is during BB5.

In this embodiment, grades A to C are set as the ART grade types. The grades A to C have different LV.2 loop rates described later (see FIGS. 112 and 113 described later). Then, since the LV.2 loop rate is different, the winning probability of the LV.2 loop lottery is different (see FIG. 114 described later). If the winning probability of the LV.2 loop lottery is high, the transition from LV.2 to LV.1 is avoided, and it becomes difficult to demote the level. That is, the grades A to C have different probabilities of being demoted to LV.1 in LV.2.

Further, since the LV.2 loop rate is different, the winning probability of the opponent related to LV.2 is different. Since the opponents related to LV.2 are different, the value of EX points acquired during LV.2 is different (see FIGS. 86 to 97 described later). And, since the value of EX points acquired during LV.2 is different, the probability that the level will rise and fall is different. That is, if the value of EX points acquired during LV.2 is large, the total of EX points easily reaches the specified value (for example, 100 points), and thus the probability of being promoted to LV.3 increases. Therefore, grades A to C differ in the probability that the level will rise and fall from LV.2.

The ART grade lottery table defines the correspondence between the type of ART grade and the lottery value set for each mode type and setting value.

In the ART grade lottery processing using the ART grade lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined range of numerical values (0 to 32767, random number denominator=32768 in this embodiment) is set in the ART grade lottery table. The lottery value for each type of ART GRAT specified is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction becomes negative (whether or not a so-called "carry" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (a "carrying" occurs), it means that the type of the ART GRAT at that time has been won.

[Lottery table for EX point waiting for ART end]
Next, the EX point acquisition lottery table waiting for the end of ART will be described. The EX point acquisition lottery table waiting for ART end is used when the EX point acquisition lottery waiting for ART end is performed in the ART end waiting process described later.

FIG. 74 is a diagram showing the configuration of the EX point acquisition lottery table (part 1) on standby for ending ART. FIG. 75 is a diagram showing the configuration of the EX point acquisition lottery table (part 2) on standby for ending ART. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing the configuration of the EX point acquisition lottery table (part 3) on standby for ending ART.

The EX point acquisition lottery table waiting for the end of ART defines the correspondence relationship between the EX points set for each type and set value of the internal winning combination and the lottery value.

In the ART end waiting EX point acquisition lottery process using the ART end waiting EX point acquisition lottery table, first, it is extracted from a predetermined range of numerical values (0 to 32767, random number denominator=32768 in the present embodiment). The random number value is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value of EX points defined in the EX point acquisition lottery table waiting for the end of ART. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction becomes negative (whether or not a so-called "carry" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“carrying” occurs), it means that the EX point at that time is won.

[Extra lottery table for EX points in LV.1]
Next, the lottery table for obtaining EX points in LV.1 will be described. The LV.1 medium EX point acquisition lottery table is used when performing the LV.1 medium EX point acquisition lottery in the later-described LV.1 medium processing.

FIG. 77 is a diagram showing the configuration of the LV.1 medium EX point acquisition lottery table (No. 1). FIG. 78 is a diagram showing a configuration of a lottery table for EX point acquisition in LV.1 (No. 2). FIG. 79 is a view showing the configuration of the LV.1 medium EX point acquisition lottery table (No. 3).

The configuration of the LV.1 EX point acquisition lottery table shown in FIGS. 77 to 79 is the same as that of the ART end waiting EX point acquisition lottery table shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, except for the setting mode of the lottery value. Since this is a configuration, description of this table configuration will be omitted. Further, the method of the LV.1 EX point acquisition lottery process using the LV.1 EX point acquisition lottery table is also the same as the ART end waiting EX point acquisition lottery process using the ART end standby EX point acquisition lottery table described above. Since it is the same as the method (a method of sequentially subtracting the lottery value and determining whether or not a "carry" has occurred), the description thereof will be omitted.

[Extra lottery table for EX points in LV.3]
Next, the lottery table for obtaining EX points in LV.3 will be described. The LV.3 medium EX point acquisition lottery table is used when performing the LV.3 medium EX point acquisition lottery in the LV.3 medium processing described later.

FIG. 80 is a view showing the configuration of the LV.3 medium EX point acquisition lottery table (No. 1). FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a configuration of a lottery table for EX point acquisition in LV.3 (part 2). FIG. 82 is a diagram showing a configuration of a lottery table for EX point acquisition in LV.3 (part 3).

The configuration of the LV.3 medium EX point acquisition lottery table shown in FIGS. 80 to 82 is the same as that of the ART end waiting EX point acquisition lottery table shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, except for the setting mode of the lottery value. Since this is a configuration, description of this table configuration will be omitted. In addition, the method of the LV.3 EX point acquisition lottery process using the LV.3 EX point acquisition lottery table is also the same as the ART end waiting EX point acquisition lottery process using the ART end standby EX point acquisition lottery table described above. Since it is the same as the method (a method of sequentially subtracting the lottery value and determining whether or not a "carry" has occurred), the description thereof will be omitted.

[Lottery table to get EX points in LV.4]
Next, the lottery table for obtaining EX points in LV.4 will be described. The LV.4 medium EX point acquisition lottery table is used when performing the LV.4 medium EX point acquisition lottery in the later-described LV.4 medium processing.

FIG. 83 is a diagram showing the configuration of the EX point-winning lottery table (part 1) in LV.4. FIG. 84 is a view showing the structure of the lottery table for EX point acquisition in LV.4 (part 2). FIG. 85 is a view showing the structure of the lottery table for EX point acquisition in LV.4 (part 3).

The configuration of the LV.4 medium EX point acquisition lottery table shown in FIGS. 83 to 85 is the same as that of the ART end waiting EX point acquisition lottery table shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, except for the setting mode of the lottery value. Since this is a configuration, description of this table configuration will be omitted. In addition, the method of the LV.4 EX point acquisition lottery process using the LV.4 EX point acquisition lottery table is also the same as the ART end waiting EX point acquisition lottery process using the ART end standby EX point acquisition lottery table described above. Since it is the same as the method (a method of sequentially subtracting the lottery value and determining whether or not a "carry" has occurred), the description thereof will be omitted.

[Lot table with EX points in LV.2]
Next, the lottery table for acquiring EX points in LV.2 will be described. The LV.2 medium EX point acquisition lottery table is used when performing the LV.2 medium EX point acquisition lottery in the later-described LV.2 medium processing.

FIG. 86 is a diagram showing a configuration of a lottery table for obtaining EX points in LV.2 (enemy A) (part 1). FIG. 87 is a diagram showing a configuration of a lottery table for acquiring EX points in LV.2 (enemy A) (part 2). FIG. 88 is a diagram showing the configuration of the EX point-winning lottery table (enemy A) (part 3) in LV.2.
The LV.2 EX point acquisition lottery table (enemy A) shown in FIGS. 86 to 88 is referred to when the opponent is the enemy A in the battle production performed during LV.2.

FIG. 89 is a diagram showing a configuration of an EX point acquisition lottery table (enemy B) (part 1) in LV.2. FIG. 90 is a diagram showing the configuration of a lottery table for EX point acquisition in LV.2 (enemy B) (part 2). FIG. 91 is a diagram showing a configuration of a lottery table for EX point acquisition in LV.2 (enemy B) (part 3).
The EX point acquisition lottery table for LV.2 (enemy B) shown in FIGS. 89 to 91 is referred to when the opponent is the enemy B in the battle effect performed during LV.2.

FIG. 92 is a diagram showing the configuration of the EX point-winning lottery table (enemy C) (part 1) in LV.2. FIG. 93 is a diagram showing a configuration of a lottery table for obtaining EX points in LV.2 (enemy C) (part 2). FIG. 94 is a diagram showing the configuration of the EX point-winning lottery table (enemy C) (part 3) in LV.2.
The LV.2 EX point acquisition lottery table (enemy C) shown in FIGS. 92 to 94 is referred to when the opponent is the enemy C in the battle effect performed during LV.2.

FIG. 95 is a diagram showing a configuration of a lottery table for obtaining EX points in LV.2 (enemy D) (part 1). FIG. 96 is a diagram showing a configuration of a lottery table for acquiring EX points in LV.2 (enemy D) (part 2). FIG. 97 is a view showing the configuration of the lottery table for EX point acquisition in LV.2 (enemy D) (part 3).
The EX point acquisition lottery table during LV.2 (enemy D) shown in FIGS. 95 to 97 is referred to when the opponent is the enemy D in the battle effect performed during LV.2.

The configuration of the LV.2 EX point acquisition lottery table shown in FIGS. 86 to 97 is the same as that of the ART end waiting EX point acquisition lottery table shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, except for the setting mode of the lottery value. Since this is a configuration, description of this table configuration will be omitted. In addition, the method of the LV.2 EX point acquisition lottery process using the LV.2 EX point acquisition lottery table is also the same as the ART end waiting EX point acquisition lottery process using the ART end standby EX point acquisition lottery table described above. Since it is the same as the method (a method of sequentially subtracting the lottery value and determining whether or not a "carry" has occurred), the description thereof will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, enemies A to D are set as the types of opponents related to LV.2. As shown in FIGS. 86 to 97, since the opponents (enemy A to D) related to LV.2 are different, the probabilities of acquiring EX points having a large value during LV.2 are different. In the present embodiment, when the enemy D is selected, the probability of acquiring EX points having a large value is highest, followed by the enemy C, the enemy B, and the enemy A in this order. That is, when the enemy D is selected, the probability of being promoted to LV.3 is the highest, and when the enemy A is selected, the probability of being promoted to LV.3 is the lowest.

[B_RUSH Medium EX Point Acquisition Lottery Table]
Next, the lottery table for obtaining EX points in B_RUSH will be described. The B_RUSH middle EX point acquisition lottery table is used when performing the B_RUSH middle EX point acquisition lottery in the specialization preparation process described later.

FIG. 98 is a diagram showing the configuration of the EX point acquisition random determination table (BR mode A) in B_RUSH (No. 1). FIG. 99 is a diagram showing the configuration of the EX point acquisition lottery table in B_RUSH (BR mode A) (No. 2). FIG. 100 is a diagram showing the configuration of the EX point acquisition lottery table during B_RUSH (BR mode A) (No. 3).
The EX point acquisition lottery table (BR mode A) in B_RUSH shown in FIGS. 98 to 100 is referred to when the BR mode type is BR mode A in B_RUSH.

FIG. 101 is a diagram showing the configuration of the EX point acquisition lottery table (BR mode B) (No. 1) during B_RUSH. FIG. 102 is a diagram showing the configuration of the EX point acquisition lottery table in B_RUSH (BR mode B) (No. 2). FIG. 103 is a diagram showing the configuration of the EX point acquisition lottery table in B_RUSH (BR mode B) (No. 3).
The EX point acquisition lottery table (BR mode B) in B_RUSH shown in FIGS. 101 to 103 is referred to when the BR mode type is BR mode B in B_RUSH.

In this embodiment, BR modes A to D are set as the BR mode types. The BR modes A to D differ in the value of EX points acquired during B_RUSH described later. Then, since the value of the EX point acquired during B_RUSH is different, the winning probability of “B_RUSH” in “PTR” is different. That is, if the value of EX points acquired during B_RUSH is large, the total of EX points easily reaches a specified value (for example, 100 points), and the winning probability of “B_RUSH” in “PTR” becomes high.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the value of EX points to be acquired during B_RUSH differs depending on the type of BR mode, a B_RUSH during EX point acquisition lottery table corresponding to each of BR modes A to D is provided. ing. However, since the B_RUSH medium EX point acquisition lottery table for each BR mode has the same configuration, here, the B_RUSH medium EX point acquisition lottery table for BR mode A and BR mode B (see FIGS. 98 to 103). ) Is excerpted and the figure and description showing the B_RUSH medium EX point acquisition lottery table for BR modes C and D are omitted.

It should be noted that the configuration of the EX point acquisition lottery table during B_RUSH shown in FIGS. 98 to 103 is the same as that of the EX point acquisition lottery table during ART end waiting shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, except for the setting mode of the lottery value. Therefore, the description of this table configuration will be omitted. In addition, the method of lottery processing for acquiring EX points during B_RUSH using the lottery table for obtaining EX points during B_RUSH is also the method of lottery processing for obtaining EX points during waiting for ART ending using the lottery table for obtaining EX points during waiting for ART end (lottery). This is the same as the method of sequentially subtracting the values and determining whether or not a "digit" has occurred, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

[Lottery table for EX points in BB]
Next, the lottery table for EX points in BB will be described. The in-BB EX point acquisition lottery table is used when performing in-BB EX point acquisition lottery in the BB in-art process described later.

FIG. 104 is a view showing the configuration of the lottery table for EX point in BB (No. 1). FIG. 105 is a diagram showing a configuration of a lottery table for EX points in BB (part 2).

It should be noted that the configuration of the EX-BB earning lottery table shown in FIGS. 104 and 105 is the same as that of the EX-point earning lottery table during ART end waiting shown in FIGS. 74 to 76, except for the setting mode of the lottery value. Therefore, the description of this table configuration will be omitted. Further, the method of lottery processing for obtaining EX points during BB using the lottery table for obtaining EX points during BB is also the method of lottery processing for obtaining EX points during waiting for ART (lottery). This is the same as the method of sequentially subtracting the values and determining whether or not a "digit" has occurred, and thus the description thereof will be omitted.

[Lottery table for initial EX points at level transition]
Next, the initial EX point acquisition lottery table at the time of level transition will be described. The level transition initial EX point acquisition lottery table is used when performing the level transition initial EX point acquisition lottery in the sub game state transition processing described later.

FIG. 106 is a view showing the structure of the initial EX point acquisition lottery table at the time of level transition.
The initial EX point acquisition lottery table at the time of level transition defines the correspondence relationship between the EX points and each lottery value set for each type and setting value of the transfer destination level. Hereinafter, “LV.5” indicates “PTR”.

In the level transition initial EX point acquisition lottery process using the level transition initial EX point acquisition lottery table, first, it is extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator=32768 in the present embodiment). The random number value is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value of EX points defined in the initial EX point acquisition lottery table at the time of level transition. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction becomes negative (whether or not a so-called "carry" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“carrying” occurs), it means that the EX point at that time is won.

[PTR stock lottery table after reaching specified points]
Next, the PTR stock lottery table after reaching the specified point will be described. The PTR stock lottery table after reaching the specified point is used when performing the PTR stock lottery after reaching the specified point in the processing during each level described later.

FIG. 107 is a diagram showing the configuration of the PTR stock lottery table (LV.1) after reaching the specified point. After reaching the specified point, the PTR stock lottery table (LV.1) is referred to when it is in LV.1.
FIG. 108 is a diagram showing the configuration of the PTR stock lottery table (LV.2) after reaching the specified point. After reaching the specified point, the PTR stock lottery table (LV.2) is referred to when it is in LV.2.
FIG. 109 is a diagram showing the configuration of the PTR stock lottery table (LV.3) after reaching the specified point. After reaching the specified point, the PTR stock lottery table (LV.3) is referred to when it is in LV.3.
FIG. 110 is a diagram showing the configuration of the PTR stock lottery table (LV.4) after reaching the specified point. After reaching the specified point, the PTR stock lottery table (LV.4) is referred to when it is in LV.4.
FIG. 111 is a diagram showing the configuration of the PTR stock lottery table (LV.5) after reaching the specified point. After reaching the specified point, the PTR stock lottery table (LV.5) is referred to when it is in the LV.5 (PTR).

After the specified point is reached, the PTR stock lottery table defines the correspondence relationship between the winning/non-winning (missing) of the PTR stock, which is set for each type and setting value of the internal winning combination.

In the PTR stock lottery process after reaching the specified point using the PTR stock lottery table after reaching the specified point, first, a random number extracted from a predetermined range of numerical values (0 to 32767, random number denominator=32768 in this embodiment). After the specified point is reached, the numerical value is sequentially subtracted by the winning/non-winning (outside) lottery value of the PTR stock defined in the PTR stock lottery table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction becomes negative (whether or not a so-called "carry" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (a "carrying" occurs), it means that the PTR stock is won or not (win).

[LV.2 Loop rate lottery table]
Next, the LV.2 loop rate lottery table will be described. The LV.2 loop rate lottery table is used when the LV.2 loop rate lottery is performed in the LV.2 intermediate processing described later.

FIG. 112 is a diagram showing the configuration of the LV.2 loop rate lottery table (first time). This LV.2 loop rate lottery table (first time) is referred to when the number of continuation times of LV.2 is the first time.
FIG. 113 is a diagram showing the configuration of the LV.2 loop rate lottery table (other than the first time). This LV.2 loop rate lottery table (other than the first time) is referred to when the number of continuation times of LV.2 is other than the first time.

The LV.2 loop rate lottery table defines the correspondence between the LV.2 loop rate type set for each ART grade type and set value and the lottery value.

In the LV.2 loop rate random determination process using the LV.2 loop rate random determination table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator=32768 in the present embodiment) is set. , LV.2 loop rate lottery table, the lottery value for each type of LV.2 loop rate is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction becomes negative (whether or not a so-called "carry" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“carrying” occurs), it means that the type of the LV.2 loop rate at that time has been won.

[LV.2 loop lottery table]
Next, the LV.2 loop lottery table will be described. The LV.2 loop lottery table is used when performing the LV.2 loop lottery in the LV.2 intermediate processing described later.
FIG. 114 is a diagram showing the structure of the LV.2 loop lottery table.

The LV.2 loop lottery table defines the correspondence between the winning/non-winning (missing) of the LV.2 loop, which is set for each type and setting value of the LV.2 loop rate, and the lottery value.

In the LV.2 loop lottery process using the LV.2 loop lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined range of numerical values (0 to 32767, random number denominator=32768 in this embodiment) is set to LV. .2 Loop lottery table The LV.2 loop winning/non-winning (missing) lottery values specified in the lottery table are sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction becomes negative (whether or not a so-called "carry" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“carrying” occurs), the winning type (winning/non-winning) of the LV.2 loop at that time is won.

[Owner lottery table (LV.2)]
Next, the opponent lottery table (LV.2) will be described. The opponent lottery table (LV.2) is used when the opponent lottery is performed in the sub game state transition processing described later.
FIG. 115 is a diagram showing the configuration of the opponent lottery table (LV.2).

The opponent lottery table (LV.2) defines the correspondence relationship between the opponent and the lottery value set for each type and set value of the LV.2 loop rate.

In the opponent lottery processing using the opponent lottery table (LV.2), first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator=32768 in the present embodiment) is set. The lottery value of the opponent specified in the opponent lottery table (LV.2) is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction becomes negative (whether or not a so-called "carry" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (a "carriage" occurs), the opponent at that time is won.

[Opportunity Mode Lottery Table (LV.4)]
Next, the opponent mode lottery table (LV.4) will be described. The opponent mode lottery table (LV.4) is used when the opponent mode lottery is performed in the sub game state transition processing described later.
FIG. 116 is a diagram showing the configuration of the opponent mode lottery table (LV.4).

The opponent mode lottery table (LV.4) defines the correspondence relationship between the opponent mode and the lottery value set for each type and setting value of the previous opponent mode.

In the opponent mode lottery process using the opponent mode lottery table (LV.4), first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator=32768 in the present embodiment). Is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value of the opponent mode specified in the opponent mode lottery table (LV.4). Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction becomes negative (whether or not a so-called "carry" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (a "carriage" occurs), the opponent mode at that time is won.

[Random Table for Opponent Mode When Changing Settings (LV.4)]
Next, the opponent mode random determination table (LV.4) at the time of setting change will be described. The setting change opponent mode lottery table (LV.4) is used when the setting change opponent mode lottery is performed in the setting change process described later.
FIG. 117 is a diagram showing the configuration of the opponent mode random determination table (LV.4) at the time of changing the setting.

The opponent mode lottery table (LV.4) at the time of setting change defines the correspondence relationship between the opponent mode set for each set value and the lottery value.

In the setting mode opponent mode random determination process using the setting mode opponent mode random determination table (LV.4), first, a predetermined range of numerical values (0 to 32767, random number denominator=32768 in the present embodiment). The random number value extracted from is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value of the opponent mode defined in the opponent mode lottery table (LV.4) at the time of changing the setting. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction becomes negative (whether or not a so-called "carry" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (a "carriage" occurs), the opponent mode at that time is won.

[PTR special lottery table to be added when winning]
Next, an explanation will be given of the specialization type lottery table added at the time of PTR winning. The PTR winning additional specialization type lottery table is used when performing the PTR winning additional specialization type lottery in the specialization preparation process described later.
FIG. 118 is a diagram showing the structure of the specialization type random determination table when the PTR is won.

The PTR winning additional specialization type lottery table defines the correspondence relationship between the additional specialization type set for each type and set value of the PTR winning opportunity and the lottery value.

In the PTR lottery specialization type lottery process using the PTR lottery specialization type lottery table, first, in the PTR lottery specialization type lottery process, it is first extracted from a predetermined range of numerical values (0 to 32767, random number denominator=32768 in this embodiment). The random number value is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value of the additional specialization type specified in the additional specialization type lottery table at the time of PTR winning. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction becomes negative (whether or not a so-called "carry" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (a "carry" occurs), it means that the additional specialization type at that time is won.

[Premium additional lottery table]
Next, the premium addition lottery table in PREMIUM will be described. The PREMIUM add-on lottery table is used when performing the PREMIUM add-on lottery in the PREMIUM mid-process described below.
FIG. 119 is a diagram showing a configuration of a premium addition lottery table during PREMIUM.

The PREMIUM mid-winning lottery table defines a correspondence relationship between the winning or non-winning winning (non-winning) for adding the number of games, which is set for each type and setting value of the internal winning combination.

In the PREMIUM mid-approximation random determination process using the PREMIUM mid-approximation lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator=32768 in the present embodiment) is added to PREMIUM. The lottery value is sequentially subtracted by a lottery value of winning or non-winning (missing) in addition to the number of games defined in the lottery table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction becomes negative (whether or not a so-called "carry" has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“carrying” occurs), it means that the winning or non-winning (missing) of adding the number of games at that time is won.

[Random number table for the number of additional games in PREMIUM]
Next, the lottery table for the number of additional premium games will be described. The PREMIUM mid-game addition lottery table is used when performing the PREMIUM mid-game lottery in the PREMIUM mid-process described below.

FIG. 120 is a view showing the configuration of the premium addition game number lottery table (part 1). FIG. 121 is a diagram showing the configuration of the premium addition game number lottery table (part 2).

The PREMIUM mid-game addition lottery table defines the correspondence relationship between the number of extra games and the lottery value set for each type and setting value of the internal winning combination.

In the PREMIUM mid-game addition lottery processing using the PREMIUM mid-game lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator=32768 in the present embodiment) is set. , PREMIUM During the lottery game number lottery table, the lottery value of the number of extra games specified is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction becomes negative (whether or not a so-called "carry" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (a "carrying" occurs), it means that the number of additional games at that time is won.

[Additional number of games during the PREMIUM combo lottery table]
Next, a lottery table for the number of games to be added during the PREMIUM combo will be described. The PREMIUM mid-combo add-on game lottery table is used when performing the PREMIUM mid-combo add-on game lottery in the PREMIUM mid-process.
FIG. 122 is a view showing the configuration of the additional game number lottery table during the PREMIUM combo.

The premium game number lottery table during the PREMIUM combo defines the correspondence relationship between the number of additional games and the lottery value set for each reel effect type and set value.

In the PREMIUM medium combo additional game number lottery process using the PREMIUM medium combo lottery table, first, in a lottery process for the PREMIUM medium combo additional game lottery process, a value is extracted from a predetermined range of numerical values (0 to 32767, random number denominator=32768 in this embodiment). The random number value is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value of the number of additional games defined in the additional game number random determination table during the combo during PREMIUM. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction becomes negative (whether or not a so-called "carry" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (a "carrying" occurs), it means that the number of additional games at that time is won.

[FIGHTING Medium Loop Rate Lottery Table]
Next, the FIGHTING medium loop rate lottery table will be described. The FIGHTING middle loop rate lottery table is used when performing the FIGHTTING middle loop rate lottery in the sub game state transition processing described later.
FIG. 123 is a diagram showing the configuration of the FIGHTING medium loop rate random determination table.

The FIGHTING medium loop rate lottery table defines the correspondence between the type of FIGHT loop rate set for each set value and the lottery value.

In the FIGHTING medium loop rate lottery process using the FIGHTING medium loop rate lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator=32768 in the present embodiment) is set to FIGHTING. The lottery value for each type of FIGHT loop rate defined in the medium loop rate lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction becomes negative (whether or not a so-called "carry" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative ("carrying" occurs), it means that the type of FIGHT loop rate at that time has been won.

[FIGHTING Medium Continuous Lottery Table]
Next, the FIGHTING continuous continuation lottery table will be described. The FIGHTING continuous continuation lottery table is used when performing FIGHTING continuous continuation lottery in the FIGHING during mid process.
FIG. 124 is a diagram showing the structure of the FIGHTING continuous continuation lottery table.

The FIGHTING continuous continuation lottery table defines the correspondence relationship between the winning type of winning continuation of FIGHTING (winning/non-winning) and the lottery value set for each type and setting value of the FIGHT loop rate.

In the FIGHTING continuous continuation lottery processing using the FIGHTING continuous continuation random determination table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined range of numerical values (0 to 32767, random number denominator=32768 in the present embodiment) is continued during FIGHTING continuous. The lottery value of the continuous winning type (winning/non-winning) defined in the lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction becomes negative (whether or not a so-called "carry" has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (a "carry" occurs), the winning type (winning/non-winning) of the continuation at that time is won.

[FIGHTING Add-on lottery table]
Next, an explanation will be given of the FIGHTING medium additional lottery table. The FIGHTING mid-append lottery table is used when performing FIGHTING mid-append lottery in later-described FIGHTING intermediate processing.

FIG. 125 is a diagram showing the structure of the FIGHTING medium additional lottery table (RT0). This FIGHTING medium additional lottery table (RT0) is referred to when it is in the RT0 gaming state.
FIG. 126 is a diagram showing the configuration of the FIGHTING medium additional lottery table (RT1). This FIGHTING medium additional lottery table (RT1) is referred to when it is in the RT1 gaming state.
FIG. 127 is a diagram showing the configuration of the FIGHTING medium additional lottery table (RT2). This FIGHTING medium additional lottery table (RT2) is referred to when it is in the RT2 gaming state.
FIG. 128 is a diagram showing the configuration of the FIGHTING medium additional lottery table (RT3). This FIGHTING medium additional lottery table (RT3) is referred to when it is in the RT3 gaming state.
FIG. 129 is a diagram showing the configuration of the FIGHTING medium additional lottery table (RT4). This FIGHTING medium additional lottery table (RT4) is referred to when in the RT4 gaming state.

"FIGHTING" in R_ART is basically executed during the RT3 gaming state. However, if the pressing order of the stop button related to the predetermined internal winning combination is incorrect, the RT gaming state may shift from the RT3 gaming state to another RT gaming state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a FIGHINGING add-on lottery table for all RT game states (RT0 to RT4) is provided.

The FIGHTING mid-winning lottery table defines a correspondence relationship between the winning or non-winning winning (non-winning) with the number of games increased, which is set for each type and setting value of the internal winning combination.

In the FIGHTING on-board lottery processing using the FIGHTING on-board lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined range of numerical values (0 to 32767, random number denominator=32768 in the present embodiment) is added on to FIGHTING. The lottery values of the winning types (winning/non-winning) in addition to the number of games defined in the lottery table are sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction becomes negative (whether or not a so-called "carry" has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“carrying” occurs), it means that the winning type (winning/non-winning) for adding the number of games at that time has been won.

[FIGHTING lottery table for additional games]
Next, a FIGHTING mid-game addition lottery table will be described. The FIGHTING-additional game number lottery table is used when performing the FIGHTING-additional game number lottery in the below-described FIGHTING-during process.

FIG. 130 is a view showing the configuration of the FIGHTING additional game lottery table (No. 1). FIG. 131 is a diagram showing the configuration of the FIGHTING additional game lottery table (part 2). FIG. 132 is a diagram showing the configuration of the FIGHTING additional game lottery table (part 3).

The FIGHTING additional game number lottery table defines the correspondence relationship between the additional game number and the lottery value set for each type and set value of the internal winning combination.

In the FIGHTING mid-game addition lottery process using the FIGHTING mid-game addition lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator=32768 in the present embodiment) is set. , FIGHTING In the lottery number of additional games during drawing, the lottery values of the additional games are sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction becomes negative (whether or not a so-called "carry" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (a "carrying" occurs), it means that the number of additional games at that time is won.

[BURNING medium addition lottery table]
Next, the BURNING medium additional lottery table will be described. The BURNING add-on lottery table is used when the BURNING add-on lottery is performed in the BURNING add-on process described later.
FIG. 133 is a diagram showing the configuration of the BURNING medium-up lottery table.

The BURNING mid-winning lottery table defines a correspondence relationship between the winning type (winning/non-winning) for adding the number of games, which is set for each type and setting value of the internal winning combination, and the lottery value.

In the BURNING medium addition lottery process using the BURNING medium addition lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator=32768 in the present embodiment) is added to BURNING medium. The lottery values of the winning types (winning/non-winning) in addition to the number of games defined in the lottery table are sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction becomes negative (whether or not a so-called "carry" has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“carrying” occurs), it means that the winning type (winning/non-winning) for adding the number of games at that time has been won.

[BURNING lottery table for additional games]
Next, the BURNING mid-game addition lottery table will be described. The BURNING mid-game addition lottery table is used when performing the BURNING mid-game extra lottery in the BURNING mid-process described below.

FIG. 134 is a diagram showing the configuration of the BURNING mid-game addition lottery table (No. 1). FIG. 135 is a diagram showing the configuration of the BURNING mid-game addition lottery table (part 2). FIG. 136 is a view showing the configuration of the BURNING mid-game addition lottery table (part 3).

The BURNING mid-game addition lottery table defines the correspondence relationship between the number of extra games and the lottery value set for each type and setting value of the internal winning combination.

In the BURNING mid-game addition lottery process using the BURNING mid-game lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator=32768 in the present embodiment) is set. , BURNING Medium lottery lottery number is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value of the number of extra games prescribed in the table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction becomes negative (whether or not a so-called "carry" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (a "carrying" occurs), it means that the number of additional games at that time is won.

[B_RUSH mode transfer lottery table]
Next, the B_RUSH mode transfer lottery table will be described. The B_RUSH mode transition lottery table is used when performing the B_RUSH mode transition lottery in the sub game state transition time processing described later.
FIG. 137 is a diagram showing the configuration of the B_RUSH mode transfer lottery table.

The B_RUSH mode transfer lottery table defines the correspondence relationship between the BR mode type set for each transfer source type and the set value and the lottery value.

In the B_RUSH mode transfer lottery process using the B_RUSH mode transfer lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator=32768 in the present embodiment) is transferred to the B_RUSH mode transfer. The lottery values of the mode types defined in the lottery table are sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction becomes negative (whether or not a so-called "carry" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“carrying” occurs), the BR mode type at that time is won.

[B_RUSH precursor game number lottery table]
Next, the B_RUSH precursor game number lottery table will be described. The B_RUSH predictive game number random determination table is used when performing the B_RUSH predictive game number random determination in the sub game state transition processing described later.

FIG. 138 is a diagram showing the configuration of the B_RUSH precursor game number lottery table (No. 1). FIG. 139 is a diagram showing the configuration of the B_RUSH precursor game number lottery table (No. 2).

The B_RUSH predictive game number random determination table defines the correspondence relationship between the predictive game number and the random determination value set for each of the remaining number of games and the set value of the PTR.

In the B_RUSH precursor game number random determination process using the B_RUSH precursor game number random determination table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator=32768 in the present embodiment) is set to B_RUSH. The lottery values of the number of aura games specified in the aura number lottery table are sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction becomes negative (whether or not a so-called "carry" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (a "carriage" occurs), the number of precursor games at that time is won.

[B_RUSH Medium PTR additional lottery table]
Next, the B_RUSH medium PTR additional lottery table will be described. The B_RUSH medium PTR additional lottery table is used when the B_RUSH medium PTR additional lottery is performed in the B_RUSH medium process described later.
FIG. 140 is a diagram showing a configuration of the PTR additional lottery table during B_RUSH.

The B_RUSH medium PTR additional lottery table defines a correspondence relationship between the PTR additional winning type (winning/non-winning) set for each type and setting value of the internal winning combination and the lottery value.

In the B_RUSH medium PTR additional lottery processing using the B_RUSH medium PTR additional lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator=32768 in the present embodiment) is set to B_RUSH. The lottery value of the winning type (winning/non-winning) of PTR addition defined in the medium PTR addition lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction becomes negative (whether or not a so-called "carry" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“carrying” occurs), it means that the winning type (winning/non-winning) of the PTR addition at that time is won.

[B_RUSH lottery table for additional games]
Next, the B_RUSH mid-game addition lottery table will be described. The B_RUSH mid-game addition lottery table is used when the B_RUSH mid-game addition lottery is performed in the B_RUSH mid-process described below.

FIG. 141 is a diagram showing the configuration of the B_RUSH mid-game addition lottery table (1G) (No. 1). FIG. 142 is a diagram showing the configuration of the B_RUSH additional game lottery table (1G) (No. 2). FIG. 143 is a diagram showing the configuration of the B_RUSH mid-game addition lottery table (1G) (part 3). These B_RUSH mid-game addition lottery tables (1G) are referred to as 1G (game) of B_RUSH.

As described above, in “B_RUSH” of the present embodiment, three games are set as one set, and the number of additional games determined by lottery is notified in each game. Therefore, a B_RUSH additional game number lottery table corresponding to each of the 1G (game), 2G (game), and 3G (game) of “B_RUSH” is provided. However, since each B_RUSH mid-game addition lottery table has the same configuration, here, the B_RUSH mid-game extra lottery table (see FIGS. 141 to 143) for the 1G is extracted, and the 2G, 3G The illustration and description of the B_RUSH mid-game addition lottery table for use are omitted.

The B_RUSH mid-game addition lottery table (1G) defines the correspondence relationship between the number of extra games and the lottery value set for each type and setting value of the internal winning combination.

In the B_RUSH mid-game addition lottery process (1G) using the B_RUSH mid-game addition lottery table, first, a value is extracted from a predetermined range of numerical values (0 to 32767, random number denominator=32768 in the present embodiment). The random number value is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value of the additional game number defined in the B_RUSH additional game number random determination table (1G). Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction becomes negative (whether or not a so-called "carry" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (a "carrying" occurs), it means that the number of additional games at that time is won.

The configuration of the B_RUSH mid-game addition lottery table (2G) referred to in the 2G (game) of B_RUSH and the B_RUSH midgame extra lottery table (3G) referred to in the 3G (game) of B_RUSH Has a configuration similar to that of the B_RUSH mid-game addition lottery table (1G), except for the setting mode of the lottery value, and therefore the description and the drawing of this table configuration are omitted.

[B_RUSH loop rate lottery table]
Next, the B_RUSH loop rate lottery table will be described. The B_RUSH loop rate lottery table is used when performing the B_RUSH loop rate lottery in the sub game state transition processing described later.

FIG. 144 is a diagram showing the configuration of the B_RUSH loop rate lottery table (No. 1). FIG. 145 is a diagram showing the configuration of the B_RUSH loop rate lottery table (No. 2).

The B_RUSH loop rate lottery table defines a correspondence relationship between the type of BR loop rate set for each type and set value of the internal winning combination and the lottery value.

In the B_RUSH loop rate random determination process using the B_RUSH loop rate random determination table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator=32768 in the present embodiment) is set to the B_RUSH loop rate. The lottery values of the BR loop rate types defined in the lottery table are sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction becomes negative (whether or not a so-called "carry" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“carrying” occurs), the type of the BR loop rate at that time has been won.

[B_RUSH continuous lottery table]
Next, the B_RUSH continuous lottery table will be described. The B_RUSH continuous lottery table is used when performing the B_RUSH continuous lottery in the B_RUSH mid-process described below.
FIG. 146 is a diagram showing a configuration of the B_RUSH continuous lottery table.

The B_RUSH continuous lottery table defines a correspondence relationship between the winning type (winning/non-winning) of B_RUSH continuation set for each type and setting value of the BR loop rate and the lottery value.

In the B_RUSH continuous lottery process using the B_RUSH continuous lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined range of numerical values (0 to 32767, random number denominator=32768 in the present embodiment) is stored in the B_RUSH continuous lottery table. The specified lottery value of the winning type (winning/non-winning) of B_RUSH continuation is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction becomes negative (whether or not a so-called "carry" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (a "carry" occurs), it means that the winning type (winning/non-winning) of continuation of B_RUSH at that time is won.

[RTG transfer lottery table]
Next, the RTG transfer lottery table will be described. The RTG transfer lottery table is used when performing the RTG transfer lottery in the ART end waiting process described later.
FIG. 147 is a diagram showing a configuration of the RTG transfer lottery table.

The RTG transfer lottery table defines the correspondence relation between the RTG winning type (winning/non-winning) set for each BB count and setting value and the lottery value.

In the RTG transfer lottery table, the "BB count" means that when the sub game state shifts from "normal state" to "CZ" or "MICHI" to "R_ART", the "R_ART" ends. It is the number of times of “BB” executed. Therefore, if "BB" is not won in "R_ART", the "BB count" is once.

In the RTG transfer lottery process using the RTG transfer lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined range of numerical values (0 to 32767, random number denominator=32768 in the present embodiment) is stored in the RTG transfer lottery table. The lottery value of the specified winning type (winning/non-winning) of the RTG is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction becomes negative (whether or not a so-called "carry" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“carrying” occurs), it means that the winning type (winning/non-winning) of the RTG at that time has been won.

[RTR PTR stock loop rate lottery table]
Next, the PTR stock loop rate lottery table during RTG will be described. The PTR stock loop rate random determination table during RTG is used when the PTR stock loop rate random determination is performed in the RTG mid-process described below.

FIG. 148 is a diagram showing the configuration of the PTR stock loop rate lottery table during RTG (part 1). FIG. 149 is a diagram showing the configuration of the PTR stock loop rate random determination table (part 2) during RTG.

The PTR stock loop rate lottery table during RTG defines the correspondence between the type of PTR loop rate set for each type and set value of the internal winning combination and the lottery value.

In the PTR stock loop rate random determination processing using the PTR stock loop rate random determination table during RTG, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator=32768 in this embodiment) is set. , RTG mid-PTR stock loop rate lottery table is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value for each type of PTR loop rate. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction becomes negative (whether or not a so-called "carry" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (“carrying” occurs), it means that the type of the PTR loop rate at that time has been won.

[Pot lottery table during RTG]
Next, the PTR stock lottery table during RTG will be described. The in-RTG PTR stock lottery table is used when performing the in-RTG PTR stock lottery in the RTG in-process described later.
FIG. 150 is a diagram showing the structure of the PTR stock lottery table during RTG.

The PTR stock lottery table during RTG defines a correspondence relationship between the winning type (winning/non-winning) of the PTR stock, which is set for each type and setting value of the PTR loop rate.

In the RTG PTR stock lottery process using the RTG PTR stock lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator=32768 in the present embodiment) is set to the RTG. The lottery value of the winning type (winning/non-winning) of the PTR stock defined in the medium PTR stock lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction becomes negative (whether or not a so-called "carry" has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“carrying” occurs), the winning type (winning/non-winning) of the PTR stock at that time is won.

[BB specific Lip Navi conversion lottery table]
Next, the BB-specific Lip Navi conversion lottery table will be described. The BB-specific Lipnavi conversion lottery table is used when performing the BB-specific Lipnavi conversion lottery in the CZ processing and the ART BB processing described later.
Hereinafter, “navi” means navigating the establishment of a specific small winning combination by a lamp, the liquid crystal display device 11, or the like.

FIG. 151 is a diagram showing the configuration of the BB-specific Lip Navi conversion lottery table (normal BB). The BB specific LipNavi conversion lottery table (normal BB) is referred to during the CZ (during BB) that has transitioned from the normal state.
FIG. 152 is a diagram showing the structure of the BB-specific Lip Navi conversion lottery table (ARTBB). This BB specific LipNavi conversion lottery table (ARTBB) is referred to in the BB that is won during R_ART.

The BB specific Lip Navi conversion lottery table defines the correspondence relationship between the winning type (Yes/No) of the specific Lip Navi conversion set for each SP point and the set value, and the lottery value.

In the BB-specific Lipnavi conversion lottery process using the BB-specific Lipnavi conversion lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator=32768 in the present embodiment) is set. , BB in the specific Lipnavi conversion lottery table is sequentially subtracted by the lottery value of the winning type (with/without) of the specific Lipnavi conversion. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction becomes negative (whether or not a so-called "carry" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (a "carry" occurs), the winning type (yes/no) of the specific Lipnavi conversion at that time is won.

[BB Medium Fake Specific Lip Navi Conversion Lottery Table]
Next, the BB fake specific lip navigation conversion lottery table will be described. The BB fake specific Lipnavi conversion lottery table is used when performing the BB fake specific Lipnavi conversion lottery in the CZ processing and the ART BB processing described later.
FIG. 153 is a diagram showing the configuration of the fake in-BB specific Lip Navi conversion lottery table.

The fake specific Lipnavi conversion lottery table in BB defines a correspondence relationship between the winning type (yes/no) of the fake specific Lipnavi conversion set for each set value and the lottery value.

In the BB fake specific Lipnavi conversion lottery process using the BB fake specific Lipnavi conversion lottery table, first, a random number extracted from a predetermined range of numerical values (0 to 32767, random number denominator=32768 in the present embodiment). Numerical values are sequentially subtracted by the lottery value of the winning type (with/without) of the fake specific Lipnavi conversion specified in the BB specific Lipnavi conversion lottery table. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction becomes negative (whether or not a so-called "carry" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (a "carrying" occurs), it means that the winning type (yes/no) of the fake specific Lipnavi conversion at that time is won.

[Specific Lip Navi conversion lottery table in ART]
Next, the ART specific LipNavi conversion lottery table will be described. The ART specific Lipnavi conversion lottery table is used when performing the ART specific Lipnavi conversion lottery in the LV.1 medium processing, the LV.3 medium processing and the LV.5 medium processing described later.

FIG. 154 is a diagram showing the configuration of the ART specific LipNavi conversion lottery table (LV.1). It is referred to when it is “LV.1” in the specific LipNavi conversion lottery table (LV.1) R_ART in this ART.
FIG. 155 is a diagram showing the configuration of the ART specific LipNavi conversion lottery table (LV.3). It is referred to when it is "LV.3" in the RipArt conversion lottery table (LV.3) R_ART in this ART.
FIG. 156 is a diagram showing the configuration of the ART specific LipNavi conversion lottery table (LV.5). It is referred to when it is “LV.5” in the specific Lip Navi conversion lottery table (LV.5) R_ART in this ART.

The specific Lip Navi conversion lottery table (LV.1, 3, 5) in ART shows the correspondence relationship between the lottery type (Yes/No) of the specific Lip Navi conversion set for each SP point and the set value. Stipulate.

FIG. 157 is a diagram showing the configuration of the ART specific LipNavi conversion lottery table (LV.2). It is referred to when it is “LV.2” in the RipArt conversion lottery table (LV.2) R_ART during this ART.
FIG. 158 is a diagram showing the configuration of the ART specific LipNavi conversion lottery table (LV.4). It is referred to when it is "LV.4" in the RipArt conversion lottery table (LV.4) R_ART in this ART.

The specific Lip Navi conversion lottery table (LV.1, 3, 5) in ART shows the correspondence between the lottery type (Yes/No) of the specific Lip Navi conversion set for each game number and the set value. Stipulate.

In the ART specific Lipnavi conversion lottery process using the ART specific Lipnavi conversion lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator=32768 in the present embodiment) is set. , Rartition values of the winning type (with/without) of the specific Lipnavi conversion specified in the ART specific Lipnavi conversion lottery table are sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction becomes negative (whether or not a so-called "carry" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (a "carry" occurs), the winning type (yes/no) of the specific Lipnavi conversion at that time is won.

[Fake specific LipNavi conversion lottery table during ART]
Next, the fake specific lip navigation conversion lottery table during ART will be described. The ART-specific fake specific Lipnavi conversion lottery table is used when performing the ART-specific fake specific Lipnavi conversion lottery in the later-described CZ processing and ART-BB processing.
FIG. 159 is a diagram showing the configuration of the fake specific Lipnavi conversion lottery table during ART.

The fake specific Lipnavi conversion lottery table during ART defines a correspondence relationship between the winning type (with/without) of the specific Lipnavi conversion set for each set value and the lottery value.

In the ART fake specific Lipnavi conversion lottery process using the ART fake specific Lipnavi conversion lottery table, first, a random number extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator=32768 in the present embodiment). Numerical values are sequentially subtracted by the lottery value of the winning type (with/without) of the fake specific Lipnavi conversion specified in the fake specific Lipnavi conversion lottery table during ART. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction becomes negative (whether or not a so-called "carry" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (a "carry" occurs), the winning type (yes/no) of the specific Lipnavi conversion at that time is won.

[Navi type lottery table]
Next, the navigation type lottery table will be described. The navigation type lottery table is used when performing the navigation type lottery in the main process by the sub-control circuit described later.

FIG. 160 is a diagram showing the configuration of the navigation type random determination table (No. 1). FIG. 161 is a diagram showing the configuration of the navigation-type random determination table (No. 2). FIG. 162 is a diagram showing the configuration of the navigation-type random determination table (No. 3). FIG. 163 is a diagram showing the configuration of the navigation-type random determination table (No. 4). FIG. 164 is a diagram showing the configuration of the navigation-type random determination table (No. 5).

The navigation type lottery table defines the correspondence between the navigation type and the lottery value set for each lottery condition.

In the navigation type lottery process using the navigation type lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range (0 to 32767, random number denominator=32768 in the present embodiment) is set to the fake specific lip navigation during ART. The lottery value for each navigation type defined in the conversion lottery table is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of the subtraction becomes negative (whether or not a so-called "carry" has occurred). Then, when the subtraction result becomes negative (a "carry" occurs), the navigation type at that time is won.

<Description of operation of main control circuit>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 165 to 187, the contents of various processes executed by the main control unit 40 using a program will be described.

[Main operation process of pachi-slot by control of main controller]
First, the procedure of the main operation processing (processing after power-on) of the pachi-slot 1 performed by the control of the main control unit 40 will be described with reference to the main flowchart (hereinafter, referred to as main flow) shown in FIG.

First, when the power of the pachi-slot 1 is turned on, the main controller 40 performs an initialization process when the power is turned on (S1). In this initialization processing, it is determined whether the backup has been performed normally, the setting has been changed appropriately, etc., and the initialization corresponding to the determination result is performed. Further, when it is determined that the setting change has been appropriately performed, the main control unit 40 transmits a setting change command to the sub control circuit 42. It should be noted that the start command includes parameters that specify settings (settings 1 to 6) and the like.

Next, the main control unit 40 performs an initialization process at the end of one game (S2). In this initialization processing, the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 53 is cleared. The designated storage area here is, for example, a storage area such as an internal winning combination storage area or a display combination storage area in which data needs to be erased for each unit game (game).

Next, the main control unit 40 performs medal acceptance/start check processing (S3). In this process, the input of the medal sensor 35S and the start switch 16S is checked. The details of the medal acceptance/start check processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 166 described later.

Next, the main control unit 40 performs a random number acquisition process (S4). In this process, the main control unit 40 extracts a random number value (0 to 65535) for the internal winning combination lottery, and stores the extracted random number value in a random number value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 53. ..

Next, the main control unit 40 performs the effect random number acquisition process (S5). In this process, the main control unit 40 extracts the effect random number (0 to 65535) used in the game lock lottery, and stores the extracted random value in a random value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 53. To do. In the present embodiment, it is possible to extract a plurality of types of rendering random numbers.

Then, when the extracted various random number values are stored in the random number storage area, the main control unit 40 performs an internal lottery process (S6). In this process, the internal winning combination is determined by lottery based on the random number value for the internal winning combination lottery extracted in S4. The details of the internal lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 167 described later.

Next, the main control unit 40 performs a game lock lottery process (S7). In this process, the type of "game lock" is determined by lottery based on the random number value for effect extracted in S5. The details of the game lock lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 169 described later.

Next, the main controller 40 performs reel stop initialization processing (S8). The details of the reel stop initialization process will be described later with reference to FIG. 170 described later.

Next, the main control unit 40 performs a start command transmission process (S9). Specifically, the main control unit 40 transmits a start command to the sub control circuit 42. The start command includes a parameter for identifying an internal winning combination and the like.

Next, the main control unit 40 performs a game start lock process (S10). In this process, a lock (reel effect) and a lock timer corresponding to the type (lock number, continuous lock number) of the "game lock" determined in the process of S7 are mainly set. Then, the main control unit 40 waits until the lock timer becomes zero.

Next, the main controller 40 performs a weight process (S11). In this process, the main control unit 40 consumes the waiting time until the predetermined time elapses, if the predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has not elapsed from the start of the previous game.

Next, the main control unit 40 performs reel rotation start processing (S12). In this process, the main controller 40 requests the start of rotation of all reels. Then, when the rotation start of all the reels is requested, the three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R are driven by an interrupt process (see FIG. 187, which will be described later) described later that is executed at a constant cycle (1.1172 msec). Is controlled, and rotation of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R is started. At this time, each reel is subjected to acceleration control until the rotation speed thereof reaches a constant speed, and then controlled so that the constant speed is maintained.

Next, the main control unit 40 performs a pull-in priority storage process (S13). In this process, the main control unit 40 acquires the attraction priority data and stores it in the attraction priority data storage area. The details of the pull-in priority storage process will be described later with reference to FIG. 172 described later.

Next, the main controller 40 performs reel stop control processing (S14). In this process, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped based on the timing of pressing the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R and the internal winning combination. The details of the reel stop control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 175 described later.

Next, the main control unit 40 performs a winning search process (S15). In this process, the main control unit 40 stores the data of the symbol code storage area (after the symbol code storage area 2 in FIG. 47) in the display combination storing area (see FIG. 43). Further, in this process, after the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R are all stopped, a combination of symbols displayed on the activated line (winning determination line) and a symbol combination table (see FIGS. 8 to 11). To match. Then, the main control unit 40 determines whether or not the display combination is displayed on the activated line, and stores the determination result in the display combination storage area.

Next, the main control unit 40 performs medal payout processing (S16). In this process, the hopper 33 is driven and the credit number is updated based on the payout number of the display combination determined in S15, and the medals are paid out. At this time, in the present embodiment, as shown in the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 8 to 11), the number of inserted medals is three, and the number of medals paid out differs depending on the display combination, but the maximum payout The number of sheets (upper limit) is nine.

Next, the main control unit 40 performs RT control processing (S17). In this process, the main control unit 40 manages the RT game state. The details of the RT control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 184 described later.

Next, the main control unit 40 performs a payout end command transmission process (S18). Specifically, the main control unit 40 transmits a payout end command to the sub control circuit 42.

Next, the main control part 40 performs a bonus end check process (S19). In this processing, the main control unit 40 refers to various counters for managing the timing of ending the bonus game and checks whether or not the operation of the bonus game is ended. The details of the bonus end check processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 185 described later.

Next, the main control part 40 performs a bonus operation check process (S20). In this process, the main control unit 40 checks whether or not to start the operation of the bonus game and whether or not to perform the replay game. The details of the bonus operation check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 186 described later. When the bonus operation check process ends, the main control unit 40 returns the process to S2, and repeats the process of S2 and thereafter.

Note that, as described above, the start command transmission process (S9) of the main flow of this embodiment is executed by the main control circuit 41. Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to the start command, a predetermined command (for example, a reel stop command, a display command, a payout end command, a bonus start command, a bonus end command, etc., which will be described later) is subordinated at various triggers of the game operation The command data transmitted to the control circuit 42 is also transmitted by the main control circuit 41.

Further, as described above, in the processing of the main flow of the present embodiment, game lock control processing is performed (S10), and this processing is executed by the main control circuit 41. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 also serves as a unit (lock control unit) that controls the lock function.

[Medal reception/start check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 166, the medal acceptance/start check processing performed in S3 in the main flow (see FIG. 165) will be described.

First, the main controller 40 determines whether or not there is an automatic closing request (S31). The presence or absence of this automatic loading request is determined by determining whether or not the automatic loading counter is "0". That is, the main control unit 40 determines that there is no automatic closing request when the automatic closing counter is “0”, and determines that there is an automatic closing request when the automatic closing counter is “1” or more. ..

The automatic insertion counter is data for identifying whether or not the display combination relating to the replay (replay) has been established in the previous unit game. When the display combination relating to the re-play is established, the number of medals inserted in the previous unit game is automatically inserted into the automatic insertion counter.

In S31, when the main control unit 40 determines that there is an automatic closing request (YES in S31), the main control unit 40 performs the automatic closing process (S32). In this process, the value of the automatic insertion counter is copied to the insertion number counter, and then the value of the automatic insertion counter is cleared. After that, the main control unit 40 performs the process of S39 described below.

On the other hand, in S31, when the main control unit 40 determines that there is no automatic insertion request (NO in S31), the main control unit 40 permits medal acceptance (S33). In this process, the solenoid of the selector 35 (see FIG. 4) is driven and the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 14 are accepted. The received medals are counted and then guided to the hopper 33.

Next, the main controller 40 sets the maximum value of the inserted number according to the game state (S34). Specifically, the main control unit 40 sets the maximum value of the number of inserted sheets to “3”.

Next, the main controller 40 determines whether or not the medal acceptance is permitted (S35). In S35, when the main control unit 40 determines that the medal acceptance is not permitted (NO in S35), the main control unit 40 performs the process of S39 described below.

On the other hand, when the main control unit 40 determines in S35 that the medal acceptance is permitted (when S35 is YES), the main control unit 40 performs the medal insertion check process (S36). In this processing, the main control unit 40 determines whether or not a medal has been inserted, and when a medal has been inserted, adds "1" to the insertion number counter.

Next, the main control unit 40 performs a medal insertion command transmission process (S37). Specifically, the main control unit 40 transmits a medal insertion command to the sub control circuit 42. The medal insertion command includes parameters for specifying the number of inserted medals and the like.

Next, the main control unit 40 determines whether or not the inserted number is the game startable number (S38). In S38, when the main control unit 40 determines that the inserted number is not the game startable number (NO in S38), the main control unit 40 returns the process to S35, and repeats the processes from S35. On the other hand, in S38, when the main control unit 40 determines that the inserted number is the game startable number (YES in S38), the main control unit 40 performs the process of S39 described below. In the present embodiment, the number of games that can be started is "3" regardless of the game state (see FIG. 14).

After the process of S32, if the determination of S35 is NO or the determination of S38 is YES, the main control unit 40 determines whether or not the start switch is on (S39). In S39, when the main control unit 40 determines that the start switch is not on (when S39 is NO), the main control unit 40 returns the process to S35 and repeats the processes from S35.

On the other hand, in S39, when the main control unit 40 determines that the start switch is ON (YES in S39), the main control unit 40 performs the medal acceptance prohibition process (S40). By this processing, the solenoid of the selector 35 (see FIG. 4) is not driven, and the inserted medal is ejected from the medal payout opening 24. When this process ends, the main control unit 40 ends the medal acceptance/start check process, and moves the process to S4 of the main flow (see FIG. 165).

[Internal lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 167, the internal lottery process performed in S6 in the main flow (see FIG. 165) will be described.

First, the main control unit 40 sets the internal lottery table according to the gaming state (S51). That is, the main control unit 40 grasps the current game state by referring to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 44), and the type and lottery of the internal lottery table based on the internal lottery table determination table (see FIG. 14). Determine the number of times. Note that the lottery number indicates the number of times the lottery value is subtracted and whether or not a digit has occurred is determined for each winning number defined by the internal lottery table.

Next, the main control unit 40 performs lottery value change processing (S52). In this process, the lottery values of the winning numbers 1 to 35 are changed according to the game state. The details of the lottery value change processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 168 described later.

Next, the main control unit 40 acquires a random number value for internal lottery stored in the random value storage area (S53). Then, the main control unit 40 sets "1" as the initial value of the winning number.

Next, the main control unit 40 refers to the internal lottery table to obtain the lottery value corresponding to the winning number, and subtracts the lottery value from the random number for internal lottery (S54).

Next, the main control unit 40 determines whether or not the calculation result in S54 is less than "0" (negative value) (S55). When the main control unit 40 determines in S55 that the calculation result is less than "0" (YES in S55), the main control unit 40 performs the process of S59 described below.

On the other hand, in S55, when the main control unit 40 determines that the calculation result is not less than "0" (NO in S55), the main control unit 40 updates the random number value and the winning number (S56). Specifically, the value of the calculation result is set to a random value, and the winning number is incremented by "1".

Next, the main controller 40 determines whether or not all the winning numbers have been checked (S57). When it is determined in S57 that the main control unit 40 has not checked all the winning numbers (NO in S57), the main control unit 40 returns the process to S54 and repeats the processes from S54.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S57 that the main control unit 40 has checked all the winning numbers (YES in S57), the main control unit 40 sets "0" as the winning number (S58).

After the process of S58 or when the determination of S55 is YES, the main control unit 40 performs a winning number correction process (S59). In this process, the main control unit 40 sets the value of the winning number as a data pointer when the gaming state is the non-MB (non-CB) gaming state, and the gaming state is the MB (CB) gaming state Is set to a value obtained by adding "51" to the value of the winning number as a data pointer. The details of the winning number correction process will be described later with reference to FIG. 168 described later.

Next, the main control unit 40 refers to the internal winning combination determination table (see FIGS. 26 and 27) and acquires the internal winning combination based on the data pointer (S60).

Next, the main control unit 40 stores the acquired internal winning combination in the internal winning combination storing area (S61). Next, the main control unit 40 updates the carryover combination storing area based on the data of bits 4 to 7 (“C_MB1” to “C_MB4”) of the internal winning combination storing area 2 (S62).

Next, the main control unit 40 updates the internal winning combination storing area based on the internal winning combination stored in the internal carryover combination storing area (S63). Then, after the process of S63, the main control unit 40 ends the internal lottery process, and moves the process to S7 of the main flow (see FIG. 165).

As described above, the internal lottery process of this embodiment is executed by the main control circuit 41. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 also serves as a unit (internal winning combination determining unit) that executes a process for determining an internal winning combination.

[Lottery value change processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 168, the lottery value change processing performed in S52 in the flowchart of the internal lottery processing (see FIG. 167) will be described.

First, the main control unit 40 refers to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 44) and determines whether or not the RT0 game state flag is on (S71). Specifically, the main control unit 40 determines whether or not "1" is set in bit 0 in the game state flag storage area 2 (see FIG. 44). Then, in S71, when the main control unit 40 determines that the RT0 gaming state flag is ON (YES in S71), the main control unit 40 ends the lottery value change process, and the process is performed in the internal lottery. The process moves to S53 of the process (see FIG. 167).

On the other hand, in S71, when the main control unit 40 determines that the RT0 gaming state flag is not ON (when S71 is NO determination), the main control unit 40 is RT corresponding to the RT gaming state in the ON state. With reference to the internal lottery table for use, the lottery values of the winning numbers 1 to 35 of the internal lottery table for general game state (see FIG. 15) are changed (S72). After that, the main control unit 40 ends the lottery value change process, and moves the process to S53 of the internal lottery process (see FIG. 167).

[Game lock lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 169, the game lock lottery processing performed in S7 in the main flow (see FIG. 165) will be described.

First, the main controller 40 determines whether or not the RT gaming state is the RT4 gaming state (S81). In S81, when the main control unit 40 determines that the RT gaming state is not the RT4 gaming state (NO in S81), the main control unit 40 performs the process of S85.

On the other hand, when the main control unit 40 determines that the RT game state is the RT4 game state (YES in S81), the main control unit 40 determines whether the previous game is "red 7". Is determined (S82). That is, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination corresponding to the code name "RP19" (G_special lip 1) or the code name "RP20" (G_special lip 2) was displayed in the previous game.

In S82, when the main control unit 40 determines that the previous game is not the "red 7" game (NO in S82), the main control unit 40 performs the process of S85. On the other hand, in S82, when the main control unit 40 determines that the previous game is "red 7" (when YES is determined in S82), the main control unit 40, the RT4 gaming state combo occurrence lottery table ( Referring to FIG. 40), the combo generation lottery is performed based on the effect random number value (S83). In this combo generation lottery, whether or not to generate (success) the above-mentioned "combo" is determined. Specifically, when the lock number “11” or “12” is won in the combo occurrence lottery, it is determined that the “combo” is not generated, and when the lock number “13” or “14” is won, It is decided to generate (success) a “combo”. After the processing of S83, the main control unit 40 performs the processing of S90.

When S81 or S82 is NO determination, the main controller 40 refers to the game lock lottery table (see FIG. 39) and performs the game lock lottery based on the random number value for effect (S84). In this game lock lottery, one of the game lock numbers “0” to “7” is determined.

Next, the main controller 40 determines whether or not the result of the game lock lottery this time is the lock number "1", "2", "6" or "7" (S85). When the main control unit 40 determines in S85 that the lock number is "1", "2", "6", or "7" (when YES is determined in S85), the main control unit 40 performs the process of S90. I do.

On the other hand, when the main control unit 40 determines in S85 that the result of this game lock lottery is not the lock number "1", "2", "6" or "7" (when S85 is NO determination). The main control unit 40 determines whether or not the result of the game lock lottery this time is the lock number "3" or "4" (S86).

In S86, when the main control unit 40 determines that the result of the game lock lottery this time is the lock number “3” or “4” (in the case of YES determination in S86), the main control unit 40 determines the game lock counter. Is set to "1" (S87).

The game lock counter according to the present embodiment is a counter that manages the number of games until the game lock is executed. Therefore, when the lock number “3” or “4” is won, the game lock is executed after one game (next game). After the processing of S87, the main control unit 40 ends the game lock lottery processing, and moves the processing to S8 of the main flow (see FIG. 165).

In S86, when the main control unit 40 determines that the result of the game lock lottery this time is not the lock number “3” or “4” (when S86 is NO determination), the main control unit 40 displays the game lock counter. It is determined whether the value is larger than "0" (S88). In S88, when it is determined that the value of the game lock counter is not greater than "0" (NO in S88), the main control unit 40 ends the game lock lottery process, and the process is the main flow (see FIG. 165). ) Move to S8.

On the other hand, when determining in S88 that the value of the game lock counter is larger than "0" (YES in S88), the main control unit 40 subtracts "1" from the value of the game lock counter (S89).

Next, the main control unit 40 determines whether or not the value of the game lock counter is "0" (S90). In S90, when the main control unit 40 determines that the value of the game lock counter is not "0" (NO in S91), the main control unit 40 ends the game lock lottery process, and the process is the main flow. (See FIG. 165) the process proceeds to S8.

On the other hand, in S90, when the main control unit 40 determines that the value of the game lock counter is "0" (YES in S90), the main control is performed after the process in S83 or in S85. The unit 40 sets the value corresponding to the lock number in the lock timer (S91). After the processing of S91, the main control unit 40 ends the game lock lottery processing, and moves the processing to S8 of the main flow (see FIG. 165).

The lock number won by the game lock lottery in S84 is stored in the game lock flag storage area. Therefore, even if the result of the game lock lottery this time is “out”, if the lock number is stored in the game lock flag storage area, a value corresponding to the lock number is set in the lock timer.

[Reel stop initialization processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 170, the reel stop initialization process performed in S8 in the main flow (see FIG. 165) will be described.

First, the main control unit 40 refers to the spinning reel stop number selection table (see FIG. 28) and, based on the internal winning combination (data pointer) acquired in the internal lottery process of S6 in FIG. A stop number is acquired (S101).

Next, the main control unit 40 refers to the reel stop initial setting table (see FIG. 30) and acquires various information corresponding to the rotating cylinder stop number based on the acquired rotating cylinder stop number (S102). Specifically, the main control unit 40, the pull-in priority table selection table number, the pull-in priority table number, the forward-pressing table selection data, the forward-pressing table change data, which corresponds to the acquired turning cylinder stop number, The table change initial data at the time of forward pressing and the table selection data at the time of irregular pressing are acquired.

Next, the main control unit 40 stores the rotating identifier “0FFH (11111111B)” in the all symbol code storage area (see FIG. 47) (S103).

Next, the main control unit 40 stores "3" in the stop button non-operation counter provided in the main RAM 53 (S104). After that, the main control unit 40 ends the reel stop initialization process, and moves the process to S9 in the main flow (see FIG. 165). The stop button non-operation counter is a counter for managing the number of stop buttons whose stop operation has not been detected.

[Game start lock process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 171, a game start lock process performed in S10 in the main flow (see FIG. 165) will be described.

First, the main control unit 40 performs a game lock command transmission process (S111). Specifically, the main control unit 40 transmits a game lock command to the sub control circuit 42. The game lock command includes a lock number and the like. Next, the main controller 40 sets a reel effect pattern corresponding to the lock number (S112).

Next, the main control unit 40 determines whether or not the combo is successful (S113). The success of the combo means that the lock number “13” or “14” is won in the process of S183 of FIG. In S113, when the main control unit 40 determines that the combo is not successful (NO in S112), the main control unit 40 performs the process of S123.

On the other hand, in S113, when the main control unit 40 determines that the combo is successful (YES in S113), the main control unit 40 refers to the combo continuation rate lottery table (see FIG. 41) to produce the effect. Combo continuation rate lottery is performed based on the random number value (S114). In this combo continuation rate lottery, the PRE loop rate is determined.

Next, the main control unit 40 refers to the combo continuous lottery table (see FIG. 42) and performs combo continuous lottery based on the random number for effect (S115). In this combo continuation lottery, whether or not to continue the above-mentioned "combo" is determined. Specifically, when the lock number “0” is won in the combo continuation lottery, it is decided not to continue the “combo”, and when any of the lock numbers “13” to “15” is won, It is decided to continue the "combo".

Next, the main control unit 40 determines whether or not the reel effect has ended (S116). In S116, when the main control unit 40 determines that the reel effect has not ended (NO in S116), the main control unit 40 repeats the process of S116 and waits until the reel effect ends.

On the other hand, in S116, when the main control unit 40 determines that the reel effect has ended (YES in S116), the main control unit 40 performs the game lock command transmission process (S117). Next, the main controller 40 sets a reel effect pattern corresponding to the lock number determined in S115 (S118).

Next, the main controller 40 determines whether the start lever 16 has been operated (S119). When the main control unit 40 determines in S119 that the start lever 16 is not operated (NO in S119), the main control unit 40 repeats the process of S119 until the start lever 16 is operated. stand by.

On the other hand, when the main control unit 40 determines in S119 that the start lever 16 has been operated (YES in S119), the main control unit 40 determines whether or not the lottery result in S115 is combo continuation. Yes (S120). The continuation of the combo means that the lock number "13" to "15" is won in the process of S115. When the main control unit 40 determines in S120 that the combo is continued (YES in S120), the main control unit 40 returns the process to S115.

When the main control unit 40 determines in S120 that the combo is not continued (NO in S120), the main control unit 40 determines whether or not the reel effect is finished (S121). When the main control unit 40 determines in S121 that the reel effect has not ended (NO in S121), the main control unit 40 repeats the process of S121 and waits until the reel effect ends.

On the other hand, in S121, when the main control unit 40 determines that the reel effect has ended (YES in S121), the main control unit 40 sets the value of the lock timer to 0 (S122).

If the determination in S113 is NO, or after the processing in S122, the main control unit 40 determines whether the lock timer is 0 (S123). In S123, when the main control unit 40 determines that the lock timer is not 0 (NO in S123), the main control unit 40 repeats the process of S123 and waits until the lock timer becomes 0.

On the other hand, in S123, when the main control unit 40 determines that the lock timer is 0 (YES in S123), the main control unit 40 determines the lock number “5” in the stored game lock flags. ~ Clear all except "7" (S124). After that, the main control unit 40 ends the game start lock process, and moves the process to S11 of the main flow (see FIG. 165).

[Import priority storage processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 172, the pull-in priority storage processing performed in S13 in the main flow (see FIG. 165) will be described.

First, the main control unit 40 stores the stop button non-operation counter in the main RAM 53 as the number of searches (S131). Next, the main control unit 40 performs a search target reel determination process (S132). In this process, for example, the main control unit 40 selects a predetermined reel from the reels that are rotating and determines the selected reel as the search target reel.

For example, in the processing of S132, when all (three) reels are rotated, the left reel 3L is first determined as the search target reel. Thereafter, the left reel 3L is subjected to various processes up to S141, which will be described later, and when the process returns to S132 again, the middle reel 3C is next determined as the search target reel. Then, various processes up to S141, which will be described later, are performed on the middle reel 3C, and when the process returns to S132 again, next, the right reel 3R is determined as the search target reel.

Next, the main control unit 40 performs a pull-in priority table selection process (S133). In this process, the pull-in priority table is selected based on the internal winning combination (data pointer) and the operation stop button. The details of the pull-in priority table selection processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the main controller 40 sets "0" as the symbol position data and "20" as the number of symbol checks (S134). Then, the main control unit 40 performs a symbol code storage process (S135). In this processing, the symbol code corresponding to the current symbol position data, which is located on the effective line of the reel to be searched, is stored in the symbol code storage area. At this time, the symbol codes for the number of effective lines are stored. The details of the symbol code storage process will be described later with reference to FIG. 174 described later.

Next, the main control unit 40 updates the display combination storing area (see FIG. 43) based on the symbol code acquired in S135 and the data in the symbol code storing area (see FIG. 47) (S136). At this point, a combination of symbols that can be displayed (displayable winning combination) is stored in the display winning combination storage area on the basis of the stopped symbol regardless of whether or not the internal winning combination is won.

In this embodiment, the information in the symbol code storage area (the symbol code and the displayable hand corresponding thereto) is updated for each reel that is stopped. At this time, the displayable winning combination may be acquired from data that defines the correspondence relationship between the symbols of the reels stopped and the corresponding displayable winning combinations, or the symbols of the stopped reels. And the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 8 to 11) may be collated and acquired. When the former method is used, the correspondence relationship between the symbols and the displayable winning combinations changes for each reel.

Next, the main control unit 40 performs a pull-in priority order acquisition process (S137). In this process, the main control unit 40, for the winning combination having the bit set to “1” in the display combination storing area (see FIG. 43) and the winning combination storing area having the bit set to “1”, The attraction priority data is acquired by referring to the attraction priority table (see FIG. 36).

Next, the main control unit 40 stores the acquired attraction priority data in the attraction priority data storage area (see FIG. 48) (S138). At this time, the pull-in priority data is stored in the pull-in priority data storage area such that the value of each priority and the bit of the storage area correspond. Next, the main control unit 40 adds "1" to the symbol position data and subtracts "1" from the number of symbol checks (S139).

Next, the main controller 40 determines whether or not the number of symbol checks is "0" (S140). In S140, when the main control unit 40 determines that the number of symbol checks is not "0" (NO in S140), the main control unit 40 returns the process to S135 and repeats the processes from S135.

On the other hand, in S140, when the main control unit 40 determines that the number of symbol checks is “0” (YES in S140), the main control unit 40 determines whether or not the search has been performed the number of times. (S141).

In S141, when the main control unit 40 determines that the search has not been performed the number of times (NO in S141), the main control unit 40 returns the process to S132 and repeats the processes from S132. On the other hand, when it is determined in S141 that the main control unit 40 has performed the search for the number of times of search (YES in S141), the main control unit 40 ends the attraction-in priority storage process and executes the process in the main flow (FIG. 165). (See) S14.

[Selection process of pull-in priority table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 173, the attraction priority table selection processing performed in S133 in the flowchart of the attraction priority storage processing (see FIG. 172) will be described.

First, the main control unit 40 determines whether or not the pull-in priority table number is set, that is, whether or not the pull-in priority table number is directly stored in the reel stop initialization process (S8). (S151). In S151, when the main control unit 40 determines that the attraction-in priority table number is set (YES in S151), the main control unit 40 ends the attraction-in priority table selection process and executes the process. The process proceeds to S134 of the pull-in priority storage process (see FIG. 172).

On the other hand, when the main control unit 40 determines in S151 that the pull-in priority table number is not set (NO in S151), the main control unit 40 determines that the pressing order storage area (see FIG. 46) and With reference to the operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 45), the corresponding pull-in priority table number is set (S152). Then, after the processing of S152, the main control unit 40 ends the attraction priority table selection processing, and moves the processing to S134 of the attraction priority storage processing (see FIG. 172).

In S132, the main control unit 40 first refers to the pressing order storage area and the operation stop button storage area to acquire the pressing order and operation stop button data. Next, the main control unit 40 refers to the pull-in priority table selection table corresponding to the pull-in priority table selection data, and acquires the pull-in priority table number based on the pressing order and the operation stop button. After that, the main control unit 40 sets the acquired attraction priority table number.

[Symbol code storage processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 174, the symbol code storage processing performed in S135 in the flowchart (see FIG. 172) of the attraction-in priority storage processing will be described.

First, the main controller 40 sets effective line data (S161). In this embodiment, one line (center line) is provided as the effective line as described above. Next, the main control unit 40 sets the checking symbol position data of the search target reel based on the retrieval symbol position and the effective line data (S162). For example, when the search target reel is the left reel 3L, since it is desired to obtain the information of the middle stage of the search target reel, the check symbol position data indicating the middle stage is set.

Next, the main control unit 40 acquires the symbol code of the checking symbol position data (S163). Then, the main control unit 40 stores the acquired symbol code in the symbol code storage area, then ends the symbol code storage process, and moves the process to S136 of the attraction-in priority storage process (see FIG. 172).

[Reel stop control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 175, the reel stop control process performed in S14 in the main flow (see FIG. 165) will be described.

First, the main control unit 40 performs a stop button detection process (S171). In this process, the main control unit 40 determines whether or not the valid stop button has been pressed, and also determines whether or not the left stop button has been pressed in the first stop operation. The details of the stop button detection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 176 described later.

Next, the main control unit 40, based on the detection result of the stop button detection processing of S171 (the determination result of the stop button that has been pressed effectively), the pressing order storage area (see FIG. 46) and the operation stop button storage area (FIG. 45). (See) is updated (S172). Next, the main control unit 40 subtracts "1" from the stop button non-operation counter (S173).

Next, the main control unit 40 determines the search target reel from the operation stop button (S174). Then, the main control unit 40 stores the stop start position in the main RAM 53 based on the symbol counter (S175).

Next, the main control unit 40 performs a sliding piece number determination process (S176). The details of the sliding piece number determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, the main control unit 40 sends a reel stop command to the sub control circuit 42 (S177). The reel stop command transmitted in this process includes information such as the type of reel to be stopped, the number of sliding pieces thereof, the ON edge/OFF edge of the stop switch, and the like. The information of the ON edge/OFF edge of the stop switch may be monitored by an interrupt process described later and the information may be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42.

Next, the main control unit 40 determines the scheduled stop position based on the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces determined in S176, and stores the determined scheduled stop position in the main RAM 53 (S178). In this process, the main control unit 40 adds the number of sliding pieces to the stop start position and sets the result as the planned stop position.

Next, the main control unit 40 sets the scheduled stop position determined in S178 as the search symbol position (S179). Next, the main control unit 40 performs the symbol code storage process described with reference to FIG. 174 (S180). After that, the main control unit 40 updates the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 47) using the symbol code acquired in S180 (S181).

Next, the main control unit 40 performs control change processing (S182). The details of the control change processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 182 described later. Next, the main control unit 40 determines whether or not the pressed stop button has been released (S183). In S183, when the main control unit 40 determines that the pressed stop button is not released (when S183 is NO determination), the main control unit 40 repeats the process of S183, and the pressed stop button is Wait until released.

On the other hand, when the main control unit 40 determines in S183 that the pressed stop button is released (YES in S183), the main control unit 40 performs reel stop command transmission processing (S184). In this process, the main control unit 40 sends a reel stop command to the sub control circuit 42. At this time, the data structure of the reel stop command transmitted is the same as that of the reel stop command transmitted in S177. However, the ON-edge/OFF-edge information included in the reel stop command transmitted in S184 is different from the ON-edge/OFF edge information included in the reel stop command transmitted in S177.

Next, the main controller 40 determines whether or not the stop button non-operation counter is "0" (S185). In S185, when the main control unit 40 determines that the non-operation counter is not "0" (NO in S185), the main control unit 40 executes the attraction-in priority storage process described with reference to FIG. 172. Perform (S186). After that, the main control unit 40 returns the processing to S171 and repeats the processing after S171.

On the other hand, in S185, when the main control unit 40 determines that the non-operation counter is "0" (YES in S185), the main control unit 40 ends the reel stop control process and executes the main process. The process moves to S15 in the flow (see FIG. 165).

As described above, the reel stop control processing of this embodiment is executed by the main control circuit 41. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 also serves as a unit (stop control unit) that executes stop control of reel rotation (variable display of symbols).

[Stop button detection processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 176, the stop button detection processing performed in S171 in the flowchart of the reel stop control processing (see FIG. 175) will be described.

First, the main controller 40 determines whether or not there is a pressed stop button (S191). In S191, when the main control unit 40 determines that there is no stop button that has been pressed (NO in S191), the main control unit 40 ends the stop button detection process and the reel stop control process ( (See FIG. 175) (S172).

On the other hand, in S191, when the main control unit 40 determines that the pressed stop button is present (YES in S191), the main control unit 40 determines whether the stop button stop operation is the first stop operation. It is determined whether or not (S192). When the main control unit 40 determines in S192 that the stop button stop operation is not the first stop operation (NO in S192), the main control unit 40 performs the process of S197 described below.

On the other hand, in S192, when the main control unit 40 determines that the stop operation of the stop button is the first stop operation (YES in S192), the main control unit 40 determines that the lock numbers are “5” to “5”. 7” is determined (S193).

In S193, when the main control unit 40 determines that the lock number is any one of "5" to "7" (YES in S193), the main control unit 40 performs the first stop lock process. Perform (S194). In the first stop lock process, a value corresponding to the lock number is set in the lock timer, and a reel effect pattern corresponding to the lock number is set. Then, when the value of the lock timer becomes 0, the main control unit 40 clears the lock number of the game lock flag from "5" to "7", and ends the first stop time lock process.

If the determination in S193 is NO, or after the processing in S194, the main control unit 40 determines whether or not the left stop button 17L is pressed (S195). In this process, when the number of the stop button pressed by the first stop operation is one, the main control unit 40 determines whether or not the pressed stop button is the left stop button 17L. Further, in this processing, when there are a plurality of stop buttons pressed by the first stop operation, the main control unit 40 determines whether or not the left stop button 17L is included in the plurality of pressed stop buttons. Determine whether.

In S195, when the main control unit 40 determines that the left stop button 17L is not pressed (NO in S195), the main control unit 40 performs the process of S197 described below. On the other hand, when the main control unit 40 determines in S195 that the left stop button 17L has been pressed (YES in S195), the main control unit 40 sets the left stop button 17L as the effectively pressed stop button. Yes (S196). Then, after the processing of S196, the main control unit 40 ends the stop button detection processing, and moves the processing to S172 of the reel stop control processing (see FIG. 175).

When S192 or S195 is NO determination, the main control part 40 determines whether the some stop button was pressed down (S197). In S197, when the main control unit 40 determines that a plurality of stop buttons have been pressed (YES in S197), the main control unit 40 ends the stop button detection process and executes the reel stop control process ( (See FIG. 175) (S172). That is, when a plurality of stop buttons are pressed in a stop operation other than the first stop operation, or when the stop button pressed in the first stop operation does not include the left stop button, the stop buttons The pressing operation is treated as an invalid operation.

On the other hand, when the main control unit 40 determines in S197 that the plurality of stop buttons have not been pressed (NO in S197), the main control unit 40 determines that the pressed stop buttons are for the spinning reels. It is determined whether or not the button is the stop button (S198). In S198, when the main control unit 40 determines that the pressed stop button is not the stop button of the spinning reel (when S198 is NO), the main control unit 40 ends the stop button detection process, The processing moves to S172 of the reel stop control processing (see FIG. 175). That is, when the pressed stop button is the stop button corresponding to the stopped reel, the pressing operation of the stop button is treated as an invalid operation.

On the other hand, when the main control unit 40 determines in S198 that the pressed stop button is the stop button of the spinning reel (when YES is determined in S198), the main control unit 40 determines that the pressed stop button is pressed. Is set as the stop button that has been effectively pressed (S199). Then, after the processing of S199, the main control unit 40 ends the stop button detection processing and moves the processing to S172 of the reel stop control processing (see FIG. 175).

As described above, in S191 to S196 of the stop button detection processing of the present embodiment, when the plurality of stop buttons including the left stop button 17L are simultaneously pressed in the reel first stop operation, the left stop button 17L is pressed. Is enabled and pressing of other stop buttons is disabled. Then, this processing is executed by the main control unit 40. That is, in the present embodiment, when the plurality of stop buttons including the left stop button 17L are pressed at the same time in the reel first stop operation, the main control unit 40 performs the effective pressing operation of the left stop button 17L. It also serves as a means of determining.

[Slip piece number determination process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 177, the sliding piece number determination processing performed in S176 in the flowchart of the reel stop control processing (see FIG. 175) will be described.

First, the main controller 40 selects the line mask data corresponding to the operation stop button based on the line mask data table (not shown) (S201). In this process, for example, when the left stop button 17L is pressed, the main control unit 40 sets "1" to the bit 7 corresponding to the "left reel A line" of the stop data as the line mask data. Select "10000000". Also, for example, when the middle stop button 17C is pressed, the main control unit 40 sets "10000" to the bit 4 corresponding to the "middle reel A line" of the stop data as the line mask data, "00010000". Select. Further, for example, when the right stop button 17R is pressed, the main control unit 40 sets "1" to bit 1 corresponding to "right reel A line" of the stop data as line mask data, "00000010". Select.

Next, the main control unit 40 determines whether or not it is the first stop (the stop button non-operation counter is "2") (S202). When the main control unit 40 determines in S202 that the first stop is not performed (NO in S202), the main control unit 40 performs the second and third stop processing (S203). The details of the second and third stop processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 178 described later. After that, the main control unit 40 performs the process of S211 described later.

On the other hand, when the main control unit 40 determines in S202 that the first stop is performed (YES in S202), the main control unit 40 determines whether the operation stop button is the left stop button. (S204).

In S204, when the main control unit 40 determines that the operation stop button is the left stop button (YES in S204), the main control unit 40 acquires the forward selection table selection data and the symbol counter ( S205). In this process, the forward selection table selection data is acquired by referring to the reel stop initial setting table (see FIG. 30). Next, the main control unit 40 refers to the forward pressing first stop table corresponding to the forward pressing table selection data, and acquires the sliding piece number determination data and the change status based on the symbol counter (S206). .. After that, the main control unit 40 performs the process of S211 described later.

On the other hand, in S204, when the main control unit 40 determines that the operation stop button is not the left stop button (when S204 is NO determination), the main control unit 40 acquires the irregular press-time table selection data and the irregularity thereof. The irregular pressing stop table corresponding to the pressing table selection data is set (S207). In this process, the irregular press-time table selection data is acquired by referring to the reel stop initial setting table (see FIG. 30).

Next, the main control unit 40 performs a line change bit check process (S208). The details of the line change bit check processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 179 described later. Next, the main control unit 40 performs a line mask data change process (S209). The details of the line mask data change processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 180 described later. After that, the main control unit 40 refers to the set irregular press-time stop table, and acquires the sliding piece number determination data based on the line mask data and the stop start position (S210).

After the processing of S203, S206 or S210, the main control unit 40 performs the priority attraction-in control processing (S211). In this process, the attraction priority data corresponding to each symbol position within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces "4" from the stop start position is compared, and the most appropriate number of sliding pieces is determined. The details of the priority attraction-in control process will be described later with reference to FIG. After that, the main control unit 40 ends the sliding frame number determination process, and moves the process to S177 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 175).

[Second and third stop processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 178, the second/third stop processing performed in S203 in the flowchart (see FIG. 177) of the sliding piece number determination processing will be described.

First, the main controller 40 determines whether or not it is the second stop operation (S221). In S221, when the main control unit 40 determines that it is not during the second stop operation (NO in S221), the main control unit 40 performs the process of S224 described below.

On the other hand, in S221, when the main control unit 40 determines that the second stop operation is being performed (YES in S221), the main control unit 40 presses the stop buttons in the forward pressing order (first stop It is determined whether or not it is the left reel 3L) (S222). In S222, when the main control unit 40 determines that it is not the forward push (when S222 is NO determination), the main control unit 40 performs the process of S224 described below.

On the other hand, when the main control unit 40 determines in step S202 that the button has been pressed forward (YES in step S222), the main control unit 40 performs a line change bit check process (S223). The details of the line change bit check processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 179 described later.

After the process of S223 or when the determination of S221 or S222 is NO, the main control unit 40 performs the line mask data change process (S224). The details of the line mask data change processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 180 described later. Next, the main control unit 40 performs a sliding piece number search process (S225). In this process, the stop table (FIG. 31, FIG. 33, and FIG. 34) is referred to, and the slide piece number determination data is determined based on the stop start position.

For example, when the line mask data is “00010000” corresponding to the “middle reel A line”, the main control unit 40 refers to the column of the “middle reel A line” of bit 4. Then, for each symbol position within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces from the stop start position, a search is sequentially performed to determine whether the corresponding data is "1". Next, the main control unit 40 calculates the difference from the symbol position where the corresponding data is “1” to the stop start position, and determines the calculated value as the sliding piece number determination data. Then, after the processing of S225, the main control unit 40 ends the second and third stop processing, and moves the processing to S211 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 177).

[Line change bit check processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 179, the line change bit performed in S208 in the flowchart for determining the number of sliding pieces (see FIG. 177) and S223 in the flowchart for the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 178). The check process will be described.

First, the main control unit 40 determines whether the change status is "1" or "2" (S231). When the main control unit 40 determines in S231 that the change status is "1" or "2" (YES in S231), the main control unit 40 sets the corresponding line status (S232). .. In this process, in the present embodiment, the A line status is set when the change status is "1", and the B line status is set when the change status is "2". Then, after the processing of S232, the main control unit 40 ends the line change bit check processing, and the processing is S209 of the sliding frame number determination processing (see FIG. 177), or a flowchart of the second and third stop processing (FIG. 178)).

On the other hand, when the main control unit 40 determines in S231 that the change status is not "1" or "2" (NO in S231), the main control unit 40 determines whether the line change bit is on. It is determined whether or not (S233). In this processing, the main control unit 40 refers to the column corresponding to the “middle reel line change bit” or the “right reel line change bit” in the stop table (see FIGS. 33 and 34) and corresponds to the stop start position. It is determined whether the data is "1". Then, in S233, when the main control unit 40 determines that the data corresponding to the stop start position is not "1", that is, the line change bit is not on (when S233 is NO determination), the main control unit 40 The line change bit check process is terminated, and the process proceeds to S209 of the sliding frame number determination process (see FIG. 177) or the process of S224 in the flowchart of the second/third stop process (see FIG. 178).

On the other hand, in S233, when the main control unit 40 determines that the data corresponding to the stop start position is “1”, that is, the line change bit is on (YES in S233), the main control unit 40 40 sets the B line status (S234). The B line status is data used to change the line mask data. Then, after the processing of S234, the main control unit 40 terminates the line change bit check processing, and the processing is S209 of the sliding frame number determination processing (see FIG. 177), or a flowchart of the second and third stop processing (FIG. 178)).

[Line mask data change processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 180, the line mask data performed in S209 in the flowchart for determining the number of sliding pieces (see FIG. 177) and S224 in the flowchart for the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 178). The change process will be described.

First, the main control unit 40 determines whether or not the C line status is set (S241). The C line status is set in the second post-stop control change process (see FIG. 183), which will be described later, when the forward push is performed.

In S241, when the main control unit 40 determines that the C line status is set (YES in S241), the main control unit 40 determines that the operation stop button at the second stop is the middle stop button. It is determined whether or not (S242).

In S242, when the main control unit 40 determines that the operation stop button at the time of the second stop is the middle stop button (YES in S242), the main control unit 40 sets the line mask data to the right twice. Rotate (S243). If the operation stop button at the time of the second stop is the middle stop button, the operation stop button at the time of the third stop is the right stop button. Therefore, the line mask data is changed from "00000010" to "10000000" by the process of S243. As a result, the column of bit 7 corresponding to the "right reel C line data" in the stop table for second/third stop during forward pressing (see FIG. 33) is referred to. Then, after the processing of S243, the main control unit 40 ends the line mask data change processing, and the processing is S210 of the sliding frame number determination processing (see FIG. 177), or a flowchart of the second and third stop processing (FIG. 178)).

On the other hand, in S242, when the main control unit 40 determines that the operation stop button at the time of the second stop is not the middle stop button (when S242 is NO determination), the main control unit 40 shifts the line mask data to the left by 2. Rotate twice (S244). If the operation stop button at the time of the second stop is not the middle stop button, the operation stop button at the time of the third stop is the middle stop button. Therefore, the line mask data is changed from "00010000" to "01000000" by the processing of S244. As a result, the column of bit 6 corresponding to the "middle reel C line data" of the stop table for the second and third stops at the time of forward pressing is referred to. Then, after the processing of S244, the main control unit 40 ends the line mask data changing processing, and the processing is S210 of the sliding frame number determination processing (see FIG. 177), or a flowchart of the second and third stop processing (FIG. 178)).

Here, returning to the description of the processing of S241 again, when the main control unit 40 determines in S241 that the C line status is not set (when S241 is NO determination), the main control unit 40 determines that B It is determined whether the line status is set (S245). In S245, when the main control unit 40 determines that the B line status is not set (NO in S245), the main control unit 40 ends the line mask data change process, and executes the process. The process proceeds to S210 of the determination process (see FIG. 177) or S225 in the flowchart of the second/third stop process (see FIG. 178).

On the other hand, when the main control unit 40 determines in S245 that the B line status is set (YES in S245), the main control unit 40 rotates the line mask data once to the right (S246). ). By this processing, for example, when the line mask data is “00000010”, it is changed to “00000001”. As a result, the column corresponding to the “B line data” in the stop table (see FIGS. 33 and 34) is referred to. Then, after the processing of S246, the main control unit 40 ends the line mask data change processing, and the processing is S210 of the sliding frame number determination processing (see FIG. 177), or a flowchart of the second and third stop processing (FIG. 178)).

[Priority access control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 181, the priority attraction-in control processing performed in S211 in the flowchart of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 177) will be described.

First, the main control unit 40 sets the search order table (see FIG. 37) according to the game state (S251). Next, the main control unit 40 sets initial values for the search order counter and the number of checks (S252). Specifically, the main control unit 40 sets "1" as an initial value in the search order counter. Further, the main control unit 40 sets the data length of the search order table as an initial value for the number of checks. Specifically, "5" is set as the initial value of the number of checks.

Next, the main control unit 40 sets the start address of the stop order table (not shown), and adds the address of the search order table based on the sliding piece number determination data (S253).

Next, the main control unit 40 acquires the number of sliding pieces corresponding to the value of the search order counter (S254). Next, the main control unit 40 adds the acquired number of sliding pieces to the expected stop start address to acquire the pull-in priority data (S255).

Next, the main control unit 40 determines whether or not the attraction-in priority data acquired in S255 exceeds the attraction-in priority data acquired earlier (S256). In S256, when the main control unit 40 determines that the attraction priority data acquired in S255 does not exceed the attraction priority data acquired earlier (NO in S256), the main control unit 40 will be described later. The process of S258 is performed.

On the other hand, in S256, when the main control unit 40 determines that the attraction-in priority data acquired in S255 exceeds the attraction-in priority data acquired earlier (YES in S256), the main control unit 40 determines that the S254 The number of sliding pieces acquired in step S2 is saved (S257).

After the processing of S257 or when the determination of S256 is NO, the main control unit 40 subtracts "1" from the number of checks and adds "1" to the search order counter (S258).

Next, the main control unit 40 determines whether the number of checks is "0" (S259). In S259, when the main control unit 40 determines that the number of checks is not “0” (NO in S259), the main control unit 40 returns the process to S254, and repeats the processes from S254.

On the other hand, when the main control unit 40 determines in S259 that the number of checks is "0" (YES in S259), the main control unit 40 restores the number of slide pieces that have been retracted (S260). ). Then, after the processing of S260, the main control unit 40 finishes the priority pull-in control processing and also finishes the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 177).

[Control change processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 182, the control change processing performed in S182 in the flowchart of the reel stop control processing (see FIG. 175) will be described.

First, the main controller 40 determines whether or not it is after the third stop (S271). When the main control unit 40 determines in S271 that the third stop has been performed (YES in S271), the main control unit 40 ends the control change process and executes the reel stop control process (FIG. 175). Refer to S183 of FIG.

On the other hand, in S271, when the main control unit 40 determines that it is not after the third stop (when S271 is NO determination), the main control unit 40 determines whether it is after the second stop (S272). .. In S272, when the main control unit 40 determines that the second stop has been performed (YES in S272), the main control unit 40 performs the second post-stop control process (S273). The details of the second post-stop control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 183 described later. After the processing of S273, the main control unit 40 ends the control change processing, and moves the processing to S183 of the reel stop control processing (see FIG. 175).

On the other hand, when the main control unit 40 determines in S272 that the second stop has not been performed (NO in S272), the main control unit 40 determines whether or not the forward push is performed (S274). In S274, when the main control unit 40 determines that it is not the forward push (when S274 is NO determination), the main control unit 40 ends the control change process, and the process of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 175) is performed. Move to S183.

On the other hand, in S274, when the main control unit 40 determines that the forward push is performed (YES in S274), the main control unit 40 determines that the forward push time control change table (the forward push time change table) corresponding to the forward push time table change data. (See FIG. 32) is acquired, and the number of searches is set (S275).

Next, the main control unit 40 acquires the scheduled stop position (S276). Then, the main control unit 40 updates the change target position according to the acquired planned stop position (S277).

Next, the main control unit 40 determines whether or not the change target position updated in S277 matches the scheduled stop position (S278). In S278, when the main control unit 40 determines that the updated change target position does not match the planned stop position (NO in S278), the main control unit 40 determines whether or not the number of searches is “0”. It is determined (S279).

In S279, when the main control unit 40 determines that the number of searches is not “0” (NO in S279), the main control unit 40 returns the process to S277 and repeats the processes from S277. On the other hand, in S279, when the main control unit 40 determines that the number of searches is “0” (YES in S279), the main control unit 40 pushes the value of the table change initial data at the time of forward push. The second and third stop table numbers for stop are acquired and the corresponding stop table is set (S280).

Next, the main control unit 40 sets "0" to the C line check data (S281). After the processing of S281, the main control unit 40 ends the control change processing, and moves the processing to S183 of the reel stop control processing (see FIG. 175).

In S278, when the main control unit 40 determines that the updated change target position matches the planned stop position (YES in S278), the main control unit 40 determines the order according to the value of the line change status. When pressed, the second and third stop table numbers and the C line check data are acquired (S282).

Next, the main control unit 40 sets a corresponding stop table based on the second/third stop table numbers for forward pressing (S283). Then, after the processing of S283, the main control unit 40 ends the control change processing, and moves the processing to S183 of the reel stop control processing (see FIG. 175).

[Control change processing after second stop]
Next, with reference to FIG. 183, the second post-stop control change process performed in S273 in the control change process flowchart (see FIG. 182) will be described.

First, the main control unit 40 determines whether or not the forward push is performed (S291). In S291, when the main control unit 40 determines that it is not the forward push (when S291 is NO determination), the main control unit 40 ends the second post-stop control change process and the control change process (see FIG. 182). ) Also ends.

On the other hand, in S291, when the main control unit 40 determines that the forward push is performed (YES in S291), the main control unit 40 determines whether the C line check data is on (when the change status is “3”). It is determined whether or not there is (S292). The C line check data is acquired by the process of S282 of the control change process (see FIG. 182). Then, in S292, when the main control unit 40 determines that the C line check data is not on (when the determination in S292 is NO), the main control unit 40 terminates the second post-stop control change process and performs control. The change process (see FIG. 182) also ends.

On the other hand, when the main control unit 40 determines in S292 that the C line check data is on (YES in S292), the main control unit 40 determines that the line corresponding to the stop start position at the time of the second stop. It is determined whether the change bit is on (S293). In S293, when the main control unit 40 determines that the line change bit corresponding to the stop start position at the time of the second stop is not on (when S293 is NO determination), the main control unit 40 performs the second post-stop control. The control changing process (see FIG. 182) is also ended when the changing process is ended.

On the other hand, when the main control unit 40 determines in S293 that the line change bit corresponding to the stop start position at the time of the second stop is ON (in the case of YES determination in S293), the main control unit 40 is stored. In addition, "1" is added to the stop table numbers for the second and third stop during forward pressing, and the corresponding stop table is set (S294). Next, the main control unit 40 sets the C line status (S295). Then, after the processing of S295, the main control unit 40 ends the second post-stop control change processing, and also ends the control change processing (see FIG. 182).

[RT control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 184, the RT control processing performed in S17 in the main flow (see FIG. 165) will be described.

First, the main control unit 40 refers to the RT transition table (see FIG. 13) and checks the RT game state transition conditions that can be satisfied in the transition source (current) RT game state (S301).

Next, the main control unit 40 determines whether or not the RT game state transition condition is satisfied (S302). In S302, when the main control unit 40 determines that the transition condition of the RT gaming state is not satisfied (NO in S302), the main control unit 40 performs the process of S304 described below.

On the other hand, in S302, when the main control unit 40 determines that the RT game state transition condition is satisfied (YES in S302), the main control unit 40 reads the RT transition table (see FIG. 13). Based on the transition condition, the RT game state flag of the transition destination is set to a predetermined bit of the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 44), and the game state flag storage area is updated (S303).

After the process of S303 or when the determination of S302 is NO, the main control unit 40 performs a display command transmission process (S304). Specifically, the main control unit 40 transmits the display command to the sub control circuit 42. The display command is configured to include parameters that specify the display combination, the number of payouts, and the like. Then, after the processing of S304, the main control unit 40 ends the RT control processing, and moves the processing to S18 of the main flow (see FIG. 165).

As described above, the RT control processing of this embodiment is executed by the main control circuit 41. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 also serves as a unit (replay time state control unit) that controls the transition of the RT game state.

[Bonus end check process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 185, the bonus end check processing performed in S19 in the main flow (see FIG. 165) will be described.

First, the main controller 40 determines whether or not the value of the bonus end number counter is less than "0" (S311). In S311, when the main control unit 40 determines that the value of the bonus end number counter is not less than “0” (NO in S311), the main control unit 40 performs the process of S314 described below.

On the other hand, in S311, when the main control unit 40 determines that the value of the bonus end number counter is less than “0” (YES determination in S311), the main control unit 40, the main control unit 40, the bonus Processing at the end is performed (S312). In this process, the main control unit 40 clears the bonus end number counter, and turns off the game state flag (BB game state flag) corresponding to "BB" in operation. If the RB game state is in progress, the RB game state flag is turned off, and the possible winning number counter and the possible game number counter are cleared. If the RB carryover is in progress, the RB carryover flag stored in the carryover combination storing area (not shown) is turned off. In addition, when the value of the bonus end number counter is less than "0", it means that the payout of medals exceeds 44 during the BB game state.

Next, the main control unit 40 performs a bonus end command transmission process (S313). In this process, the main control unit 40 sends a bonus end command to the sub control circuit 42. The bonus end command includes information such as the type of bonus that has ended. After the process of S313, the main control unit 40 ends the bonus end check process, and moves the process to S20 of the main flow (see FIG. 165).

On the other hand, in S311, when the main control unit 40 determines that the value of the bonus end number counter is not less than “0” (NO in S311), the main control unit 40 sets the RB game state flag to ON. It is determined whether or not (S314).

In S314, when the main control unit 40 determines that the RB gaming state flag is not on (when S314 is NO determination), the main control unit 40 ends the bonus end check process, and the process proceeds to the main flow (FIG. 165). (See) S20.

On the other hand, in S314, when the main control unit 40 determines that the RB game state flag is ON (YES in S314), the main control unit 40 decrements the winning number counter and the possible game number counter by one. (S315).

Next, the main control unit 40 determines whether or not the value of the winning number counter or the value of the available game number counter is "0" (S316). In S316, when the main control unit 40 determines that the value of the winning number counter or the value of the possible game number counter is not "0" (NO in S316), the main control unit 40 checks the bonus end. The process is terminated, and the process proceeds to S20 of the main flow (see FIG. 165).

On the other hand, in S316, when the main control unit 40 determines that the value of the winning number counter or the value of the possible game number counter is “0” (YES in S316), the main control unit 40, RB end processing is performed (S317). Specifically, processing such as turning off the gaming status flag (RB gaming status flag) corresponding to "RB" and clearing the winning possible number counter and the gaming possible number counter is performed. Then, after the processing of S316, the main control unit 40 ends the bonus end check processing, and moves the processing to S20 of the main flow (see FIG. 165).

[Bonus activation check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 186, the bonus operation check process performed in S20 in the main flow (see FIG. 165) will be described.

First, the main controller 40 determines whether the display combination is "BB" (S321). In S321, when the main controller 40 determines that the display combination is not “BB” (NO in S321), the main controller 40 performs the process of S326 described below.

On the other hand, when the main control unit 40 determines in S321 that the display combination is “BB” (when the determination in S321 is YES), the main control unit 40 refers to the bonus operation time table and determines the display combination. Processing for BB operation is performed (S322). In this process, the BB game state flag corresponding to the game state flag storage area is stored, and "44" is stored in the bonus end number counter.

Next, the main control unit 40 clears the value of the carryover combination storing area (S323). Then, the main control unit 40 turns on the RT0 gaming state flag and turns off the RT1 gaming state flag (S324).

Next, the main control part 40 performs a bonus start command transmission process (S325). In this process, the main control unit 40 sends a bonus start command to the sub control circuit 42. The bonus start command includes information indicating that the bonus game has started. Then, after the process of S325, the main control unit 40 ends the bonus operation check process, and moves the process to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 165).

In the case of NO determination in S321, the main control unit 40 determines whether the display combination is "RB" (S326). In S326, when the main controller 40 determines that the display combination is not “RB” (NO in S326), the main controller 40 performs the process of S330 described below.

On the other hand, when the main control unit 40 determines in S326 that the display combination is “RB” (YES in S326), the main control unit 40 refers to the bonus operation table and determines whether the display combination is “RB”. Processing for RB operation is performed (S327). In this process, the RB game state flag corresponding to the game state flag storage area is stored.

Next, the main control unit 40 clears the value in the carryover combination storing area (S328). Then, the main control unit 40 turns off the RT1 game state flag and turns on the RT0 game state flag (S329). After the processing of S329, the main control unit 40 ends the bonus operation check processing, and moves the processing to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 165).

When S326 is NO, the main control unit 40 determines whether or not the winning combination is for the replay (replay) (S330). In S330, when the main control unit 40 determines that the winning combination relating to the re-play is not a winning combination (NO in S330), the main control unit 40 ends the bonus operation check process and executes the process in the main flow (Fig. 165)) to S2.

On the other hand, in S330, when the main control unit 40 determines that the winning combination is the winning combination (YES in S330), the main control unit 40 requests automatic insertion of medals (S331). That is, the main control unit 40 copies the inserted number counter to the automatic inserted number counter. Then, after the process of S331, the main control unit 40 ends the bonus operation check process, and moves the process to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 165).

[Interrupt processing under the control of the main CPU (1.1172 msec)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 187, for example, an interrupt process under the control of the main control unit 40 performed in S12 in the main flow (see FIG. 165) will be described.

First, the main control unit 40 saves the register (S331). Next, the main control unit 40 performs an input port check process (S332). In this process, signals input from various switches such as the stop switch 17S are checked.

Next, the main control unit 40 performs a timer update process (S333). In this process, the main control unit 40 performs a process of subtracting the value of the lock timer for each interrupt process, for example. Then, when the value of the lock timer becomes 0, the main control unit 40 clears the game lock flag. Next, the main control unit 40 performs a communication data transmission process (S334). In this processing, mainly, various commands are appropriately transmitted to the main control circuit 41 and the sub control circuit 42.

Next, the main controller 40 performs reel control processing (S335). In this process, the main control unit 40 starts the rotation of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R when the rotation start of all the reels is requested, and then the respective reels rotate at a constant speed. The three stepping motors 61L, 61C and 61R are driven and controlled. Further, when the number of sliding pieces is determined, the main control unit 40 updates the symbol counter of the corresponding reel by the number of sliding pieces. Then, the main control unit 40 waits until the updated symbol counter coincides with the value corresponding to the planned stop position (the symbol at the planned stop position reaches the area on the effective line of the display window), and falls under this condition. The corresponding stepping motor is drive-controlled so that the rotation of the reel is decelerated and stopped. Further, in the present embodiment, in the process of S335, in addition to the above-described normal acceleration process, constant speed process, and stop process, when a reel effect pattern is set during the acceleration process, the reel effect pattern is handled. It also performs reel effect control and lock control processing.

Next, the main control unit 40 performs a lamp/7-segment driving process (S336). In this process, the main controller 40 drives and controls the 7-segment display 6 to display the number of payouts, the number of credits, and the like. Next, the main control unit 40 performs a register restoration process (S337). Then, after that, the main control unit 40 ends the interrupt process.

<Explanation of operation of sub-control circuit>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 188 to 248, the contents of various processes executed by the sub control circuit (sub control unit) 42 using a program will be described.

[Operation processing when operating the start lever of the sub control circuit]
First, the procedure of the start lever operation process of the pachi-slot 1 under the control of the sub CPU 81 will be described with reference to the overall flow of the start lever operation shown in FIG. 188. The process of operating the start lever of the pachi-slot 1 under the control of the sub CPU 81 is performed when the sub control circuit 42 receives the start command.

First, when the start lever is operated, the sub CPU 81 erases the navigation information (S501). This navigation information is information for controlling the lamp and the liquid crystal display device 11 when performing navigation.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the BB is being carried over (S502). When the sub CPU 81 determines in step S502 that the BB is being carried over (when YES is determined in step S502), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of step S512 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S502 that the BB is not being carried over (NO in S502), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the BB is in progress (S503). In S503, when the sub CPU 81 determines that it is not in the BB (when S503 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S505 described below.

In S503, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the BB is in progress (YES in S503), the sub CPU 81 performs the BB in-state lottery process for each state (S504). As each state in which the lottery process during BB is performed, for example, during CZ transitioned from the normal state, during ART (R_ART, RTG), during MICHI, during BB illegal, and the like can be mentioned. During the CZ transitioned from the normal state, the during-CZ (normal time BB) lottery process (see FIGS. 189 to 191) is performed, and during the ART, the BB during ART lottery process (FIGS. 196 to 199) is performed. Also, during MICHI, the lottery processing during MICHI (see FIG. 195) is performed, and when BB illegal, the BB illegal processing is performed.

When the determination in S503 is NO, or after the processing in S504, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the BB is in progress (S505). In S505, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the BB is in progress (when the determination in S505 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S512 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S505 that the BB is not in progress (NO in S505), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is a BB winning game (S506). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S506 that the game is not the BB winning game (NO in S506), the sub CPU 81 turns off the BB winning flag (S507). The BB winning flag is a flag for grasping whether or not any one of BB1 to BB5 is won, and is stored in various flag storage areas (not shown). After the processing of S507, the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S509 described later.

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S506 that the game is a BB winning game (YES in S506), the sub CPU 81 turns on the BB winning flag (S508). After the processing of S507 or the processing of S508, the sub CPU 81 performs processing at the time of transition to the sub gaming state (S509). The details of the sub game state transition process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs the normal lottery process (S510). The details of the normal lottery process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 206 to 209 described later.

In the case of YES determination in S502 and S505, or after the processing of S510, the sub CPU 81 performs navigation setting processing for each state (S511). In this process, the navigation type according to each state is determined, and the navigation information (navi data) according to the determined navigation type is registered. After the processing of S511, the sub CPU 81 ends the entire flow when the start lever is operated.

As the navigation corresponding to each state, for example, the navigation to shift to the RT3 gaming state at the time of R_ART and maintain the RT3 gaming state, the navigation to shift to the RT4 gaming state at the start of specialization, and the RT4 gaming state during specialization There is a navi for maintaining, a navi for shifting to the RT3 game state at the end of specialization, and a navi for a specific lip during BB and ART. It should be noted that during BB and ART, navigation is basically performed in which the specific lip is not stopped and displayed. However, in the case of winning "with conversion" in a specific Lip Navi conversion lottery process and a specific Lip Navi conversion fake lottery process, which will be described later, a navigation for stopping and displaying the specific Lip is performed.

In the present embodiment, the navigation regarding the specific lip is performed during BB and ART. However, the navigation regarding the specific lip according to the present invention may be performed during normal operation. Specifically, a normal specific navigation navigation lottery table may be provided, and when the "execution of specific navigation" is won, the navigation in which the specific navigation is stopped and displayed may be performed.

[Lottery processing during CZ (normal BB)]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 189 to 191, the CZ (normal BB) lottery processing performed in S504 in the overall flow of operating the start lever (see FIG. 188) will be described. The CZ (normal BB) lottery process is performed during the BB in-state lottery process (S504) for each state in the CZ that has transitioned from the normal state.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the BB temporary payout number is less than “45” (S521). The BB temporary payout number is the number of medals (game media) paid out during the BB. In the present embodiment, when the internal winning combination relating to the payout of medals (game media) is determined during BB, the number of medals to be paid out is calculated when the symbol combination corresponding to the internal winning combination is stopped and displayed. , BB provisional payout number.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the payout of medals in BB (temporary payout number in BB) reaches 45 or more, BB is ended. Then, by setting the ending condition of the BB to 44 (or more) which is close to the total number of medals obtained when the symbol combination of the 9-bell combination is displayed 5 times, the other combination (rare combination) It is possible to increase the number of times the display of the symbol combination is allowed.

In S521, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the BB provisional payout number is not less than “45” (NO in S521), the sub CPU 81 ends the CZ (normal BB) lottery process and executes the process. When the start lever is operated, the process proceeds to S505 of the overall flow (see FIG. 188).

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S<b>521 that the BB temporary payout number is less than “45” (YES in S<b>521 ), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the PTR stock is 1 or more ( S522). In S522, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the PTR stock is not 1 or more (NO in S522), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S529 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S522 that the PTR stock is 1 or more (YES in S522), the sub CPU 81 performs the EX point acquisition lottery process for B_RUSH (S523). In this processing, the EX point for B_RUSH is acquired by lottery based on the internal winning combination with reference to the lottery table for EX EX during B_RUSH (see FIGS. 98 to 103).

Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the B_RUSH EX points acquired in S523 to the B_RUSH EX point counter (S524). The B_RUSH EX point counter is a counter for managing the total value of the B_RUSH EX points.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (S525). In S525, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is not 100 or more (NO in S525), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S528 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S525 that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (YES in S525), the sub CPU 81 performs the B_RUSH loop rate random determination process (S526). In this processing, the B_RUSH loop rate lottery table (see FIGS. 144 and 145) is referred to, and the type of the BR loop rate is randomly determined based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the BR loop rate type determined in S526 in the sub RAM 83, and initializes the B_RUSH EX point counter (S527). That is, the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is set to 0.

When the determination in S525 is NO, or after the processing in S527, the sub CPU 81 performs the BB in-specific lip navigation conversion fake lottery processing (S528). The details of the BB-specific Lip Navi conversion fake lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the determination in S522 is NO, or after the processing in S528, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the PTR stock is 0 (S529). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S529 that the PTR stock is not 0 (NO in S529), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S549 (see FIG. 190) described later.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S529 that the PTR stock is 0 (in the case of YES determination in S529), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the CZ during FS point counter is 100 or more. (S530). In S530, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the CZ in-process FS point counter is not 100 or more (NO in S530), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S543 (see FIG. 190) described later.

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S530 that the value of the FS during CZ point counter is 100 or more (YES in S530), the sub CPU 81 performs the PTR stock lottery process after reaching the specified point during CZ (S531). ). In this processing, the PTR stock lottery table (see FIG. 70) after the specified point in the CZ is referred to, and the winning or non-winning of the PTR stock is randomly determined based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the lottery result in S531 is a PTR stock win (S532). In S532, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the PTR stock is not won (NO in S532), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S542 (see FIG. 190) described later.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S532 that the PTR stock is won (YES in S532), the sub CPU 81 carries out the specialization type lottery process during the PTR winning process (S533). In this processing, the additional specialization type lottery table (see FIG. 118) at the time of PTR winning is referred to, and the additional specialization type is randomly determined based on the winning opportunity.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the additional specialization type determined in S533 in the sub RAM 83 (S534).

Next, the sub CPU 81 conducts initial EX point lottery processing at the time of level transition (S535). In this process, the initial EX point random determination table at the time of level transition (see FIG. 106) is referred to, and the initial EX points are randomly determined based on the level type of the transfer destination. That is, in S535, EX points for B_RUSH are determined.

Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the EX point for B_RUSH acquired in S535 to the EX point counter for B_RUSH (S536).

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a B_RUSH mode shift lottery process (S537). In this processing, the B_RUSH mode transition lottery table (see FIG. 137) is referred to, and the mode type is randomly determined based on the type of the transition source.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs specialization start processing (S538). The details of the specialization start processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, as shown in FIG. 190, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the B_RUSH EX point counter is 100 or more (S539). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S539 that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is not 100 or more (NO in S525), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S542 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S539 that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (YES in S539), the sub CPU 81 performs the B_RUSH loop rate random determination process (S540). In this processing, the B_RUSH loop rate lottery table (see FIGS. 144 and 145) is referred to, and the type of the BR loop rate is randomly determined based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the BR loop rate type determined in S526 in the sub RAM 83, and initializes the B_RUSH EX point counter (S541). That is, the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is set to 0.

When S532 and S539 are NO determinations, or after the process of S541, the sub CPU 81 performs the BB specific lip navigation conversion fake lottery process (S542). The details of the BB-specific Lip Navi conversion fake lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the case of NO determination in S530 or after the processing of S542, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the CZ in-FS point counter is less than 100 (S543). In S543, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the CZ in-FS point counter is not less than 100 (NO in S543), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S549 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S543 that the value of the FS during CZ point counter is less than 100 (YES in S543), the sub CPU 81 performs the FS during CZ lottery process (S544). .. In this processing, the FS points during CZ acquisition lottery table (see FIG. 67) is referred to, and the FS points are randomly determined based on the winning opportunity.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the CZ in-FS point counter is 100 or more (S545). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S545 that the value of the CZ in-process FS point counter is not 100 or more (NO in S545), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S548 described below.

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S545 that the value of the FS point counter in CZ is 100 or more (YES in S545), the sub CPU 81 performs ART grade lottery processing (S546). In this processing, the ART grade type is randomly determined by referring to the ART grade lottery table (see FIG. 71) and based on the mode type.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the ART grade type determined in S546 in the sub RAM 83, and sets LV.3 in R_ART as the next sub game state (S547). Further, in the process of S547, the ART preparation flag is turned off.

In BB during ART, if BB ends without winning RB, RT game state is RT0 game state and ART is started (restarted). The RT0 gaming state has a lower probability that an internal winning combination relating to replay (replay) is determined than the RT3 gaming state, and is a disadvantageous state for the player because the number of medals consumed increases. Therefore, when ART is started (restarted) in the RT0 game state, the number of games (number of games) in ART progresses in a disadvantageous state for the player, and the benefit of ART (high replay probability in AT3 gaming state + AT) is obtained. The ART may end without receiving it. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the RT0 game state, the number of games (number of games) in ART is not started, and an ART preparation flag is provided to manage this state.

In this embodiment, the ART may be started without passing through the BB, and in this case, the number of games (the number of games) in the ART is started from the RT1 game state. However, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when ART is started without passing through the BB, it is possible to start counting the number of games (the number of games) in ART after shifting to the RT3 gaming state. Good.

When S545 is NO, or after the process of S547, the sub CPU 81 performs the BB in-specific Lip Navi conversion lottery process (S548). The details of the BB specific LipNavi conversion lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 194 described later.

When NO is determined in S529 and S543, or after the processing of S548, the sub CPU 81 adds the payout number of the winning combination to the provisional payout number (S549).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the BB temporary payout number is “45” or more (S550). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S550 that the provisional payout number in BB is not equal to or greater than "45" (NO determination in S550), the sub CPU 81 ends the CZ (during normal BB) lottery process and executes the process. When the start lever is operated, the process proceeds to S505 of the overall flow (see FIG. 188).

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S550 that the BB provisional payout number is “45” or more (YES in S550), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the next sub game state is the normal state. It is determined (S551). In S551, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the next sub game state is not the normal state (NO in S551), the sub CPU 81 ends the CZ (during normal BB) lottery process and starts the process. The operation proceeds to S505 in the overall flow (see FIG. 188).

In S551, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the next sub game state is the normal state (YES in S551), the sub CPU 81 has a total value of the FS point during CZ and the initial FS point of 100 or more. It is determined whether or not (S552). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S552 that the total value of the FS point in CZ and the initial FS point is not 100 or more (NO in S552), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S555 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S552 that the total value of the FS point in CZ and the initial FS point is 100 or more (YES in S552), the sub CPU 81 performs the ART great lottery process (S553). ). In this processing, the ART grade type is randomly determined by referring to the ART grade lottery table (see FIG. 71) and based on the mode type.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the ART grade type determined in S553 in the sub RAM 83, and sets LV.3 in R_ART as the next sub game state (S554). In the process of S554, the ART preparation flag is turned off.

When S552 is NO, or after the processing of S554, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the total value of the FS point in CZ and the initial FS point is less than 100 (S555). In S555, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the total value of the FS point in CZ and the initial FS point is not less than 100 (NO in S555), the sub CPU 81 ends the CZ (during normal BB) lottery process. Then, the process proceeds to S505 of the overall flow when the start lever is operated (see FIG. 188).

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S555 that the total value of the FS point in CZ and the initial FS point is less than 100 (YES in S555), the sub CPU 81 performs the CZ end ART lottery process. (S556). In this process, by referring to the ART lottery table at the end of CZ (see FIG. 68), the winning or non-winning of the R_ART is randomly determined based on the total value of the FS point in CZ and the initial FS point.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the lottery result of S556 is a winning of R_ART (S557). In S557, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the lottery result in S556 is not the winning of R_ART (when S557 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 ends the CZ (normally BB) lottery process and starts the process. The operation proceeds to S505 in the overall flow (see FIG. 188).

In S557, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the lottery result in S556 is a winning of R_ART (in the case of YES determination in S557), the sub CPU 81 performs ART great lottery processing (S558). In this processing, the ART grade type is randomly determined by referring to the ART grade lottery table (see FIG. 71) and based on the mode type.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the ART grade type determined in S558 in the sub RAM 83, and sets LV.3 in R_ART as the next sub game state (S559). In the process of S559, the ART preparation flag is turned off. After the processing in S559, the sub CPU 81 ends the CZ (during normal BB) lottery processing, and moves the processing to S505 in the start lever operation entire flow (see FIG. 188).

[BB specific Lip Navi conversion fake lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 192, the in-BB specific lip navigation conversion fake lottery process will be described.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the RB is being carried over (S561). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S561 that the RB is not being carried over (NO in S561), the sub CPU 81 ends the BB in-specific lip navigation conversion fake lottery process.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S561 that the RB is being carried over (YES in S561), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the MICHI is running up (S562). That is, it is determined whether or not the R_ART that has moved through MICHI (BB5) is being leveled up toward LV.5 (PTR).

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S562 that the MICHI is running up (when YES in S562), the sub CPU 81 ends the BB-specific lip-navi conversion fake lottery process.

In the BB specific lip navigation conversion lottery process, when the F_RT4 specific lip is won, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination related to the specific lip is stopped and displayed (whether or not to perform the navigation) according to the points obtained in the lottery. In the present embodiment, unless the points of a certain value or more are determined, it is not determined that the symbol combination related to the specific lip is stopped and displayed (navigation is performed). Therefore, the stop display of the symbol combination related to the specific lip is substantially equal to the addition of points of a certain value or more. That is, from the appearance of the player, it is possible to give an impression that the points above a certain value are added by stopping and displaying the symbol combination related to the specific lip.

In the present embodiment, the total points have already reached the specified value (for example, 100) at the time of reaching the BB specific lip navigation conversion fake lottery process, and the point is not accumulated. However, occasionally, by stopping and displaying the symbol combination related to the specific lip, it seems that points are accumulated (it is assumed that the points have reached the specified value), so that the symbol combination related to the specific lip is displayed. It is determined whether or not to stop and display (whether to perform navigation). As described above, in the present embodiment, in order to perform the same behavior as the BB-specific Lipnavi conversion lottery process, the BB-specific Lipnavi conversion fake is performed in order to perform the same behavior as the BB-specific Lipnavi conversion lottery process, although it does not have a substantial meaning (points are not accumulated). A lottery process is provided.

The gaming machine according to the present invention may notify that the total number of points has reached the specified value (the level-up has been confirmed). In this case, even if the symbol combination related to the specific lip is stopped by the BB specific lip navigation conversion fake lottery process after the notification that the total of points has reached the specified value (even if the navigation is performed), the meaning is Since there is no BB specific LipNavi conversion fake lottery process, it may not be performed. Further, during the MICHI run-up in the present embodiment, since the level up to LV.5 has been confirmed, the fake specific Lipnavi conversion lottery during BB (S564) is not performed.

On the other hand, in S562, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the MICHI is not running up (when S562 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 maintains the RT01 game state (win number 1) or RT3 shift lip (win number). It is determined whether or not the winning is 8 to 13) (S563).

In S563, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the winning is not the maintenance lip (winning number 1) or the RT3 shift lip (winning numbers 8 to 13) in the RT01 gaming state (when S563 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81, The BB specific lip navigation conversion fake lottery process is ended.

On the other hand, in S563, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the winning is the maintenance lip (winning number 1) or the RT3 shift lip (winning numbers 8 to 13) during the RT01 gaming state (in the case of YES determination in S563), the sub The CPU 81 performs a BB fake specific lip navigation conversion lottery process (S564). In this processing, the fake specific lip navigation conversion lottery table in BB (see FIG. 153) is referred to, and it is determined by lottery whether or not the specific lip navigation conversion is performed.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the lottery result in S564 is “with conversion” (S565). In S565, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the lottery result in S564 is not “with conversion” (no conversion is performed) (NO in S565), the sub CPU 81 ends the BB-specific Lipnavi conversion fake lottery process. To do.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S565 that the lottery result in S564 is “conversion” (when YES in S565), the sub CPU 81 turns on the specific Lipnavi conversion flag (S566). When the specific lip navigation conversion flag is ON, the navigation for stopping and displaying the specific lip is performed. After the processing of S566, the sub CPU 81 ends the BB-specific lip navigation conversion fake lottery processing.

[Specialization start processing]
Next, the specialization start processing will be described with reference to FIG.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not there is an in-service specialization type (S571). In S571, when the sub CPU 81 determines that there is no activated specialization type (NO in S571), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S580 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S571 that there is an in-use specialization type (YES in S571), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the in-use specialization type is “PREMIUM”. (S572).

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S572 that the activated specialization type is "PREMIUM" (YES in S572), the sub CPU 81 sets "PRIMIUM" in the next sub game state (S573). .. After the processing of S573, the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S580 described later.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S572 that the activated specialization type is not “PREMIUM” (when S572 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the activated specialization type is “FIGHING”. Is determined (S574).

In S574, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the activated specialization type is "FIGHTING" (YES in S574), the sub CPU 81 sets "FIGHING IN" in the next sub game state (S575). .. After the processing of S575, the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S580 described later.

On the other hand, in S574, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the activated specialization type is not “FIGHING” (NO in S574), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the activated specialization type is “BURNING”. Is determined (S576).

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S576 that the activated specialization type is "BURNING" (YES in S576), the sub CPU 81 sets "BURNING medium" in the next sub game state (S577). .. After the processing of S577, the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S580 described later.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S576 that the activated specialization type is not “BURNING” (when S576 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the activated specialization type is “RTG”. Is determined (S578).

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S578 that the activated specialization type is not "RTG" (NO in S578), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S580 described below. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S578 that the activated specialization type is "RTG" (YES in S578), the sub CPU 81 sets "RTG in progress" in the next sub game state ( S579).

When S571 and S578 are NO determinations, or after the processing of S573, S575, S577, and S579, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not there is an in-service specialization type (S580). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S580 that there is a specialization type being activated (YES in S580), the sub CPU 81 ends the specialization start processing.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S580 that there is no activated specialization type (NO in S580), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the head of the PTR stock is “PREMIUM” ( S581).

In S581, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the head of the PTR stock is “PREMIUM” (YES in S581), the sub CPU 81 sets “PRIMIUM” in the next sub game state (S582). After the processing of S582, the sub CPU 81 ends the specialization start processing.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S581 that the head of the PTR stock is not "PREMIUM" (NO in S581), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the head of the PTR stock is "FIGHING". Yes (S583).

In S583, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the head of the PTR stock is "FIGHING" (YES in S583), the sub CPU 81 sets "FIGHINGING" in the next sub game state (S584). After the processing of S584, the sub CPU 81 ends the specialization start processing.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S583 that the head of the PTR stock is not "FIGHING" (NO in S583), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the head of the PTR stock is "BURNING". Yes (S585).

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S585 that the head of the PTR stock is not "BURNING" (NO in S585), the sub CPU 81 ends the specialization start process. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S585 that the head of the PTR stock is "BURNING" (YES in S585), the sub CPU 81 sets "BURNING in progress" to the next sub gaming state (S586). ). After the processing of S586, the sub CPU 81 ends the specialization start processing.

[Specific Lip Navi conversion lottery process in BB]
Next, with reference to FIG. 194, the in-BB specific Lipnavi conversion lottery process will be described.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the RB is being carried over (S591). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S591 that the RB is not being carried over (NO in S591), the sub CPU 81 ends the BB in-specific lip navigation conversion lottery process.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S591 that the RB is being carried over (YES in S591), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the MICHI is running up (S592). That is, it is determined whether or not the R_ART that has moved through MICHI (BB5) is being upgraded toward LV.5 (PTR).

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S<b>592 that the MICHI is running up (YES in S<b>592 ), the sub CPU 81 ends the BB in-specific lip navigation conversion lottery process.

On the other hand, in S592, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the MICHI is not running up (when S592 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 keeps the RT01 game state (win number 1) or RT3 shift lip (win number). It is determined whether or not the winning is 8 to 13) (S593).

In S593, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the winning is not the maintenance lip (winning number 1) or the RT3 shift lip (winning numbers 8 to 13) in the RT01 gaming state (when S593 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 The specific LipNavi conversion lottery process in BB is completed.

On the other hand, in S593, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the winning is the maintenance lip (winning number 1) or the RT3 shift lip (winning numbers 8 to 13) during the RT01 gaming state (in the case of YES determination in S593), the sub The CPU 81 performs the BB specific lip navigation conversion lottery process (S594). In this process, the BB specific lip navigation conversion lottery table (see FIG. 151 and FIG. 152) is referred to, and based on the total value of FS points, whether or not the specific lip navigation is converted is determined by lottery.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the lottery result in S594 is “with conversion” (S595). In S595, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the lottery result in S594 is not “with conversion” (no conversion is performed) (NO in S595), the sub CPU 81 ends the BB-specific Lipnavi conversion fake lottery process. To do.

On the other hand, in S595, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the lottery result in S594 is “conversion” (when YES in S595), the sub CPU 81 turns on the specific Lipnavi conversion flag (S596). After the processing of S596, the sub CPU 81 ends the BB in-specific lip navigation conversion lottery processing.

[Lottery processing during MICHI]
Next, with reference to FIG. 195, the lottery processing during MICHI performed in S504 in the overall flow of operating the start lever (see FIG. 188) will be described. The lottery process during MICHI is performed at the time of the BB lottery process (S504) for each state during MICHI.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the BB temporary payout number is less than “45” (S601). In S601, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the BB provisional payout number is not less than "45" (NO in S601), the sub CPU 81 ends the MICHI lottery process and completes the process when the start lever is operated. The process moves to S505 in the flow (see FIG. 188).

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S601 that the BB provisional payout number is less than "45" (YES in S601), the sub CPU 81 performs B_RUSH EX point acquisition lottery processing (S602). In this processing, the EX point for B_RUSH is acquired by lottery based on the internal winning combination with reference to the lottery table for EX EX during B_RUSH (see FIGS. 98 to 103).

Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the B_RUSH EX point acquired in S602 to the B_RUSH EX point counter (S603).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (S604). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S604 that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is not 100 or more (NO in S604), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S607 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S604 that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (YES in S604), the sub CPU 81 performs the B_RUSH loop rate lottery process (S605). In this processing, the B_RUSH loop rate lottery table (see FIGS. 144 and 145) is referred to, and the type of the BR loop rate is randomly determined based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the BR loop rate type determined in S605 in the sub RAM 83, and initializes the B_RUSH EX point counter (S606). That is, the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is set to 0.

When S604 is NO, or after the processing of S606, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is the BB start first game (S607). When it is determined in S607 that the game is not the first game to start BB (NO in S607), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S617 described below.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S607 that the game is the BB start first game (YES in S607), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the current sub game state is the normal state (S608). In the processing of S608, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub gaming state is the normal state (YES in S608), the sub CPU 81 sets LV.1 of R_ART as the next sub gaming state. Then, the ART preparation flag is turned off (S609). After the processing of S609, the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S617 described below.

On the other hand, in the process of S608, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state is not the normal state (NO in S608), the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state is LV. It is determined whether or not (S610). In S610, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub gaming state is not LV.1 to LV.4 of R_ART (when S610 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S614 described below.

In S610, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state is R_ART LV.1 to 4 (in the case of YES determination in S610), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the MICHI flag is ON. Yes (S611). The MICHI flag is a flag for managing whether or not it is the R_ART that has moved through MICHI (BB5), and is stored in various flag storage areas (not shown). This MICHI flag is turned ON when C_BB5 is determined as an internal winning combination and the symbol combination corresponding to C_BB5 is stopped and displayed. Further, the MICHI flag is turned off when LV.5 (PTR) is started in R_ART that has moved after the end of “MICHI”.

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S611 that the MICHI flag is ON (YES in S611), the sub CPU 81 sets "20" in the ART game number counter (S612). After the processing of S612, the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S617 described later.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S611 that the MICHI flag is not ON (NO in S611), the sub CPU 81 performs the specialization start process described with reference to FIG. 193 (S613). After the processing of S613, the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S617 described later.

When S610 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the current sub game state is B_ART LV.5 or B_RUSH (S614). In S614, when it is determined that the current sub game state is B_ART LV.5 or B_RUSH (when S614 is YES determination), the sub CPU 81 sets R_ART LV.5 middle as the next sub game state. , The ART preparation flag is turned off (S615). After the processing of S615, the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S617 described later.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S614 that the current sub game state is not LV.5 or B_RUSH of B_ART (when S614 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 performs the specialization start process described with reference to FIG. 193. (S616).

After the processing of S609, S612, S613, S615, and S616, the sub CPU 81 adds the payout number of the winning combination to the provisional payout number (S617). After the processing of S617, the sub CPU 81 ends the lottery processing during MICHI, and moves the processing to S505 of the overall flow when the start lever is operated (see FIG. 188).

[Lottery processing at BB during ART]
Next, with reference to FIG. 196 to FIG. 199, the lottery process during ART BB performed in S504 in the overall flow of operating the start lever (see FIG. 188) will be described. The lottery process during BB during ART is performed during the lottery process during BB for each state during ART (S504).

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the BB temporary payout number is less than “45” (S621). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S621 that the BB provisional payout number is not less than "45" (NO in S621), the sub CPU 81 ends the BB during ART lottery process and operates the start lever. The entire time flow (see FIG. 188) moves to S505.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S621 that the BB temporary payout number is less than "45" (YES in S621), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the PTR stock is 1 or more. Yes (S622). In S622, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the PTR stock is not 1 or more (when S622 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S632 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S622 that the PTR stock is 1 or more (YES in S622), the sub CPU 81 performs the EX point acquisition lottery process for B_RUSH (S623). In this processing, the EX point for B_RUSH is acquired by lottery based on the internal winning combination with reference to the lottery table for EX EX during B_RUSH (see FIGS. 98 to 103).

Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the B_RUSH EX points acquired in S623 to the B_RUSH EX point counter (S624).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (S625). In S625, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is not 100 or more (NO in S625), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S628 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S625 that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (YES in S625), the sub CPU 81 performs the B_RUSH loop rate random determination process (S626). In this processing, the B_RUSH loop rate lottery table (see FIGS. 144 and 145) is referred to, and the type of the BR loop rate is randomly determined based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the BR loop rate type determined in S626 in the sub RAM 83, and initializes the B_RUSH EX point counter (S527). That is, the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is set to 0.

When the determination in S625 is NO, or after the processing in S627, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the MICHI flag is ON (S628).

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S628 that the MICHI flag is ON (YES in S628), the sub CPU 81 sets "20" in the ART game number counter (S629). After the processing of S629, the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S631 described later.

On the other hand, if the sub CPU 81 determines in S628 that the MICHI flag is not ON (NO in S628), the sub CPU 81 performs the specialization start process described with reference to FIG. 193 (S630).

After the processes of S629 and S630, the sub CPU 81 performs the BB specific lip navigation conversion fake lottery process described with reference to FIG. 192 (S631).

When S622 is NO, or after the processing of S631, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the PTR stock is 0 (S632). In S632, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the PTR stock is not 0 (NO in S632), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S678 (see FIG. 199) described later.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S632 that the PTR stock is 0 (YES in S632), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the EX point counter during R_ART is 100 or more. (S633). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S633 that the value of the EX point counter during R_ART is not 100 or more (NO in S633), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S653 (see FIG. 197) described later.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S633 that the value of the EX point counter during R_ART is 100 or more (YES in S633), the sub CPU 81 performs the PTR stock lottery process after reaching the specified point (S634). ). In this process, the PTR stock lottery table (see FIGS. 107 to 111) after the specified point is reached, and the winning or non-winning of the PTR stock is randomly determined based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the lottery result in S634 is a PTR stock win (S635). In S635, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the lottery result in S634 is not a PTR stock winning result (NO in S635), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S645 (see FIG. 197) described later.

On the other hand, in S635, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the lottery result in S634 is a PTR stock winning (when S635 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the PTR winning specialization type lottery process (S636). ). In this processing, the additional specialization type lottery table (see FIG. 118) at the time of PTR winning is referred to, and the additional specialization type is randomly determined based on the winning opportunity.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the additional specialization type determined in S636 in the sub RAM 83 (S637).

Next, the sub CPU 81 conducts initial EX point lottery processing at the time of level transition (S638). In this process, the EX_point for B_RUSH is randomly determined based on the level of the transfer destination by referring to the initial EX point random determination table at the time of level transition (see FIG. 106).

Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the B_RUSH EX points acquired in S638 to the B_RUSH EX point counter (S639).

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a B_RUSH mode shift lottery process (S640). In this processing, the B_RUSH mode transition lottery table (see FIG. 137) is referred to, and the mode type is randomly determined based on the type of the transition source.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs the specialization start process described with reference to FIG. 193 (S641).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (S642). In S642, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is not 100 or more (NO in S642), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S645 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S642 that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (YES in S642), the sub CPU 81 performs the B_RUSH loop rate lottery process (S643). In this processing, the B_RUSH loop rate lottery table (see FIGS. 144 and 145) is referred to, and the type of the BR loop rate is randomly determined based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the BR loop rate type determined in S643 in the sub RAM 83, and initializes the B_RUSH EX point counter (S644). That is, the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is set to 0.

When NO is determined in S635 and S642, or after the processing of S644, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the lottery result of S634 is a PTR stock winning (S645). In S645, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the lottery result in S634 is a PTR stock winning result (YES in S645), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S652 described below.

On the other hand, in S645, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the lottery result in S634 is a PTR stock winning result (when S645 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 indicates that the current sub game state is waiting for R_ART end or R_ART. It is determined whether or not it is in LV.1 (S646).

In S646, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state is waiting for the end of R_ART or LV.1 of R_ART (when YES is determined in S646), the sub CPU 81 sets R_ART as the next sub game state. LV.2 is set and the ART preparation flag is turned off (S647).

On the other hand, in S646, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state is not in the R_ART end standby or R_ART LV.1 (NO in S646), the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state is It is determined whether or not R_ART LV.2 is in progress (S648).

In S648, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state is in LV.2 of R_ART (when YES in S648), the sub CPU 81 is in LV.3 of R_ART as the next sub game state. Is set, and the ART preparation flag is turned off (S649).

On the other hand, in S648, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state is not in LV.2 of R_ART (when NO in S648), the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state is LV.3 of R_ART. It is determined whether or not it is in progress (S650).

In S650, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state is not in LV.3 of R_ART (when S650 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S652 described below. On the other hand, in S650, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state is LV.3 of R_ART (when YES is determined in S650), the sub CPU 81 sets the R_ART LV. 4 is set, and the ART preparation flag is turned off (S651).

If S645 is YES, if S650 is NO, or after the processes of S647, S649, and S651, the sub CPU 81 performs the BB specific Lip Navi conversion fake lottery process described with reference to FIG. 192 (S652).

In the case of NO determination in S633 or after the processing of S652, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the EX point during R_ART is less than 100 (S653). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S653 that the EX point in R_ART is not less than 100 (NO in S653), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S678 (see FIG. 199) described later.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S653 that the EX points during R_ART is less than 100 (YES in S653), the sub CPU 81 performs the BB in EX point acquisition lottery process (S654). In this processing, the EX point during R_ART is randomly determined based on the internal winning combination with reference to the lottery table for obtaining EX points during BB (see FIG. 104 and FIG. 105).

Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the EX point during R_ART determined in S654 to the EX point during R_ART counter (S655). Then, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the EX point during R_ART is 100 or more (S656). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S656 that the EX point during R_ART is not 100 or more (NO in S656), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S673 (see FIG. 199) described later.

On the other hand, in S656, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the EX point during R_ART is 100 or more (when YES is determined in S656), the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state is waiting for completion of R_ART or LV of R_ART. It is determined whether or not it is 1 (S657).

In S657, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state is waiting for the end of R_ART or in LV.1 of R_ART (when YES is determined in S657), the sub CPU 81 sets R_ART as the next sub game state. LV.2 is set and the ART preparation flag is turned off (S658). After the processing of S658, the sub CPU 81 carries out the processing of S673 (see FIG. 199) described later.

On the other hand, in S657, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state is not in the R_ART end standby or LV.1 LV.1 (when S657 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state is It is determined whether or not the LV.2 of R_ART is in progress (S659).

In S659, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state is LV.2 of R_ART (in the case of YES determination in S659), the sub CPU 81 determines that the next sub game state is LV.3 of R_ART. Is set, and the ART preparation flag is turned off (S660). After the processing of S660, the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S673 (see FIG. 199) described later.

On the other hand, in S659, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state is not in LV.2 of R_ART (when S659 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state is LV.3 of R_ART. It is determined whether or not it is in progress (S661).

In S661, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state is LV.3 of R_ART (when S661 is YES), the sub CPU 81 sets LV.4 of R_ART as the next sub game state. Is set, and the ART preparation flag is turned off (S662). After the processing of S662, the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S673 (see FIG. 199) described later.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S661 that the current sub game state is not in LV.3 of R_ART (when S661 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state is LV.4 of R_ART. It is determined whether or not it is in progress (S663).

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S663 that the current sub game state is not in LV.4 of R_ART (when S663 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S673 (see FIG. 199) described later.

On the other hand, in S663, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub gaming state is LV.4 of R_ART (when S663 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the PTR winning specialization type lottery process. Perform (S664). In this processing, the additional specialization type lottery table (see FIG. 118) at the time of PTR winning is referred to, and the additional specialization type is randomly determined based on the winning opportunity.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the additional specialization type determined in S664 in the sub RAM 83 (S665).

Next, the sub CPU 81 conducts initial EX point lottery processing at the time of level transition (S666). In this process, the EX_point for B_RUSH is randomly determined based on the level of the transfer destination by referring to the initial EX point random determination table at the time of level transition (see FIG. 106).

Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the EX point for B_RUSH acquired in S666 to the EX point counter for B_RUSH (S667).

Next, the sub CPU 81 conducts a B_RUSH mode transition lottery process (S668). In this processing, the B_RUSH mode transition lottery table (see FIG. 137) is referred to, and the mode type is randomly determined based on the type of the transition source.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs the specialization start process described with reference to FIG. 193 (S669).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (S670). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S670 that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is not 100 or more (NO in S670), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S673 (see FIG. 199) described later.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S670 that the value of the B_RUSH EX point counter is 100 or more (YES in S670), the sub CPU 81 performs the B_RUSH loop rate lottery process (S671). In this processing, the B_RUSH loop rate lottery table (see FIGS. 144 and 145) is referred to, and the type of the BR loop rate is randomly determined based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the BR loop rate type determined in S671 in the sub RAM 83, and initializes the B_RUSH EX point counter (S672). That is, the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is set to 0.

When NO is determined in S656, S663, and S670, or after the processes of S658, S660, S662, and S672, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the EX point during R_ART is less than 100 (S673). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S673 that the EX point in R_ART is not less than 100 (NO in S673), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S677 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S673 that the EX point during R_ART is less than 100 (YES in S673), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the current sub game state is waiting for R_ART end. Is determined (S674).

In S674, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state is waiting for the end of R_ART (when YES in S674), the sub CPU 81 sets LV.1 of R_ART as the next sub game state. Then, the ART preparation flag is turned off (S675). After the processing of S675, the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S677 described later.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S674 that the current sub game state is not waiting for the end of R_ART (when S674 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 sets "20" in the ART game number counter (S676). ).

In the case where S673 is NO, or after the processes of S675 and S676, the sub CPU 81 performs the BB-specific lip navigation conversion lottery process described with reference to FIG. 194 (S677).

When S632 and S653 are NO, or after the processing of S677, the sub CPU 81 adds the payout number of the winning combination to the provisional payout number (S678). After the processing of S678, the sub CPU 81 ends the BB during ART lottery processing, and moves the processing to S505 of the overall flow at the time of operating the start lever (see FIG. 188).

[BB illegal processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 200, the BB illegal processing performed in S504 in the overall flow of operating the start lever (see FIG. 188) will be described. This BB illegal processing is performed when the BB winning flag is OFF in S504 in the overall flow when the start lever is operated (see FIG. 188).

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the BB temporary payout number is less than “45” (S681). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S681 that the provisional payout amount in BB is not less than "45" (NO in S681), the sub CPU 81 ends the BB illegal process and executes the process when the start lever is operated. The process proceeds to S505 (see FIG. 188).

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S681 that the provisional payout amount in BB is less than "45" (YES in S681), the sub CPU 81 adds the payout number of the winning combination to the provisional payout number. (S682). After the processing of S682, the sub CPU 81 terminates the BB illegal processing, and moves the processing to S505 of the overall flow at the time of operating the start lever (see FIG. 188).

[Processing at the time of sub game state transition]
Next, with reference to FIG. 201 to FIG. 205, the sub game state transition time process performed in S509 in the overall flow at the time of operating the start lever (see FIG. 188) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 81 sets the current sub game state to the previous sub game state (S701).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the current sub game state and the next sub game state are different (S702). In S702, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state and the next sub game state are not different (NO in S702), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S776 (see FIG. 205) described later. ..

On the other hand, in S702, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state is different from the next sub game state (YES in S702), the sub CPU 81 initializes the aura game type and sets the aura game number. It is set to 0 (S703).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the current sub game state is waiting for the end of ART and the next sub game state is the normal state (S704). In S704, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state is waiting for the end of ART and the next sub game state is not the normal state (NO in S704), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S710 described later. I do.

On the other hand, in S704, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state is waiting for the end of ART and the next sub game state is the normal state (YES in S704), the sub CPU 81 directly hits ART. It is determined whether the flag is OFF (S705). The direct hit ART is to directly shift from the normal state to the R_ART without passing through the BB, and the direct hit ART flag is a flag for grasping whether or not the direct hit ART has been won, and stores various flags not shown. It is stored in the area. In S705, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the direct hit ART flag is OFF (YES in S705), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S710 described below.

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S705 that the direct hit ART flag is not OFF (NO in S705), the sub CPU 81 sets the direct hit ART flag to OFF and sets the direct hit ART winning grade to the ART grade ( S706). Further, in the processing of S706, LV.3 of R_ART is set to the next sub game state.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the current RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state (S707). In S707, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current RT gaming state is not the RT0 gaming state (NO in S707), the sub CPU 81 turns off the ART preparation flag (S708). After the processing of S708, the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S710 described later.

On the other hand, in S707, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state (YES in S707), the sub CPU 81 turns on the ART preparation flag (S709).

If S704 is NO, or after the processes of S708 and S709, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the next sub game state is the normal state (S710). In S710, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the next sub game state is not the normal state (NO in S710), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S713 described below.

On the other hand, in S710, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the next sub game state is the normal state (YES in S710), the sub CPU 81 performs the next specific mode MAP lottery process (S711). In this processing, the map type is determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination by referring to the next specific mode MAP lottery table (see FIGS. 59 and 60).

Next, the sub CPU 81 sets "0" as the specific mode MAP access number and sets the specific mode on the MAP as the next specific mode (S712).

If S710 is NO, or after the process of S712, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the next sub game state is LV.1 of R_ART (S713). In S713, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the next sub game state is not in LV.1 of R_ART (when S713 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S718 described below.

On the other hand, in S713, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the next sub game state is in LV.1 of R_ART (when S713 is YES determination), the sub CPU 81 sets the MICHI flag to OFF and the current sub game. It is determined whether or not the state is not waiting for ART termination (S714). When the determination in S714 is NO, the sub CPU 81 performs the processing in S717 described later.

On the other hand, in S714, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the MICHI flag is OFF and the current sub game state is not in the standby state for ending ART (when YES is determined in S714), the sub CPU 81 causes the initial EX at the time of level transition. Point lottery processing is performed (S715). In this process, the initial EX point random determination table at the time of level transition (see FIG. 106) is referred to, and the initial EX points are randomly determined based on the level of the transfer destination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the initial EX point determined in S715 to the EX point counter during R_ART (S716).

Next, the sub CPU 81 sets "20" in the ART game number counter (S717).

If the determination in S713 is NO, or after the processing in S717, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the next sub gaming state is LV.2 of R_ART (S718). In S718, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the next sub game state is not in LV.2 of R_ART (when S718 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S726 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S718 that the next sub game state is LV.2 of R_ART (YES in S718), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the MICHI flag is OFF. Yes (S719). If the sub CPU 81 determines in S719 that the MICHI flag is not OFF (NO in S719), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S722 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S719 that the MICHI flag is OFF (when S719 is YSE determination), the sub CPU 81 performs the level transition initial EX point lottery process (S720). In this process, the initial EX point random determination table at the time of level transition (see FIG. 106) is referred to, and the initial EX points are randomly determined based on the level of the transfer destination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the initial EX point determined in S720 to the EX point counter during R_ART (S721).

When the determination in S713 is NO, or after the processing in S721, the sub CPU 81 sets "20" in the ART game number counter (S722).

Next, the sub CPU 81 conducts LV.2 loop rate lottery processing (S723). In this processing, the LV.2 loop rate random determination table (see FIG. 112 and FIG. 113) is referred to, and the type of the LV.2 loop rate is randomly determined based on the grade type.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs the LV.2 loop lottery process (S724). In this processing, the LV.2 loop lottery table (see FIG. 114) is referred to, and the winning or non-winning of the LV.2 loop is randomly determined based on the type of the LV.2 loop rate.

Next, the sub CPU 81 conducts LV.2 opponent lottery processing (S725). In this process, the opponent lottery table (LV.2) (see FIG. 115) is referred to, and the opponent type is randomly determined based on the type of the LV.2 loop rate.

If the determination in S718 is NO, or after the processing in S725, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the next sub gaming state is LV.3 of R_ART (S726). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S726 that the next sub game state is not in LV.3 of R_ART (when S726 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S731 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S726 that the next sub game state is LV.3 of R_ART (when YES in S726), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the MICHI flag is OFF. Yes (S727). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S727 that the MICHI flag is not OFF (NO in S727), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S730 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S727 that the MICHI flag is OFF (YES in S727), the sub CPU 81 performs the initial EX point random determination process at the time of level transition (S728). In this process, the initial EX point random determination table at the time of level transition (see FIG. 106) is referred to, and the initial EX points are randomly determined based on the level of the transfer destination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the initial EX point determined in S728 to the EX point counter during R_ART (S729).

When S727 is NO, or after the process of S729, the sub CPU 81 sets "20" to the ART game number counter (S730).

If S726 is NO, or after the process of S730, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the next sub game state is LV.4 of R_ART (S731). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S731 that the next sub game state is not in LV.4 of R_ART (when S731 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S748 described later.

On the other hand, in S731, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the next sub game state is LV.4 of R_ART (YES in S731), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the MICHI flag is OFF. Yes (S732). In S732, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the MICHI flag is not OFF (NO in S732), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S747 described below.

On the other hand, if the sub CPU 81 determines in S732 that the MICHI flag is OFF (YES in S732), the sub CPU 81 performs the initial EX point random determination process at the time of level transition (S733). In this process, the initial EX point random determination table at the time of level transition (see FIG. 106) is referred to, and the initial EX points are randomly determined based on the level of the transfer destination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the initial EX point determined in S733 to the EX point counter during R_ART (S734).

Next, the sub CPU 81 sets the next LV.4 opponent mode to the current LV.4 opponent mode (S735).

Next, the sub CPU 81 conducts LV.4 opponent mode lottery processing (S736). In this process, the opponent mode random determination table (LV.4) (see FIG. 116) is referred to, and the opponent mode is randomly determined based on the previous opponent mode.

Next, the sub CPU 81 sets the opponent mode determined in S736 to the next LV.4 opponent mode (S737).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the EX point counter during R_ART is 100 or more (S738). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S738 that the value of the EX point counter during R_ART is not 100 or more (NO in S738), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S747 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S738 that the value of the EX point counter during R_ART is 100 or more (YES in S738), the sub CPU 81 performs the PTR winning additional specialization type lottery processing ( S739). In this process, the specialization type lottery table (see FIG. 118) for PTR winning is added, and the specialization type to be added is randomly determined based on the type of the winning opportunity.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the additional specialization type determined in S739 in the sub RAM 83 (S740).

Next, the sub CPU 81 conducts initial EX point lottery processing at the time of level transition (S741). In this process, the initial EX point random determination table at the time of level transition (see FIG. 106) is referred to, and the initial EX points are randomly determined based on the level of the transfer destination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the initial EX point determined in S741 to the EX point counter during R_ART (S742).

Next, the sub CPU 81 carries out a B_RUSH mode transition lottery process (S743). In this processing, the B_RUSH mode transition lottery table (see FIG. 137) is referred to, and the mode type is randomly determined based on the type of the transition source.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (S744). In S744, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is not 100 or more (NO in S744), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S747 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S744 that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (YES in S744), the sub CPU 81 performs the B_RUSH loop rate lottery process (S745). In this processing, the B_RUSH loop rate lottery table (see FIGS. 144 and 145) is referred to, and the type of the BR loop rate is randomly determined based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the BR loop rate type determined in S745 in the sub RAM 83, and initializes the B_RUSH EX point counter (S746). That is, the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is set to 0.

When NO is determined in S730, S738, and S744, or after the processing of S746, the sub CPU 81 sets "20" to the ART game number counter (S747).

When S731 is NO, or after the process of S747, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the next sub game state is specialization preparation (S748). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S748 that the next sub game state is not preparing for specialization next time (NO in S748), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S760 (see FIG. 204) described later.

On the other hand, in S748, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the next sub game state is specialization preparation (YES in S748), the sub CPU 81 turns on the specialization preparation preparation flag (S749). ..

If it is decided to start "RTG" during normal operation (RT0 to RT2 gaming state), if "RTG" is immediately started, RTG will be started in the RT0 to RT2 gaming state. In the present embodiment, in "RTG", "PTR" is stocked every time the symbol combination corresponding to F_RT4 special lip 3 or F_RT4 special lip 4 is stopped and displayed. The F_RT4 special lip 3 and the F_RT4 special lip 4 are internal winning combinations that can be won in the RT4 gaming state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the "RTG" is started after the RT game state shifts to the RT4 game state by the navigation.

Further, in the present embodiment, in “PREMIUM” of “PTR”, each time the symbol combination corresponding to F_RT4 special lip 1 or F_RT4 special lip 2 is stopped and displayed, the addition of the number of games in “PTR” is determined. .. The F_RT4 special lip 3 and the F_RT4 special lip 4 are internal winning combinations that can be won in the RT4 gaming state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the "PTR" is started after the RT game state shifts to the RT4 game state by the navigation. As a result, in the present embodiment, the special preparation-in-preparation preparation flag is provided in order to manage the timing of starting the “RTG” and the “PTR”.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not there is no additional specialization type during activation (S750). When it is determined in S750 that there is no additional specialization type during activation (NO in S750), the sub CPU 81 performs processing in S760 (see FIG. 204) described later.

On the other hand, when determining in S750 that there is no additional specialization type during activation (when YES is determined in S750), the sub CPU 81 sets the head of the PTR stock as the additional specialization type during activation and sets the PTR stock. Reduce by 1 (S751).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the additional specialization type during activation is "PREMIUM" (S752). In S752, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the additional specialization type during activation is “PREMIUM” (in the case of YES determination in S752), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S759 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S752 that the additional specialization type during activation is not “PREMIUM” (NO in S752), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the additional specialization type during activation is “FIGHTING”. It is determined whether or not (S753). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S753 that the additional specialization type during activation is “FIGHTING” (YES in S753), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S757 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S753 that the additional specialization type during activation is not "FIGHING" (NO in S753), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the additional specialization type during activation is "BURNING". It is determined whether or not (S754).

In S754, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the additional specialization type during activation is not “BURNING” (NO determination in S754), the sub CPU 81 sets “BURNING” as the additional specialization type during activation, and "5" is set to the number-of-guaranteed games counter (S755). The special guarantee game number counter is a counter for managing the special guarantee game number in the PTR. After the processing of S755, the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S760 described later.

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S754 that the additional specialization type during activation is "BURNING" (YES in S754), the sub CPU 81 sets "5" in the specialization guaranteed game number counter ( S756). After the processing of S756, the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S760 described later.

In the case of YES determination in S753, the sub CPU 81 sets "5" in the specialization guaranteed game number counter (S757). Then, the sub CPU 81 performs the FIGHTING medium loop rate lottery process (S758). In this processing, the FIGHTING medium loop rate random determination table (see FIG. 123) is referred to, and the FIGHT loop rate type is randomly determined. After the processing of S758, the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S760 described later.

In the case of YES determination in S752, the sub CPU 81 sets "10" to the specialization guaranteed game number counter and sets "50" to the LV.5 remaining game number counter of R_ART (S759).

When S748 and S750 are NO determinations, or after the processing of S755, S756, S758 and S759, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the next sub gaming state is RTG (S760). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S760 that the next sub game state is not in the RTG (when S760 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S764 described later.

On the other hand, in S760, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the next sub game state is RTG (YES in S760), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not there is an additional specialization type during activation ( S761). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S<b>761 that there is an additional specialization type during activation (YES in S<b>761 ), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S764 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S761 that there is no additional specialization type during activation (when NO in S761), the sub CPU 81 sets the top of the PTR stock as the additional specialization type during activation, and the PTR stock is set. The stock is decremented by 1 (S762).

Next, the sub CPU 81 sets "20" to the specialization guaranteed game number counter and "50" to the LV.5 remaining game number counter of R_ART (S763).

When S760 is NO determination, S761 is YES determination, or after the processing of S763, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the next sub gaming state is in "PREMIUM" (S764). In S764, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the next sub game state is not in "PREMIUM" (NO in S764), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S768 (see FIG. 205) described later.

On the other hand, in S764, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the next sub game state is "PREMIUM" (YES in S764), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not there is an additional specialization type during activation. It is determined (S765). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S765 that there is an additional specialization type during activation (YES in S765), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S768 (see FIG. 205) described later.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S765 that there is no additional specialization type during activation (when NO in S765), the sub CPU 81 sets the head of the PTR stock as the additional specialization type during activation, and the PTR stock is set. The stock is decremented by 1 (S766).

Next, the sub CPU 81 sets “10” to the special guarantee game number counter and sets “50” to the LV.5 remaining game number counter of R_ART (S767).

When S764 is NO determination, S765 is YES determination, or after the processing of S767, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the next sub game state is "FIGHING" (S768). In S768, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the next sub game state is not "FIGHING" (NO in S768), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S773 described below.

On the other hand, in S768, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the next sub game state is "FIGHING" (YES in S768), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not there is an additional specialization type during activation. It is determined (S769). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S769 that there is an additional specialization type during activation (YES in S769), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S773 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S769 that there is no additional specialization type during activation (NO in S769), the sub CPU 81 sets the top of the PTR stock as the additional specialization type during activation, and the PTR stock is set. The stock is reduced by 1 (S770).

Next, the sub CPU 81 sets "5" in the specialization guaranteed game number counter (S771). Then, the sub CPU 81 performs the FIGHTING medium loop rate lottery process (S772). In this processing, the FIGHTING medium loop rate random determination table (see FIG. 123) is referred to, and the FIGHT loop rate type is randomly determined.

If S768 is NO, if S769 is YES, or after the processing of S772, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the next sub gaming state is "BURNING" (S773). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S773 that the next sub game state is not "BURNING" (NO in S773), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S777 described later.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S773 that the next sub game state is "BURNING" (YES in S773), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not there is an additional specialization type during activation. It is determined (S774). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S774 that there is an additional specialization type during activation (YES in S774), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S777 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S774 that there is no additional specialization type during activation (NO in S774), the sub CPU 81 sets the top of the PTR stock as the additional specialization type during activation, and the PTR stock is set. The stock is reduced by 1 (S775). Then, the sub CPU 81 sets "5" in the specialization guaranteed game number counter (S776).

When S773 is NO determination, S774 is YES determination, or after the processing of S776, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the next sub game state is LV.5 of R_ART (S777). In S777, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the next sub game state is not in LV.5 of R_ART (when S777 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S779 described below.

On the other hand, in S777, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the next sub game state is LV.5 of R_ART (when S777 is YES determination), the sub CPU 81 sets none as the addition special type during activation. Then, the MICHI flag is turned off (S778).

When S777 is NO determination, or after the processing of S778, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the next sub gaming state is "B_RUSH" (S779). In the process of S779, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the next sub game state is not "B_RUSH" (NO in S779), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S782 described below.

On the other hand, in the processing of S779, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the next sub gaming state is "B_RUSH" (YES in S779), the sub CPU 81 sets "3" in the B_RUSH game number counter. Yes (S780). Then, the sub CPU 81 subtracts 1 from the B_RUSH stock (S781).

If S779 is NO, or after the process of S781, the sub CPU 81 sets the next sub game state to the current sub game state (S782). After the processing of S782, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing at the time of shifting to the sub gaming state, and moves the processing to S510 of the overall flow at the time of operating the start lever (see FIG. 188).

[Normal lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 206 to FIG. 209, the normal lottery processing performed in S510 in the overall flow when the start lever is operated (see FIG. 188) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the RT gaming state after winning the previous game is the RT2 gaming state (S801). In S801, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT gaming state after the winning of the previous game is not the RT2 gaming state (NO in S801), the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S807 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S801 that the RT gaming state after winning the previous game is the RT2 gaming state (YES in S801), the sub CPU 81 turns on the direct hit ART high-precision stock subtraction flag. Then, the RT2 game number counter is incremented by 1 (S802). The RT2 game number counter is a counter for managing the number of games in the RT2 gaming state.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the RT2 game number counter exceeds 30 (S803). When the sub CPU 81 determines in step S803 that the value of the RT2 game number counter does not exceed 30 (NO in step S803), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of step S807 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S803 that the value of the RT2 game number counter exceeds 30 (YES in S803), the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the direct hit ART high accuracy stock number counter is 1 or more. It is determined whether or not (S804). The direct hit ART high accuracy stock number counter is a counter for managing the stock number of the direct hit ART.

In S804, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of direct hit ART highly accurate stocks is 1 or more (YES in S804), the sub CPU 81 subtracts 1 from the value of the direct hit ART highly accurate stock number counter (S805. ).

In S804, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of direct hit ART highly accurate stocks is not 1 or more (NO in S804), or after the processing of S805, the sub CPU 81 clears the RT2 game number counter (S806). .. That is, the value of the RT2 game number counter is set to zero.

When S803 and S801 are NO determinations, or after the processing of S806, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the RT game state after winning the previous game is the RT2 game state (S807). In S807, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT game state after the winning of the previous game is not the RT2 game state (NO in S807), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S813 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S807 that the RT gaming state after winning the previous game is the RT2 gaming state (YES in S807), the sub CPU 81 clears the RT2 game number counter (S808). ).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the direct hit ART high accuracy stock subtraction flag is ON (S809). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S809 that the direct hit ART high-accuracy stock subtraction flag is not ON (NO in S809), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S813 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S807 that the direct hit ART high accuracy stock subtraction flag is ON (YES in S809), the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the direct hit ART high accuracy stock number counter is 1 or more. It is determined whether there is any (S810).

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S810 that the value of the direct hit ART high accuracy stock number counter is 1 or more (in the case of YES determination in S810), the sub CPU 81 subtracts 1 from the value of the direct hit ART high accuracy stock number counter. Yes (S811).

In S810, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the direct hit ART high accuracy stock number is not 1 or more (when S810 is NO determination), or after the processing of S811, the sub CPU 81 turns off the direct hit ART high accuracy stock number subtraction flag. (S812).

When NO is determined in S807 and S809, or after the processing of S812, the sub CPU 81 sets the next specific mode to the current specific mode (S813).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is a BB winning game (S814). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S814 that the game is a BB winning game (YES in S810), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S817 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S814 that it is not the BB winning game (NO in S810), the sub CPU 81 performs the specific mode transition lottery process (S815). In this process, the specific mode transition lottery table (see FIGS. 61 and 62) is referred to, and the mode type is randomly determined based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 sets the determined mode type, which is the lottery result in S815, as the next specific mode (S816).

In the case of YES determination in S814 or after the processing of S816, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the type of the precursor is non-precursor (S817). In S817, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the type of the omen is not a non omen (when the determination in S817 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S827 described below.

On the other hand, in S817, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the type of the sign is not a sign (when the determination in S817 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state or the BB winning game. It is determined whether or not (S818). In S818, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT game state is not the RT2 game state or the BB winning game (NO in S818), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S827 described below.

In S818, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state or the BB winning game (YES in S818), the sub CPU 81 performs the ART lottery process (S819). In this processing, the ART lottery table (see FIGS. 64 and 65) is referred to, and the winning or non-winning of the R_ART is randomly determined based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the lottery result of S819 is a winning of R_ART (S820). In S820, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the lottery result of S819 is not the winning of R_ART (when S820 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S827 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S820 that the lottery result in S819 is a winning of R_ART (when YES in S820), the sub CPU 81 performs the ART grade lottery process (S821). In this process, the ART grade lottery table (see FIGS. 71 to 73) is referred to, and the grade type is randomly determined based on the type of the specific mode. In the process of S821, an ART grade lottery table (direct hit ART) (not shown) is referred to.

Next, the sub CPU 81 sets the lottery result (determined grade type) of S821 as the grade of the direct hit ART, and turns on the direct hit ART flag (S822).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is a BB winning game (S823). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S823 that the game is not a BB winning game (NO in S823), the sub CPU 81 sets ART omen in progress as the type of omen (S824).

In S823, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the game is a BB winning game (YES in S823), or after the process of S824, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the value of the direct hit ART high accuracy stock number counter is 1 or more. It is determined whether or not (S825). In S825, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the direct hit ART high accuracy stock number counter is not 1 or more (NO in S825), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S827 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S825 that the value of the direct hit ART high accuracy stock number counter is 1 or more (in the case of YES determination in S825), the sub CPU 81 determines the value of the direct hit ART high accuracy stock number counter. 1 is subtracted (S826).

When NO is determined in S817, S818, S820, and S825, or after the processing of S826, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is a BB winning game (S827). In S827, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the game is not the BB winning game (NO in S827), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S846 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S827 that the game is a BB winning game (YES in S827), the sub CPU 81 initializes the type of the omen and turns off the direct hit ART high accuracy stock subtraction flag ( S828).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the MICHI (BB5) is won (S829). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S829 that the MICHI (BB5) is not a win (when S829 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S842 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S829 that the MICHI (BB5) is a win (when S829 is NO), the sub CPU 81 turns on the MICHI flag (S830).

Next, the sub CPU 81 conducts ART grade lottery processing (S831). Then, the sub CPU 81 sets the lottery result (determined grade type) of S831 as the ART grade (S832).

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs an initial EX point random determination process at the time of level transition (S833). In this process, the initial EX point random determination table at the time of level transition (see FIG. 106) is referred to, and the initial EX points are randomly determined based on the level of the transfer destination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the initial EX point determined in S833 to the EX point counter during R_ART (S834).

Next, the sub CPU 81 conducts LV.4 opponent mode lottery processing (S835). In this process, the opponent mode random determination table (LV.4) (see FIG. 116) is referred to, and the opponent mode is randomly determined based on the previous opponent mode.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a B_RUSH mode shift lottery process (S836). In this processing, the B_RUSH mode transition lottery table (see FIG. 137) is referred to, and the mode type is randomly determined based on the type of the transition source.

Next, the sub CPU 81 carries out specialization type lottery processing upon addition of PTR winning (S837). In this processing, the additional specialization type lottery table (see FIG. 118) at the time of PTR winning is referred to, and the additional specialization type is randomly determined based on the winning opportunity. Then, the sub CPU 81 stores the additional specialization type determined in S837 in the sub RAM 83 (S838).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (S839). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S839 that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is not 100 or more (NO in S839), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S842 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S839 that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (YES in S839), the sub CPU 81 performs the B_RUSH loop rate lottery process (S840). In this processing, the B_RUSH loop rate lottery table (see FIGS. 144 and 145) is referred to, and the type of the BR loop rate is randomly determined based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the BR loop rate type determined in S840 in the sub RAM 83, and initializes the B_RUSH EX point counter (S841). That is, the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is set to 0.

When NO is determined in S829 and S839, or after the processing of S841, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the winning is MICHI (BB5) (S842). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S842 that the MICHI (BB5) has been won (in the case of YES determination in S842), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S846 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S842 that the MICHI (BB5) is not won (when S842 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 performs the CZ initial FS point lottery process (S843). In this process, the CZ initial FS point lottery table (see FIG. 66) is referred to, and the initial FS points are randomly determined based on the mode type.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the specific mode MAP access position is the final position (S844). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S844 that the specific mode MAP access position is the final position (YES in S844), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S846 described below.

On the other hand, in S844, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the specific mode MAP access position is not the final position (NO in S844), the sub CPU 81 increments the specific mode MAP access number by 1, and the next specific mode MAP is performed. The specific mode above is set (S845).

If S827 is NO, if S842 and S844 are YES, after the processing of S845, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is a BB winning game (S846). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S846 that the game is a BB winning game (YES in S846), the sub CPU 81 ends the normal lottery process, and the process is the start lever operation overall flow (see FIG. 188). Move to S511 inside.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S846 that it is not the BB winning game (NO in S846), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the type of the omen is ART omen (S847). In S847, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the type of the precursor is not ART precursor (when the determination in S847 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S855 described below.

In S847, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the type of the sign is ART sign (in the case of YES determination in S847), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state (S848). ). In S848, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT game state is the RT2 game state (YES in S848), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S852 described below.

On the other hand, in S848, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT gaming state is not the RT2 gaming state (NO in S848), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state ( S849).

In S849, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT game state is not the RT0 game state (NO in S849), the sub CPU 81 sets the direct hit ART grade as the ART grade and turns off the direct hit ART flag. Further, the next sub game state is set to LV.3 LV.3 and the ART preparation flag is turned off (S850). After the processing of S850, the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S855.

On the other hand, in S849, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT game state is the RT0 game state (YES in S849), the sub CPU 81 sets the direct hit ART grade to the ART grade and turns off the direct hit ART flag. To Also, the next sub game state is set to LV.3 LV.3 and the ART preparation flag is turned ON (S851). After the processing of S851, the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S855.

In the case of YES determination in S848, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the ART remaining game number counter is 0 (S852). In S852, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the RT remaining game number counter is not 0 (NO in S849), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S855 described below.

On the other hand, in S852, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the RT remaining game number counter is 0 (YES in S849), the sub CPU 81 sets the direct hit ART grade as the ART grade and the direct hit ART flag. Turn off. Also, the next sub game state is set to LV.3 in R_ART, and the ART preparation flag is turned on (S853).

Next, the sub CPU 81 turns off the direct hit ART high accuracy stock number subtraction flag (S854).

When S847 and S852 are NO determinations, or after the processes of S850, S851, and S853, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the type of the omen is ART omen (S855). In S855, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the type of the sign is ART sign (when the determination in S855 is YES), the sub CPU 81 ends the normal lottery process, and the process is the entire flow when the start lever is operated ( (See FIG. 188) and moves to S511.

In S855, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the type of the precursor is not ART precursor (when the determination in S855 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state (S856). .. In S856, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT game state is not the RT2 game state (S856 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 ends the normal lottery process, and the process is the entire flow when the start lever is operated (Fig. 188)).

In S856, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state (YES in S856), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the ART remaining game number counter is 0. (S857). In S857, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the ART remaining game number counter is not 0 (NO in S857), the sub CPU 81 ends the normal lottery process, and the process is the entire flow when the start lever is operated. (See FIG. 188) and moves to S511.

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S857 that the value of the ART remaining game number counter is 0 (YES in S857), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the value of the direct hit ART high accuracy stock number counter is 1 or more. It is determined whether or not (S858).

In S858, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of direct hit ART high accuracy stocks is 1 or more (YES in S858), the sub CPU 81 subtracts 1 from the value of the direct hit ART high accuracy stock number counter (S859). ).

In S859, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the direct hit ART high accuracy stock number is not 1 or more (when S858 is NO determination), or after the processing of S859, the sub CPU 81 sets the direct hit ART high accuracy stock number subtraction flag. It is turned off (S860). After the processing of S860, the sub CPU 81 ends the normal lottery processing, and moves the processing to S511 in the overall flow of the start lever operation (see FIG. 188).

[Processing at the end of BB]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 210 and 211, a BB end process performed when terminating various BBs will be described. This BB end processing is performed when the sub control circuit 42 receives the bonus end command in S313 described above.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state (S871). In S871, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT gaming state is not the RT0 gaming state (NO in S871), the sub CPU 81 turns off the ART preparation flag (S872). After the processing of S872, the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S878, which will be described later.

On the other hand, in S871, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state (YES in S871), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the sub gaming state is in LV.1 to 5 of R_ART. It is determined whether or not (S873).

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S873 that the sub game state is not in LV.1 to 5 of R_ART (NO in S873), the sub CPU 81 turns off the ART preparation flag (S874). After the processing of S874, the sub CPU 81 carries out the processing of S878 described later.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S873 that the sub game state is in LV.1 to 5 of R_ART (when S873 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether RB is established (in RB). It is determined whether or not the corresponding symbol combination has been displayed at least once (S875).

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S875 that RB is established (YES in S875), the sub CPU 81 turns off the ART preparation flag (S876). After the processing of S876, the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S878 described later.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S875 that the RB is not established (NO in S875), the sub CPU 81 turns on the ART preparation flag (S877).

After the processing of S872, S874, S876 and S877, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state (S878). In S878, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT game state is the RT0 game state (YES in S878), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S881 described below.

On the other hand, in S878, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT gaming state is not the RT0 gaming state (NO in S878), the sub CPU 81 determines that the next sub gaming state is “PREMIUM”, “FIGHTING”, “BURNING”. ,” or “RTG” is determined (S879).

In S879, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the next sub game state is not one of "PREMIUM", "FIGHING", "BURNING", and "RTG" (when NO is determined in S879), the sub CPU 81 will be described later. The processing of S884 is performed.

On the other hand, in S879, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the next sub game state is any of "PREMIUM", "FIGHING", "BURNING", and "RTG" (when S879 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 Sets special preparation in progress for the next sub game state (S880). After the processing of S880, the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S884 described later.

When S878 is YES, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not RB is established (whether or not there is a display of a symbol combination corresponding to RB even once) (S881). In S881, when the sub CPU 81 determines that RB is established (YES in S881), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S884 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S881 that the RB is not established (NO in S881), the sub CPU 81 determines that the next sub gaming state is "PREMIUM", "FIGHING", "BURNING", "RTG". It is determined whether or not any of the above (S882).

In S882, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the next sub game state is not one of "PREMIUM", "FIGHING", "BURNING", and "RTG" (when NO in S882), the sub CPU 81 will be described later. The processing of S884 is performed.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S882 that the next sub game state is any one of "PREMIUM", "FIGHING", "BURNING", and "RTG" (when S882 is YES), the sub CPU 81 Sets special preparation in progress for the next sub game state (S883).

When S879 and S882 are NO determinations, when S881 is YES determinations, or after the processing of S880 and S883, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the BB winning flag is ON (S884). In S884, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the BB winning flag is not ON (NO in S884), the sub CPU 81 ends the BB end processing.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S884 that the BB winning flag is ON (YES in S884), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the next sub game state is the normal state. (S885). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S885 that the next sub game state is not in the normal state (NO in S885), the sub CPU 81 ends the BB end process.

On the other hand, in S885, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the next sub game state is the normal state (YES in S885), the sub CPU 81 performs the CZ end high-precision stock lottery process (S886). .. In this process, the high-probability stock lottery table at the end of CZ (see FIG. 69) is referred to, and the high-probability stock number is randomly determined based on the RT gaming state.

Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the lottery result of S886 (the determined high-precision stock number) to the direct hit ART high-precision stock number counter (S887). After the processing of S887, the sub CPU 81 ends the BB end processing.

[Processing during LV.1]
Next, with reference to FIG. 210 to FIG. 214, the LV.1 middle processing performed when the start lever in LV.1 LV.1 is operated will be described.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the ART preparation flag is ON (S901). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S901 that the ART preparation flag is not ON (NO in S901), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S904 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S901 that the ART preparation flag is ON (YES in S901), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the current RT game state is the RT0 game state. Yes (S902). In S902, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state (YES in S902), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S904 described later.

On the other hand, in S902, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current RT gaming state is not the RT0 gaming state (NO in S902), the sub CPU 81 turns off the ART preparation flag (S903).

If S901 is NO, S902 is YES, or after the processing of S903, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the ART preparation flag is OFF (S904). When the sub CPU 81 determines in step S904 that the ART preparation flag is not OFF (NO in step S904), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of step S907 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S904 that the ART preparation flag is OFF (YES in S904), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the ART game number counter is 1 or more. Yes (S905). In S905, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the ART game number counter is not 1 or more (NO in S905), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S907 described below.

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S905 that the value of the ART game number counter is 1 or more (YES in S905), the sub CPU 81 subtracts 1 from the value of the ART game number counter (S906).

When S904 and S905 are NO, or after the processing of S906, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the PTR stock is 1 or more (S907). When the sub CPU 81 determines in step S907 that the PTR stock is not 1 or more (NO in step S907), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of step S913 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S907 that the PTR stock is 1 or more (YES in S907), the sub CPU 81 performs the EX point acquisition lottery process for B_RUSH (S908). In this processing, the EX point for B_RUSH is acquired by lottery based on the internal winning combination with reference to the lottery table for EX EX during B_RUSH (see FIGS. 98 to 103). Then, the determined B_RUSH EX point is added to the B_RUSH EX point counter.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (S909). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S909 that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is not 100 or more (NO in S909), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S912 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S909 that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (YES in S909), the sub CPU 81 performs the B_RUSH loop rate lottery process (S910). In this processing, the B_RUSH loop rate lottery table (see FIGS. 144 and 145) is referred to, and the type of the BR loop rate is randomly determined based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the BR loop rate type determined in S910 in the sub RAM 83, and initializes the B_RUSH EX point counter (S911). That is, the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is set to 0.

When S909 is NO, or after the process of S911, the sub CPU 81 performs the LV.1,3 medium fake specific Lipnavi conversion lottery process (S912). The details of the fake specific lip navigation conversion lottery process in LV. 1 and 3 will be described later with reference to FIG.

If S907 is NO, or after the process of S912, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the PTR stock is 0 (S913). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S913 that the PTR stock is not 0 (NO in S913), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S929 (see FIG. 213) described later.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S913 that the PTR stock is 0 (in the case of YES determination in S913), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the FS point counter during ART is 100 or more. (S914). In S914, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the ART FS point counter is not 100 or more (NO in S914), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S926 (see FIG. 213) described later.

In S914, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the CZ medium FS point counter is 100 or more (in the case of YES determination in S914), the sub CPU 81 performs the PTR stock lottery process after reaching the intermediate regulation point (S915). .. In this processing, the PTR stock lottery table (LV.1) (see FIG. 107) after the specified point is reached, and the winning or non-winning of the PTR stock is determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the lottery result in S915 is a PTR stock win (S916). When the sub CPU 81 determines in step S916 that the PTR stock is not a winning symbol (NO in step S916), the sub CPU 81 performs processing of step S925 (see FIG. 213) described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S916 that the PTR stock is a win (in the case of YES determination in S916), the sub CPU 81 performs the specialization type lottery process when the PTR win is added (S917). In this processing, the additional specialization type lottery table (see FIG. 118) at the time of PTR winning is referred to, and the additional specialization type is randomly determined based on the winning opportunity.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the additional specialization type determined in S917 in the sub RAM 83 (S918).

Next, the sub CPU 81 conducts initial EX point lottery processing at the time of level transition (S919). In this process, the initial EX point random determination table at the time of level transition (see FIG. 106) is referred to, and the initial EX points are randomly determined based on the level type of the transfer destination. That is, in S919, EX points for B_RUSH are determined.

Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the B_RUSH EX points acquired in S919 to the B_RUSH EX point counter (S920).

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs the B_RUSH mode shift lottery process (S921). In this processing, the B_RUSH mode transition lottery table (see FIG. 137) is referred to, and the mode type is randomly determined based on the type of the transition source.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (S922). In S922, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is not 100 or more (NO in S922), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S925 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S922 that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (YES in S922), the sub CPU 81 performs the B_RUSH loop rate random determination process (S923). In this processing, the B_RUSH loop rate lottery table (see FIGS. 144 and 145) is referred to, and the type of the BR loop rate is randomly determined based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the BR loop rate type determined in S923 in the sub RAM 83, and initializes the B_RUSH EX point counter (S924). That is, the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is set to 0.

When S916 and S922 are NO determinations, or after the processing of S924, the sub CPU 81 performs the LV.1,3 middle fake specific Lipnavi conversion lottery processing (S925).

If the determination in S914 is NO, or after the processing in S925, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the EX point counter during R_ART is less than 100 (S926). In S926, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter during R_ART is not less than 100 (NO in S926), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S929 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S926 that the value of the EX point counter during R_ART is less than 100 (YES in S926), the sub CPU 81 determines the EX point acquisition lottery in LV.1,3,4. Processing is performed (S927). In this processing, the EX points during LV.1 acquisition lottery table (see FIGS. 77 to 79) is referred to, and the EX points are randomly determined based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 carries out the LV.1, 3, 5 medium-specific lip navigation conversion lottery processing (S928). The details of the LV.1, 3 and 5 medium specific Lip Navi conversion lottery processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

When NO is determined in S913 and S926, or after the process of S928, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is a BB winning game (S929). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S929 that the game is not the BB winning game (NO in S929), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S940 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S929 that the game is a BB winning game (YES in S929), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the MICHI (BB5) is a winning game (S930). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S930 that the MICHI (BB5) is not a win (in the case of NO determination in S930), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S940 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S930 that the winning is MICHI (BB5) (YES in S930), the sub CPU 81 performs the PTR winning specialization type lottery process (S931). In this processing, the additional specialization type lottery table (see FIG. 118) at the time of PTR winning is referred to, and the additional specialization type is randomly determined based on the winning opportunity.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the additional specialization type determined in S931 in the sub RAM 83 (S932).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the PTR stock number is 1 (S933). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S933 that the number of PTR stocks is not 1 (when S933 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S940 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S933 that the number of PTR stocks is 1 (YES in S933), the sub CPU 81 performs the initial EX point random determination process at the time of level transition (S934). In this process, the initial EX point random determination table at the time of level transition (see FIG. 106) is referred to, and the initial EX points are randomly determined based on the level type of the transfer destination. That is, in S934, EX points for B_RUSH are determined.

Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the B_RUSH EX points acquired in S934 to the B_RUSH EX point counter (S935).

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a B_RUSH mode shift lottery process (S936). In this processing, the B_RUSH mode transition lottery table (see FIG. 137) is referred to, and the mode type is randomly determined based on the type of the transition source.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (S937). In S937, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is not 100 or more (NO in S937), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S940 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S937 that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (YES in S937), the sub CPU 81 performs the B_RUSH loop rate lottery process (S938). In this processing, the B_RUSH loop rate lottery table (see FIGS. 144 and 145) is referred to, and the type of the BR loop rate is randomly determined based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the BR loop rate type determined in S938 in the sub RAM 83, and initializes the B_RUSH EX point counter (S939). That is, the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is set to 0.

When S929, S930, S933, and S937 are NO determinations, or after the processing of S939, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is a BB winning game (S940). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S940 that the game is the BB winning game (YES in S940), the sub CPU 81 ends the process in LV.1.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S940 that it is not the BB winning game (NO in S940), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the ART preparation flag is OFF (S941). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S941 that the ART preparation flag is not OFF (NO in S941), the sub CPU 81 ends the LV.1 medium processing.

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S941 that the ART preparation flag is OFF (YES in S941), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the ART game number counter is 0 (S942). ). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S942 that the value of the ART game number counter is not 0 (NO in S942), the sub CPU 81 ends the LV.1 medium processing.

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S942 that the value of the ART game number counter is 0 (YES in S942), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the MICHI flag is ON (S943).

In S943, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the MICHI flag is ON (YES in S943), the sub CPU 81 sets LV.2 in R_ART as the next sub gaming state and is preparing for ART. The flag is turned off (S944). After the processing of S944, the sub CPU 81 ends the LV.1 medium processing.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S943 that the MICHI flag is not ON (NO in S943), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the PTR stock number is 1 or more (S945).

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S945 that the number of PTR stocks is 1 or more (YES in S945), the sub CPU 81 performs the add-on specialization transition process (S946). Note that details of the additional specialization transition processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 217 described later. After the processing of S946, the sub CPU 81 ends the LV.1 medium processing.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S945 that the PTR stock number is not 1 or more (NO in S945), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the EX point counter during R_ART is 100 or more. Yes (S947).

In S947, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter during R_ART is 100 or more (YES in S947), the sub CPU 81 sets LV.2 in R_ART as the next sub game state. Then, the ART preparation flag is turned off (S948). After the processing of S948, the sub CPU 81 ends the LV.1 medium processing.

On the other hand, in S947, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter in R_ART is not 100 or more (when S947 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 sets the next sub game state to wait for ART end. (S949). After the processing of S949, the sub CPU 81 ends the LV.1 medium processing.

[LV.1,3 medium fake specific LipNavi conversion lottery process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 215, the LV.1,3 middle fake specific lip navigation conversion lottery processing will be described.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether it is the 1st G (game) or the last G (game) in LV. 1 and 3 (S961). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S961 that it is the first G or the last G in LV.1, 3 (when S961 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines the fake specific Lipnavi conversion lottery process in LV.1,3. To finish.

On the other hand, in S961, when the sub CPU 81 determines that it is not the first G in LV. 1 or 3 or the final G (when S961 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the ART preparation flag is OFF. Is determined (S962). When it is determined in S962 that the ART preparation flag is not OFF (NO in S962), the sub CPU 81 ends the LV.1,3 middle fake specific Lipnavi conversion lottery process.

When it is determined in S962 that the ART preparing flag is OFF (YES in S962), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the MICHI is running up (S963). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S963 that the MICHI is running up (YES in S963), the sub CPU 81 ends the LV.1,3 middle fake specific lip navigation conversion lottery process.

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S963 that the MICHI is not running up (when NO is determined in S963), the sub CPU 81 wins the winning numbers “14” to “24” by the internal lottery process (see FIG. 167). It is determined whether or not (S964). In S964, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the winning numbers “14” to “24” have not been won (when S964 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 determines the fake specific Lipnavi conversion lottery process in LV.1,3. To finish.

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S964 that the winning numbers “14” to “24” have been won (YES in S964), the sub CPU 81 performs the fake specific Lipnavi conversion lottery process during ART (S965). In this process, the fake specific Lipnavi conversion lottery table (LV.1, 3) in ART (refer to FIG. 159) is referred to and the presence or absence of the specific Lipnavi conversion is randomly determined.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the lottery result of S965 indicates conversion (S966). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S966 that the lottery result of S965 is not converted (when S966 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 ends the LV.1,3 middle fake specific Lipnavi conversion lottery process.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S966 that the lottery result of S965 indicates conversion (when YES is determined in S966), the sub CPU 81 turns on the specific Lipnavi conversion flag (S967). After the processing of S967, the sub CPU 81 ends the LV.1,3 middle fake specific lip navigation conversion lottery processing.

[Specific Rip Navi conversion lottery process in LV. 1, 3, 5]
Next, with reference to FIG. 216, the specific Lipnavi conversion lottery process in the LV.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether it is the 1st G (game) or the last G (game) in LV. 1 and 3 (S971). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S971 that it is the first G or the last G in LV.1, 3 (when YES is determined in S971), the sub CPU 81 determines the specific Lipnavi conversion lottery in LV.1, 3, 5. The process ends.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S971 that it is not the first G in LV. 1 or 3 or the final G (NO in S971), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the ART preparation flag is OFF. Is determined (S972). When determining in S972 that the ART in-progress flag is not OFF (NO in S972), the sub CPU 81 ends the LV.1, 3, 5, middle-specific Lipnavi conversion lottery process.

When it is determined in S972 that the ART preparation flag is OFF (YES in S972), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the MICHI is running up (S973). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S973 that the MICHI is running up (when YES is determined in S973), the sub CPU 81 ends the LV.1, 3, 5, medium-specific Lipnavi conversion lottery process.

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S973 that the MICHI is not running up (when NO is determined in S973), the sub CPU 81 wins the winning numbers “14” to “24” by the internal lottery process (see FIG. 167). It is determined whether or not (S974). In S974, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the winning numbers “14” to “24” have not been won (in the case where S974 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 determines the specific LV. The process ends.

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S974 that the winning numbers “14” to “24” are won (YES in S974), the sub CPU 81 performs the ART specific Lipnavi conversion lottery process during ART (S975). In this process, with reference to the specific Lip Navi conversion lottery table in ART (see FIGS. 154 to 156), whether or not the specific Lip Navi conversion is performed is determined by lottery.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the lottery result of S975 is conversion (S976). In S976, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the lottery result in S975 is not converted (when S976 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 ends the LV.1, 3, 5 medium specific Lipnavi conversion lottery process.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S976 that the lottery result of S975 indicates conversion (when S976 is YES), the sub CPU 81 turns on the specific Lipnavi conversion flag (S977). After the processing of S977, the sub CPU 81 ends the LV.1, 3, 5 medium specific Lip Navi conversion lottery processing.

[Additional specialized migration processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 217, the additional specialization transition processing will be described.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state or the RT4 gaming state (S981). In S981, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state or the RT4 gaming state (YES in S981), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S983 described below.

On the other hand, in S981, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT gaming state is not the RT2 gaming state or the RT4 gaming state (NO in S981), the sub CPU 81 adds to the next sub gaming state and is preparing to specialize. It is set (S982). After the processing of S982, the sub CPU 81 ends the additional specialization transition processing.

If S981 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the current RT gaming state is the RT4 gaming state and the RT3 transition rip is a winning symbol (S983). In S983, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current RT gaming state is the RT4 gaming state and the RT3 transition rep is a winning (YES in S983), the sub CPU 81 determines the next sub gaming state. Is set to the special preparation stage (S984). After the processing of S984, the sub CPU 81 ends the add-on specialization transition processing.

On the other hand, in S983, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current RT gaming state is the RT4 gaming state and that the RT3 transition rip is not a win (when S983 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 starts the PTR stock. It is determined whether or not is "PREMIUM" (S985).

In S985, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the head of the PTR stock is “PREMIUM” (when the determination in S985 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S990 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S985 that the head of the PTR stock is not "PREMIUM" (NO in S985), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the head of the PTR stock is "FIGHING". Yes (S986).

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S986 that the head of the PTR stock is "FIGHTING" (YES in S986), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S989 described below.

On the other hand, in S986, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the head of the PTR stock is not "FIGHING" (NO in S986), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the head of the PTR stock is "BURNING". Yes (S987).

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S<b>987 that the head of the PTR stock is not “BURNING” (NO in S<b>987 ), the sub CPU 81 ends the add-on specialization transition process.

On the other hand, in S987, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the head of the PTR stock is "BURNING" (YES in S987), the sub CPU 81 sets "BURNING" in the next sub game state (S988). .. After the processing of S988, the sub CPU 81 ends the add-on specialization transition processing.

When S986 is YES, the sub CPU 81 sets "FIGHING" in the next sub game state (S989). After the processing of S989, the sub CPU 81 ends the additional specialization transition processing.

When S985 is YES, the sub CPU 81 sets "PREMIUM" in the next sub game state (S990). After the processing of S990, the sub CPU 81 ends the add-on specialization transition processing.

[Processing during LV.2]
Next, with reference to FIG. 218 to FIG. 220, the LV.2 intermediate processing performed when the start lever in LV.2 LV.2 is operated will be described.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the ART preparation flag is ON (S1001). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1001 that the ART preparation flag is not ON (NO in S1001), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1004 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1001 that the ART preparation flag is ON (YES in S1001), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the current RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state. Yes (S1002). In S1002, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current RT game state is the RT0 game state (YES in S1002), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1004 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1002 that the current RT gaming state is not the RT0 gaming state (NO in S1002), the sub CPU 81 turns off the ART preparation flag (S1003).

If S1001 is NO, if S1002 is YES, or after the processing of S1003, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the ART preparation flag is OFF (S1004). In S1004, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART preparation flag is not OFF (NO in S1004), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1007 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1004 that the ART preparation flag is OFF (YES in S1004), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the ART game number counter is 1 or more. Yes (S1005). In S1005, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the ART game number counter is not 1 or more (NO in S1005), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1007 described below.

In S1005, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the ART game number counter is 1 or more (YES in S1005), the sub CPU 81 subtracts 1 from the ART game number counter (S1006).

When S1004 and S1005 are NO, or after the processing of S1006, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the PTR stock is 1 or more (S1007). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1007 that the PTR stock is not 1 or more (NO in S1007), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1012 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1007 that the PTR stock is 1 or more (YES in S1007), the sub CPU 81 performs the EX point acquisition lottery process for B_RUSH (S1008). In this processing, the EX point for B_RUSH is acquired by lottery based on the internal winning combination with reference to the lottery table for EX EX during B_RUSH (see FIGS. 98 to 103). Then, the determined B_RUSH EX point is added to the B_RUSH EX point counter.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (S1009). In S1009, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the B_RUSH EX point counter is not 100 or more (NO in S1009), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S912 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1009 that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (YES in S1009), the sub CPU 81 performs the B_RUSH loop rate lottery process (S1010). In this processing, the B_RUSH loop rate lottery table (see FIGS. 144 and 145) is referred to, and the type of the BR loop rate is randomly determined based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the BR loop rate type determined in S1010 in the sub RAM 83, and initializes the B_RUSH EX point counter (S1011). That is, the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is set to 0.

When the determination in S1009 is NO, or after the processing in S1011, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the PTR stock is 0 (S1012). In S1012, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the PTR stock is not 0 (NO in S1012), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1026 (see FIG. 219) described later.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1012 that the PTR stock is 0 (YES in S1012), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the EX point counter during ART is 100 or more. (S1013). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1013 that the value of the EX EX point counter during ART is not 100 or more (NO in S1013), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1024 (see FIG. 219) described later.

In S1013, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX EX point counter during ART is 100 or more (YES in S1013), the sub CPU 81 performs the PTR stock lottery process after reaching the specified point (S1014). In this processing, the PTR stock lottery table (LV.2) (see FIG. 107) after the specified point is reached is determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the lottery result in S1014 is a PTR stock win (S1015). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1015 that the PTR stock is not won (NO in S1015), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1024 (see FIG. 219) described later.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1015 that the PTR stock is a win (in the case of YES determination in S1015), the sub CPU 81 performs the specialization type lottery process when the PTR is won (S1016). In this processing, the additional specialization type lottery table (see FIG. 118) at the time of PTR winning is referred to, and the additional specialization type is randomly determined based on the winning opportunity.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the additional specialization type determined in S1016 in the sub RAM 83 (S1017).

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs an initial EX point random determination process at the time of level transition (S1018). In this process, the initial EX point random determination table at the time of level transition (see FIG. 106) is referred to, and the initial EX points are randomly determined based on the level type of the transfer destination. That is, in S1018, EX points for B_RUSH are determined.

Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the B_RUSH EX points acquired in S1018 to the B_RUSH EX point counter (S1019).

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a B_RUSH mode shift lottery process (S1020). In this processing, the B_RUSH mode transition lottery table (see FIG. 137) is referred to, and the mode type is randomly determined based on the type of the transition source.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (S1021). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1021 that the value of the B_RUSH EX point counter is not 100 or more (NO in S1021), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1024 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1021 that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (YES in S1021), the sub CPU 81 performs the B_RUSH loop rate lottery process (S1022). In this processing, the B_RUSH loop rate lottery table (see FIGS. 144 and 145) is referred to, and the type of the BR loop rate is randomly determined based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the BR loop rate type determined in S1022 in the sub RAM 83, and initializes the B_RUSH EX point counter (S1023). That is, the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is set to 0.

When S1015 and S1021 are NO determinations, or after the processing of S1023, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the EX point counter during R_ART is less than 100 (S1024). In S1024, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter during R_ART is not less than 100 (NO in S1024), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1026 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1024 that the value of the EX point counter during R_ART is less than 100 (YES in S1024), the sub CPU 81 performs the LV.2 medium EX point acquisition lottery process ( S1025). In this process, the EX points during LV.2 lottery table (see FIGS. 86 to 97) is referred to, and the EX points are randomly determined based on the internal winning combination.

When NO is determined in S1012 and S1024, or after the process of S1025, the sub CPU 81 performs the LV.2,4 medium specific Lipnavi conversion lottery process (S1026). The details of the LV. 2, 4 medium-specific Lip Navi conversion lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is a BB winning game (S1027). In S1027, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the game is not the BB winning game (NO in S1027), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1038 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1027 that the game is a BB winning game (YES in S1027), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the MICHI (BB5) is a winning game (S1028). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1028 that the MICHI (BB5) has not been won (when S1028 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1038 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1028 that the MICHI (BB5) is a win (in the case of YES determination in S1028), the sub CPU 81 performs the PTR winning specialization type lottery process (S1029). In this processing, the additional specialization type lottery table (see FIG. 118) at the time of PTR winning is referred to, and the additional specialization type is randomly determined based on the winning opportunity.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the additional specialization type determined in S1029 in the sub RAM 83 (S1030).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the PTR stock number is 1 (S1031). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1031 that the number of PTR stocks is not 1 (when S1031 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1038 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1031 that the number of PTR stocks is 1 (YES in S1031), the sub CPU 81 performs the initial EX point random determination process at the time of level transition (S1032). In this process, the initial EX point random determination table at the time of level transition (see FIG. 106) is referred to, and the initial EX points are randomly determined based on the level type of the transfer destination. That is, in S1032, EX points for B_RUSH are determined.

Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the B_RUSH EX point acquired in S1032 to the B_RUSH EX point counter (S1033).

Next, the sub CPU 81 conducts a B_RUSH mode transition lottery process (S1034). In this processing, the B_RUSH mode transition lottery table (see FIG. 137) is referred to, and the mode type is randomly determined based on the type of the transition source.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the B_RUSH EX point counter is 100 or more (S1035). In S1035, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is not 100 or more (NO in S1035), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1038 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1035 that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (YES in S1035), the sub CPU 81 performs the B_RUSH loop rate lottery process (S1036). In this processing, the B_RUSH loop rate lottery table (see FIGS. 144 and 145) is referred to, and the type of the BR loop rate is randomly determined based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the BR loop rate type determined in S1036 in the sub RAM 83, and initializes the B_RUSH EX point counter (S1037). That is, the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is set to 0.

When S1027, S1028, S1031, and S1035 are NO determinations, or after the processing of S1037, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is a BB winning game (S1038). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1038 that the game is a BB winning game (YES in S1038), the sub CPU 81 ends the process in LV.2.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1038 that it is not the BB winning game (NO in S1038), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the ART preparation flag is OFF (S1039). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1039 that the ART preparation flag is not OFF (NO in S1039), the sub CPU 81 ends the LV.2 processing.

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1039 that the ART preparation flag is OFF (YES in S1039), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the ART game number counter is 0 (S1040). ). When the sub CPU 81 determines in step S1040 that the value of the ART game number counter is not 0 (NO in step S1040), the sub CPU 81 ends the LV.2 intermediate processing.

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1040 that the value of the ART game number counter is 0 (YES in S1040), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the MICHI flag is ON (S1041).

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1041 that the MICHI flag is ON (when YES is determined in S1041), the sub CPU 81 sets LV.3 of R_ART as the next sub gaming state and is preparing for ART. The flag is turned off (S1042). After the processing of S1042, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during LV.2.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1041 that the MICHI flag is not ON (NO in S1041), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the PTR stock number is 1 or more (S1043).

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1043 that the number of PTR stocks is 1 or more (YES in S1043), the sub CPU 81 performs the additional specialization transition process described with reference to FIG. 217 (S1044). .. After the processing of S1044, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during LV.2.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1043 that the number of PTR stocks is not 1 or more (NO in S1043), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the EX point counter during R_ART is 100 or more. Yes (S1045).

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1045 that the value of the EX point counter during R_ART is 100 or more (YES in S1045), the sub CPU 81 sets LV.3 in R_ART as the next sub game state. Then, the ART preparation flag is turned off (S1046). After the processing of S1046, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during LV.2.

On the other hand, in S1045, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter during R_ART is not 100 or more (NO in S1045), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the LV.2 loop flag is OFF. It is determined (S1047).

In S1047, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the LV.2 loop flag is OFF (YES in S1047), the sub CPU 81 sets LV.1 of R_ART in the next sub game state, and prepares for ART. The medium flag is turned off (S1048). After the processing of S1048, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during LV.2.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1047 that the LV.2 loop flag is not OFF (NO in S1047), the sub CPU 81 sets “20” in the ART game number counter to determine the specific Lipnavi conversion count. Is cleared (S1049).

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs the LV.2 loop lottery process (S1050). In this processing, the LV.2 loop lottery table (see FIG. 114) is referred to, and the winning or non-winning of the LV.2 loop is randomly determined based on the type of the LV.2 loop rate. In this process, when the winning of the LV.2 loop is decided, the LV.2 loop flag is turned on. After the processing of S1050, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during LV.2.

[Specific navigation conversion lottery process in LV.2, 4]
Next, with reference to FIG. 221, the LV.2,4 middle specific navigation conversion lottery process will be described.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the current sub game state is LV.2 of R_ART (S1061). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1061 that the current sub game state is not LV.2 of R_ART (when S1061 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1068 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1061 that the current sub gaming state is LV.2 of R_ART (in the case of YES determination in S1061), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the specific Lipnavi conversion count is 2. Is determined (S1062). In S1062, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the specific Lipnavi conversion count is 2 (YES in S1062), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1068 described below.

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1062 that the specific Lipnavi conversion count is not 2 (NO in S1062), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the specific Lipnavi conversion count is 0 (S1063). In S1063, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the specific Lipnavi conversion count is 0 (YES in S1063), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1066 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1063 that the specific Lipnavi conversion count is not 0 (NO in S1063), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the EX point counter during R_ART is 100 or more. Yes (S1064). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1064 that the value of the EX point counter during R_ART is not 100 or more (NO in S1064), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1068 described below.

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1064 that the value of the EX point counter during R_ART is 100 or more (YES in S1064), the sub CPU 81 performs conversion processing (S1065). The details of the conversion process will be described later with reference to FIG. 222 described later. After the processing of S1065, the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S1068 described below.

In the case of YES determination in S1063, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the LV.2 loop flag is ON or the value of the EX point counter during R_ART is 100 or more (S1066). When it is determined that the LV.2 loop flag is ON or the value of the EX point counter during R_ART is not 100 or more in S1066 (NO in S1066), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1068 described below.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S1066 that the LV.2 loop flag is ON or the value of the EX point counter during R_ART is 100 or more (YES in S1066), the sub CPU 81 performs the conversion process (S1067). ).

When S1061, S1064, and S1066 are NO determinations, when S1062 is YES determination, after the processing of S1065 and S1067, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the current sub game state is LV.4 of R_ART (S1068). ). In S1068, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state is not LV.4 of R_ART (when S1068 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 ends the LV.2,4 medium specific navigation conversion lottery process. ..

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1068 that the current sub game state is LV.4 of R_ART (in the case of YES determination in S1068), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the specific Lipnavi conversion count is 1. Is determined (S1069). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1069 that the specific Lipnavi conversion count is 1 (YES in S1069), the sub CPU 81 ends the LV.2, 4 middle specific navigation conversion lottery process.

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1069 that the specific Lipnavi conversion count is not 1 (NO in S1069), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the PTR stock number is 0 (S1070). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1070 that the number of PTR stocks is 0 (YES in S1070), the sub CPU 81 ends the LV.2,4 medium specific navigation conversion lottery process.

On the other hand, in S1070, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the PTR stock number is not 0 (NO in S1070), the sub CPU 81 performs the conversion process (S1071). After the processing of S1071, the sub CPU 81 ends the LV.2, 4 medium-specific navigation conversion lottery processing.

[Conversion process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 222, a conversion process performed in the LV.2,4 middle specific navigation conversion lottery process will be described.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the ART preparation flag is OFF (S1081). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1081 that the ART preparation flag is not OFF (NO in S1081), the sub CPU 81 ends the conversion process.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1081 that the ART preparation flag is OFF (YES in S1081), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the MICHI is running up (S1082). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1082 that the MICHI is running up (in the case of YES determination in S1082), the sub CPU 81 ends the conversion process.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1082 that the MICHI is not running up (when NO is determined in S1082), the sub CPU 81 changes the winning numbers “14” to “24” by the internal lottery process (see FIG. 167). It is determined whether or not it has been won (S1083). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1083 that the winning numbers “14” to “24” have not been won (when S1083 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 ends the conversion process.

In S1083, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the winning numbers “14” to “24” have been won (YES in S1083), the sub CPU 81 performs the ART specific LipNavi conversion lottery process (S1084). In this processing, with reference to the ART specific LipNavi conversion lottery table (see FIG. 157 or FIG. 158), whether or not the specific LipNavi conversion is performed is determined by lottery based on the number of R_ART games.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the lottery result of S1084 indicates conversion (S1085). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1085 that the lottery result of S1084 is not converted (when S1085 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the conversion process.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the lottery result in S1084 is converted (when YES is determined in S1085), the sub CPU 81 turns on the specific Lipnavi conversion flag and increments the specific Lipnavi conversion count counter by 1. (S1086). After the processing of S1086, the sub CPU 81 ends the conversion processing.

[Processing during LV.3]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 223 to 225, the LV.1 middle processing performed when the start lever in LV.1 LV.1 is operated will be described.

First, the sub CPU 81 performs the processes of S1101 to S1126 in the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 223 and 224. Note that the processing of S1101 to S1126 in the LV.3 medium processing of this example is performed in the same manner as the processing of S901 to S926 in the flowchart of the LV.1 medium processing of the above-described embodiment shown in FIGS. 212 and 213. Therefore, the description of the processing from S1101 to S1126 is omitted here.

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1126 that the value of the EX point counter during R_ART is less than 100 (YES in S1126), the sub CPU 81 executes the LV.1, 3, 4 medium EX point acquisition lottery process. Perform (S1127). In this processing, the EX points in the LV.3 lottery table (see FIGS. 80 to 82) are referred to, and the EX points are determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs the processes of S1128 to S1143 in the flowcharts shown in FIGS. 224 and 225. Note that the processes of S1128 to S1143 in the LV.3 medium process of this example are performed in the same manner as the processes of S928 to S943 in the flowchart of the LV.1 medium process of the above-described embodiment shown in FIGS. 213 and 214. Therefore, the description of the processing from S1128 to S1143 is omitted here.

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1143 that the MICHI flag is ON (YES in S1143), the sub CPU 81 sets LV.4 in R_ART as the next sub gaming state, and is preparing for ART. The flag is turned off (S1144). After the processing of S1144, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during LV.3.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs the processes of S1145 to S1147 in the flowchart shown in FIG. Note that the processes of S1145 to S1147 in the LV.3 medium process of this example are performed in the same manner as the processes of S945 to S947 in the flowchart of the LV.1 medium process of the above embodiment shown in FIG. Therefore, the description of the processing from S1145 to S1147 is omitted here.

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1147 that the value of the EX point counter during R_ART is 100 or more (YES in S1147), the sub CPU 81 sets LV.4 in R_ART as the next sub game state. Then, the ART preparation flag is turned off (S1148). After the processing of S1148, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during LV.3.

On the other hand, in S1147, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter during R_ART is not 100 or more (NO in S1147), the sub CPU 81 sets LV.2 in R_ART as the next sub game state. The flag is set and the ART preparation flag is turned off (S1149). After the processing of S1149, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during LV.3.

[Processing during LV.4]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 226 to 228, the LV.4 middle processing performed when the start lever in LV.4 LV.4 is operated will be described.

First, the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S1201 to S1211 in the flowchart shown in FIG. Note that the processes of S1201 to S1211 in the LV.4 medium process of this example are performed in the same manner as the processes of S1001 to S1011 in the flowchart of the LV.2 medium process of the above embodiment shown in FIG. 218. Therefore, the description of the processing from S1201 to S1211 is omitted here.

If S1209 is NO, or after the processing of S2011, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the PTR stock is 0 (S1212). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1212 that the PTR stock is not 0 (NO in S1212), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1224 (see FIG. 227) described later.

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1212 that the PTR stock is 0 (YES in S1212), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the EX point counter during ART is less than 100 (S1213). ). In S1213, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX EX point counter during ART is not less than 100 (NO in S1213), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1224 (see FIG. 227) described later.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1213 that the value of the EX EX-point counter during ART is less than 100 (YES in S1213), the sub CPU 81 determines the EX point acquisition lottery in LV. Processing is performed (S1214). In this processing, the EX points in the LV.4 table for obtaining EX points (see FIGS. 83 to 85) are referred to, and the EX points are randomly determined based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the EX point counter during ART is 100 or more (S1215). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1215 that the value of the EX EX point counter during ART is not 100 or more (NO in S1215), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1224 (see FIG. 227) described later.

On the other hand, in S1215, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX EX-point counter during ART is 100 or more (in the case of YES determination in S1215), the sub CPU 81 performs the PTR winning specialization type lottery process. (S1216). In this processing, the additional specialization type lottery table (see FIG. 118) at the time of PTR winning is referred to, and the additional specialization type is randomly determined based on the winning opportunity.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the additional specialization type determined in S1216 in the sub RAM 83 (S1217).

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs an initial EX point random determination process at the time of level transition (S1218). In this process, the initial EX point random determination table at the time of level transition (see FIG. 106) is referred to, and the initial EX points are randomly determined based on the level type of the transfer destination. That is, in S1218, EX points for B_RUSH are determined.

Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the EX point for B_RUSH acquired in S1218 to the EX point counter for B_RUSH (S1219).

Next, the sub CPU 81 conducts a B_RUSH mode transition lottery process (S1220). In this processing, the B_RUSH mode transition lottery table (see FIG. 137) is referred to, and the mode type is randomly determined based on the type of the transition source.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (S1221). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1221 that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is not 100 or more (NO in S1221), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1224 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1221 that the value of the B_RUSH EX point counter is 100 or more (YES in S1221), the sub CPU 81 performs the B_RUSH loop rate lottery process (S1222). In this processing, the B_RUSH loop rate lottery table (see FIGS. 144 and 145) is referred to, and the type of the BR loop rate is randomly determined based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the BR loop rate type determined in S1222 in the sub RAM 83, and initializes the B_RUSH EX point counter (S1223). That is, the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is set to 0.

When NO is determined in S1212, S1213, S1215, and S1221, or after the process of S1223, the sub CPU 81 performs the LV.2,4 medium specific Lipnavi conversion lottery process described with reference to FIG. 221 (S1224).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is a BB winning game (S1225). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1225 that the game is not a BB winning game (NO in S1225), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1236 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1225 that the game is a BB winning game (YES in S1225), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the MICHI (BB5) is a winning game (S1226). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1226 that the MICHI (BB5) is not a win (when S1226 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1236 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1226 that the MICHI (BB5) is a win (in the case of YES determination in S1226), the sub CPU 81 executes the PTR winning specialization type lottery process (S1227). In this processing, the additional specialization type lottery table (see FIG. 118) at the time of PTR winning is referred to, and the additional specialization type is randomly determined based on the winning opportunity.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the additional specialization type determined in S1227 in the sub RAM 83 (S1228).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the PTR stock number is 1 (S1229). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1229 that the PTR stock number is not 1 (NO in S1229), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1236 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1229 that the PTR stock number is 1 (YES in S1229), the sub CPU 81 performs the initial EX point random determination process at the time of level transition (S1230). In this process, the initial EX point random determination table at the time of level transition (see FIG. 106) is referred to, and the initial EX points are randomly determined based on the level type of the transfer destination. That is, in S1230, EX points for B_RUSH are determined.

Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the B_RUSH EX points acquired in S1230 to the B_RUSH EX point counter (S1231).

Next, the sub CPU 81 carries out a B_RUSH mode transition lottery process (S1232). In this processing, the B_RUSH mode transition lottery table (see FIG. 137) is referred to, and the mode type is randomly determined based on the type of the transition source.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (S1233). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1233 that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is not 100 or more (NO in S1233), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1236 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1233 that the value of the B_RUSH EX point counter is 100 or more (YES in S1233), the sub CPU 81 performs the B_RUSH loop rate lottery process (S1234). In this processing, the B_RUSH loop rate lottery table (see FIGS. 144 and 145) is referred to, and the type of the BR loop rate is randomly determined based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the BR loop rate type determined in S1234 in the sub RAM 83, and initializes the B_RUSH EX point counter (S1235). That is, the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is set to 0.

When S1225, S1226, S1229, and S1233 are NO determinations, or after the processing of S1235, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is a BB winning game (S1236). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1236 that the game is a BB winning game (YES in S1236), the sub CPU 81 ends the LV.4 medium processing.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1236 that it is not the BB winning game (NO in S1236), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the ART preparation flag is OFF (S1237). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1237 that the ART preparation flag is not OFF (NO in S1237), the sub CPU 81 ends the LV.4 processing.

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1237 that the ART preparation flag is OFF (YES in S1237), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the ART game number counter is 0 (S1238). ). In S1238, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the ART game number counter is not 0 (NO in S1238), the sub CPU 81 ends the LV.4 medium processing.

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1238 that the value of the ART game number counter is 0 (YES in S1238), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the PTR stock is 1 or more (S1239). ..

When the sub CPU 81 determines in step S1239 that the PTR stock is 1 or more (YES in step S1239), the sub CPU 81 performs the additional specialization transition process described with reference to FIG. 217 (S1240). After the processing of S1240, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during LV.4.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1239 that the PTR stock is not 1 or more (NO in S1239), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the EX point counter during R_ART is less than 100. (S1241).

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1241 that the value of the EX point counter during R_ART is less than 100 (YES in S1241), the sub CPU 81 sets LV.3 of R_ART as the next sub game state. , The ART in-progress flag is turned off (S1242). After the processing of S1242, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during LV.4.

On the other hand, in S1241, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter during R_ART is not less than 100 (NO in S1241), the sub CPU 81 performs the PTR winning specialization type lottery process (S1243). ). In this processing, the additional specialization type lottery table (see FIG. 118) at the time of PTR winning is referred to, and the additional specialization type is randomly determined based on the winning opportunity.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the additional specialization type determined in S1243 in the sub RAM 83 (S1244). Then, the sub CPU 81 performs the additional specialization transition processing described with reference to FIG. 217 (S1245).

Next, the sub CPU 81 conducts initial EX point lottery processing at the time of level transition (S1246). Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the EX point for B_RUSH acquired in S1246 to the EX point counter for B_RUSH (S1247). Then, the sub CPU 81 performs the B_RUSH mode transition lottery process (S1248). After the processing of S1248, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during LV.4.

[Processing in LV.5]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 229 to 231, the LV.5 intermediate processing performed when the start lever is operated during LV.5 (PTR) of R_ART will be described.

First, the sub CPU 81 performs a PTR stock loop lottery process (S1301). The details of the PTR stock loop lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the ART preparation flag is ON (S1302). In S1302, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART preparation flag is not ON (NO in S1302), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1305 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1302 that the ART preparation flag is ON (YES in S1302), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the current RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state. Yes (S1303). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1303 that the current RT game state is the RT0 game state (YES in S1303), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1305 described below.

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1303 that the current RT gaming state is not the RT0 gaming state (NO in S1303), the sub CPU 81 turns off the ART preparation flag (S1304).

If S1302 is NO, and if S1303 is YES, after the processing of S1304, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the ART preparation flag is OFF (S1305). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1305 that the ART preparation flag is not OFF (NO in S1305), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1315 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1305 that the ART preparation flag is OFF (YES in S1305), the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the LV.5 remaining game number counter of R_ART is 1 or more. It is determined whether or not (S1306).

In S1306, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the R_ART LV.5 remaining game counter is 1 or more (when S1306 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines that the R_ART LV.5 remaining game counter is equal to or larger than R_ART. The value is subtracted by 1 (S1307).

If S1306 is NO, or after the process of S1307, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the type of the sign is B_RUSH sign (S1308). In S1308, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the type of the sign is not B_RUSH sign (in the case of NO determination in S1308), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1311 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1308 that the type of the sign is B_RUSH sign (in the case of YES determination in S1308), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the value of the sign game number counter is 1 or more. It is determined (S1309). In S1309, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the aura game number counter is 1 or more (YES in S1309), the sub CPU 81 subtracts 1 from the aura game number counter (S1310).

When the determinations in S1308 and S1309 are NO, after the processing in S1310, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the type of the omen is B_RUSH omen (S1311). In S1311, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the type of the sign is B_RUSH sign (in the case of YES determination in S1311), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1315 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1311 that the type of the precursor is not B_RUSH precursor (when the determination in S1311 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the B_RUSH stock number is 1 or more (S1312). ). In S1312, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of B_RUSH stocks is not 1 or more (NO in S1312), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1315 described below.

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1312 that the B_RUSH stock number is 1 or more (YES in S1312), the sub CPU 81 performs the B_RUSH predictive game number lottery process (S1313). In this processing, the number of precursor games is randomly determined based on the number of remaining games of LV.5 (PTR) with reference to the B_RUSH precursor game number lottery table (see FIGS. 138 and 139).

Next, the sub CPU 81 sets B_RUSH sign in the sign of the sign (S1314).

When S1305 and S1312 are NO determinations, when S1311 is YES determinations, or after the processing of S1314, the sub CPU 81 performs B_RUSH EX point acquisition lottery processing (S1315). In this processing, the EX point for B_RUSH is acquired by lottery based on the internal winning combination with reference to the lottery table for EX EX during B_RUSH (see FIGS. 98 to 103). Then, the determined B_RUSH EX point is added to the B_RUSH EX point counter.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (S1316). When the sub CPU 81 determines in step S1316 that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is not 100 or more (NO in step S1316), the sub CPU 81 performs processing of step S1323 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1316 that the value of the B_RUSH EX point counter is 100 or more (YES in S1316), the sub CPU 81 performs the B_RUSH loop rate lottery process (S1317). In this processing, the B_RUSH loop rate lottery table (see FIGS. 144 and 145) is referred to, and the type of the BR loop rate is randomly determined based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the BR loop rate type determined in S1317 in the sub RAM 83, and initializes the B_RUSH EX point counter (S1318). That is, the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is set to 0.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the ART preparation flag is OFF (S1319). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1319 that the ART preparation flag is not OFF (NO in S1319), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1323 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1319 that the ART preparation flag is OFF (YES in S1319), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the type of the omen is in the non omen. S1320). In S1320, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the type of the omen is not a non omen (when the determination of S1320 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1323 described below.

In S1320, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the type of the omen is not omen (when the determination in S1320 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the B_RUSH omen game number lottery process (S1321). In this processing, the number of precursor games is randomly determined based on the number of remaining games of LV.5 (PTR) with reference to the B_RUSH precursor game number lottery table (see FIGS. 138 and 139).

Next, the sub CPU 81 sets B_RUSH sign in the sign of the sign (S1322).

When S1316, S1319, and S1320 are NO determinations, or after the processing of S1322, the sub CPU 81 performs the LV.1, 3, 5 medium specific Lipnavi conversion lottery processing described with reference to FIG. 216 (1323).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is a BB winning game (1324). In S1324, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the game is not the BB winning game (NO in S1324), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1328 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in 1324 that the game is a BB winning game (YES in S1324), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the MICHI (BB5) is a winning game (S1325). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1325 that the MICHI (BB5) is not a win (in the case of NO determination in S1325), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1328 described below.

In S1325, when the sub CPU 81 determines that MICHI (BB5) is a win (in the case of YES determination in S1325), the sub CPU 81 performs the PTR winning specialization type lottery process (S1326). In this processing, the additional specialization type lottery table (see FIG. 118) at the time of PTR winning is referred to, and the additional specialization type is randomly determined based on the winning opportunity.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the additional specialization type determined in S1326 in the sub RAM 83 (S1327).

In the case of NO determination in S1324 and S1325 or after the processing of S1327, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is a BB winning game (S1328). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1328 that the game is not a BB winning game (NO in S1328), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1331 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1328 that the game is a BB winning game (YES in S1328), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the ART preparation flag is OFF (S1329). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1329 that the ART preparation flag is not OFF (NO in S1329), the sub CPU 81 ends the LV.5 medium processing.

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1329 that the ART preparation flag is OFF (YES in S1329), the sub CPU 81 adds 1 to the value of the LV.5 remaining game number counter of R_ART (S1330). .. After the processing of S1330, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during LV.5.

In the case of NO determination in S1328, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the ART preparation flag is OFF (S1331). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1331 that the ART preparation flag is not OFF (NO in S1331), the sub CPU 81 ends the LV.5 processing.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1331 that the ART preparation flag is OFF (YES in S1331), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the type of the sign is B_RUSH sign. S1332). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1332 that the type of the sign is B_RUSH sign (in the case of YES determination in S1332), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1338 described below.

In S1332, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the type of the omen is not B_RUSH omen (NO in S1332), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the LV.5 remaining game number counter of R_ART is 0. Is determined (S1333). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1333 that the value of the LV.5 remaining game number counter of R_ART is not 0 (NO in S1333), the sub CPU 81 ends the LV.5 intermediate processing.

On the other hand, in S1333, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the LV.5 remaining game number counter of R_ART is 0 (YES in S1333), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not there is a PTR stock. Yes (S1334).

In S1334, when the sub CPU 81 determines that there is no PTR stock (when S1334 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 sets LV.4 of R_ART as the next sub game state and turns off the ART preparation flag. Yes (S1335). In addition, in this processing, the EX point counter for B_RUSH is initialized. That is, the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is set to 0. After the processing of S1335, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during LV.5.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1334 that there is a PTR stock (when YES is determined in S1334), the sub CPU 81 performs the additional specialization transition process described with reference to FIG. 217 (S1336).

Next, the sub CPU 81 conducts a B_RUSH mode transition lottery process (S1337). In this processing, the B_RUSH mode transition lottery table (see FIG. 137) is referred to, and the mode type is randomly determined based on the type of the transition source. After the processing of S1337, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during LV.5.

When S1332 is YES, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the aura game number counter is 0 (S1338). When the sub CPU 81 determines in step S1338 that the value of the precursor game number counter is not 0 (NO in step S1338), the sub CPU 81 ends the LV.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1338 that the value of the precursor game number counter is 0 (YES in S1338), the sub CPU 81 sets B_RUSH as the next sub game state and sets the LV of R_ART. .5 1 is added to the value of the remaining game counter (S1339). After the processing of S1339, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during LV.5.

[PTR stock loop lottery processing]
Next, the PTR stock loop lottery processing will be described with reference to FIG.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the number of PTR loop stocks is 1 or more (S1351). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1351 that the number of PTR loop stocks is not 1 or more (NO in S1351), the sub CPU 81 ends the PTR stock loop lottery process.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1351 that the number of PTR loop stocks is 1 or more (YES in S1351), the sub CPU 81 extracts the leading loop rate of the PTR loop stock (S1352).

Next, the sub CPU 81 conducts PTR stock lottery processing during RTG (S1353). In this processing, the PTR stock during RTG lottery table (see FIG. 150) is referred to, and the winning or non-winning of the PTR stock is randomly determined based on the type of the PTR loop rate.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the PTR stock is won in S1353 (S1354). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1354 that the PTR stock is not a winning symbol (NO in S1354), the sub CPU 81 deletes the head of the PTR loop stock (S1355). After the processing of S1355, the sub CPU 81 ends the PTR stock loop lottery processing.

In this embodiment, the processing from S1351 to S1355 is repeated for the upper limit value of PTR loop stock (set to 32 in this embodiment).

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1354 that the PTR stock is a winning symbol (YES in S1354), the sub CPU 81 performs the specialization type lottery process when the PTR winning symbol is added (S1356). In this processing, the additional specialization type lottery table (see FIG. 118) at the time of PTR winning is referred to, and the additional specialization type is randomly determined based on the winning opportunity.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the additional specialization type determined in S1356 in the sub RAM 83 (S1357). After the processing of S1357, the sub CPU 81 ends the PTR stock loop lottery processing.

[Specialization preparation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 233, processing during specialization preparation performed when the start lever is operated during specialization preparation will be described.

First, the sub CPU 81 performs the PTR stock loop lottery process described with reference to FIG. 232 (S1361).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state (S1362). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1362 that the RT gaming state is not the RT3 gaming state (NO in S1362), the sub CPU 81 turns off the specializing preparation preparation flag (S1363).

In S1362, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT gaming state is the RT3 gaming state (YES in S1362) or after the processing of S1363, the sub CPU 81 performs the B_RUSH EX point acquisition lottery processing (S1364). ). In this processing, the EX point for B_RUSH is acquired by lottery based on the internal winning combination with reference to the lottery table for EX EX during B_RUSH (see FIGS. 98 to 103). Then, the determined B_RUSH EX point is added to the B_RUSH EX point counter.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (S1365). When the sub CPU 81 determines in step S1365 that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is not 100 or more (NO in step S1365), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of step S1368 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1365 that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (YES in S1365), the sub CPU 81 performs the B_RUSH loop rate lottery process (S1366). In this processing, the B_RUSH loop rate lottery table (see FIGS. 144 and 145) is referred to, and the type of the BR loop rate is randomly determined based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the BR loop rate type determined in S1366 in the sub RAM 83, and initializes the B_RUSH EX point counter (S1367). That is, the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is set to 0.

If S1365 is NO, or after the process of S1367, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is a BB winning game (S1368). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1368 that the game is not the BB winning game (NO in S1368), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1372 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1368 that the game is a BB winning game (YES in S1368), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the MICHI (BB5) is a winning game (S1369). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1369 that the MICHI (BB5) has not been won (NO in S1369), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1372 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1369 that the winning is MICHI (BB5) (YES in S1369), the sub CPU 81 performs the PTR winning additional specialization type lottery process (S1370). In this processing, the additional specialization type lottery table (see FIG. 118) at the time of PTR winning is referred to, and the additional specialization type is randomly determined based on the winning opportunity.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the additional specialization type determined in S1370 in the sub RAM 83 (S1371).

When S1368 and S1369 are NO determinations, or after the processing of S1371, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state or the RT4 gaming state (S1372). In S1372, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state or the RT4 gaming state (YES in S1372), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1376 described below.

On the other hand, in S1372, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT gaming state is not the RT2 gaming state or the RT4 gaming state (NO in S1372), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the specializing preparation preparation flag is OFF. It is determined (S1373). When the sub CPU 81 determines in step S1373 that the specialization in preparation preparation flag is not OFF (NO in step S1373), the sub CPU 81 ends the specialization preparation process.

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1373 that the specialization preparation in progress flag is OFF (YES in S1373), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the RT4 transition replay is won (S1374). When the sub CPU 81 determines in step S1374 that the RT4 transition replay is not a win (in the case of NO determination in step S1374), the sub CPU 81 ends the specialization preparing process.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in step S1374 that the RT4 transition replay is successful (YES in step S1374), the sub CPU 81 performs the specialization start process with reference to FIG. 193 (step S1375). After the processing of S1375, the sub CPU 81 ends the specializing preparation processing.

In the case of YES determination in S1372, the sub CPU 81 performs the specialization start processing with reference to FIG. 193 (S1375). After the processing of S1375, the sub CPU 81 ends the specializing preparation processing.

[Processing during PREMIUM]
Next, with reference to FIG. 234, the PREMIUM mid-process performed when the start lever in “PREMIUM” in LV.5 (PTR) is operated will be described.

First, the sub CPU 81 performs the PTR stock loop lottery process described with reference to FIG. 234 (S1381).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the specialization guaranteed game number counter is 1 or more (S1382). When the sub CPU 81 determines in step S1382 that the value of the specialized guaranteed game number counter is 1 or more (YES in step S1382), the sub CPU 81 subtracts 1 from the value of the specialized guaranteed game number counter ( S1383).

In S1382, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the specialization guaranteed game number counter is not 1 or more (when S1382 is NO determination), or after the processing of S1383, the sub CPU 81 performs the PREMIUM medium addition lottery processing ( S1384). In this process, referring to the premium lottery table in PREMIUM (see FIG. 119), the additional winning or non-winning lottery is randomly determined based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the addition is successful in S1384 (S1385). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1385 that the addition has not been won (when S1385 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1388 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1385 that the addition has been won (YES in S1385), the sub CPU 81 performs the lottery process for the number of additional games in PREMIUM (S1386). In this processing, the number of additional games to be added is randomly determined based on the internal winning combination by referring to the lottery table for additional games during PREMIUM (see FIGS. 120 and 121).

Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the additional game number determined in S1386 to the LV.5 remaining game number counter of R_ART (S1387).

When S1385 is NO, or after the processing of S1387, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is a BB winning game (S1388). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1388 that the game is not a BB winning game (NO in S1388), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1393 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1388 that the game is a BB winning game (YES in S1388), the sub CPU 81 adds 1 to the value of the specialization guaranteed game number counter (S1389).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the MICHI (BB5) is won (S1390). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1390 that the MICHI (BB5) has not been won (when S1390 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1393 described later.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1390 that the MICHI (BB5) is a win (in the case where S1390 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the PTR winning specialization type lottery process (S1391). In this processing, the additional specialization type lottery table (see FIG. 118) at the time of PTR winning is referred to, and the additional specialization type is randomly determined based on the winning opportunity.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the additional specialization type determined in S1391 in the sub RAM 83 (S1392).

When S1388 and S1390 are NO determinations, or after the processing of S1392, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the specialization guaranteed game number counter is 0 (S1393). When the sub CPU 81 determines in step S1393 that the value of the specialization guaranteed game number counter is not 0 (NO in step S1393), the sub CPU 81 ends the PREMIUM processing.

On the other hand, in S1393, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the specialization guaranteed game number counter is 0 (YES in S1393), the sub CPU 81 determines that the next sub game state is LV.5 of R_ART. Is set, and the ART preparation flag is turned off (S1394). After the processing of S1394, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during PREMIUM.

[Processing during FIGHTING]
Next, with reference to FIG. 235 and FIG. 236, the during-FIGHING processing performed when the start lever is operated during “FIGHING” in LV.5 (PTR) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 81 turns off the FIGHTING continuation flag (S1401). Next, the sub CPU 81 performs the PTR stock loop lottery process described with reference to FIG. 234 (S1402).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the specialization guaranteed game number counter is 0 (S1403). When the sub CPU 81 determines in step S1403 that the value of the specialization guaranteed game number counter is 0 (YES in step S1403), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of step S1409 described below.

On the other hand, in S1403, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the special guarantee game number counter is not 0 (NO in S1403), the sub CPU 81 turns on the guarantee flag (S1404). Then, the sub CPU 81 turns on the FIGHTING continuation flag (S1405).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is a BB winning game (S1406). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1406 that the game is a BB winning game (YES in S1406), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1416 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1406 that the game is not the BB winning game (NO in S1406), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the winning combination for winning the guaranteed number of times is a winning combination (S1407). An example of the guaranteed number subtraction target is replay without RT transition.

In S1407, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the guaranteed number subtraction target combination is not a winning combination (NO in S1407), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1416 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1407 that the guaranteed number subtraction target combination is a win (in the case of YES determination in S1407), the sub CPU 81 subtracts 1 from the value of the specialized guaranteed game number counter (S1408). .. After the processing of S1408, the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S1416 described below.

In the case of YES determination in S1403, the sub CPU 81 turns off the guarantee flag (S1409). Then, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the winning combination is RT4 special replay (S1410).

In S1410, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the winning combination is the RT4 special replay (YES in S1410), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1413 described below.

On the other hand, in S1410, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the winning combination is not the RT4 special replay (when S1410 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the BB winning combination or the forced termination winning combination is a winning combination. (S1411). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1411 that the BB winning or the forced termination winning combination is a win (in the case of YES determination in S1411), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1416 described below.

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1411 that the BB winning or forced termination winning combination is not won (NO in S1411), the sub CPU 81 turns ON the FIGHTING continuation flag (S1412). After the processing of S1412, the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S1416 described below.

In the case of YES determination in S1410, the sub CPU 81 carries out FIGHTING-in-progress continuous lottery processing (S1413). In this processing, the continuation or end is determined by lottery based on the type of FIGHT loop rate with reference to the FIGHTING continuous lottery table.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the lottery result in S1413 is continuous (S1414). In S1414, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the lottery result in S1413 is not continued (NO in S1414), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1416 described below.

On the other hand, in S1414, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the lottery result of S1413 is continuous (YES in S1414), the sub CPU 81 turns on the FIGHTING continuation flag (S1415).

When S1406 and S1411 are YES, when S1407 and S1414 are NO, or after the processes of S1408, S1412, and S1415, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the guarantee flag is OFF and the RT4 special lip is won. (S1416). When the sub CPU 81 determines in step S1416 that the in-guarantee flag is OFF and the RT4 special lip is won (YES in step S1416), the sub CPU 81 performs processing of step S1422 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1416 that the in-guarantee flag is OFF and the RT4 special lip award is not awarded (NO in S1416), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the FIGHTING continuation flag is ON. (S1417). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1417 that the FIGHTING continuation flag is not ON (NO in S1416), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1422 described later.

In S1417, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the FIGHTING continuation flag is ON (YES in S1416), the sub CPU 81 performs the FIGHTING medium additional lottery process (S1418). In this processing, referring to FIG. 125 to FIG. 129 in the FIGHT medium top lottery table, the additional winning or non-winning lottery is randomly determined based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the addition is successful in S1418 (S1419). In S1419, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the addition has not been won (NO in S1419), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1422 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1419 that the addition has been won (in the case of YES determination in S1419), the sub CPU 81 carries out the lottery process for the number of additional games in FIGHTING (S1420). In this processing, the number of additional games to be added during the FIGHTING is referred to (see FIGS. 130 to 132), and the number of additional games is determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the number of additional games determined in S1420 to the LV.5 remaining game number counter of R_ART (S1421).

When S1416 is YES, S1417 and S1419 are NO, or after the processing of S1421, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is a BB winning game (S1422). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1422 that the game is not a BB winning game (NO in S1422), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1427 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1422 that the game is a BB winning game (YES in S1422), the sub CPU 81 increments the value of the specialization guaranteed game number counter by 1 (S1423).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the MICHI (BB5) is won (S1424). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1424 that the MICHI (BB5) has not been won (when S1424 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1427 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1424 that the MICHI (BB5) is a win (in the case where S1424 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs the PTR winning specialization type lottery process (S1425). In this processing, the additional specialization type lottery table (see FIG. 118) at the time of PTR winning is referred to, and the additional specialization type is randomly determined based on the winning opportunity.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the additional specialization type determined in S1425 in the sub RAM 83 (S1426).

In the case of NO determination in S1422 and S1424 or after the processing of S1426, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the FIGHTING continuation flag is OFF (S1427). When the sub CPU 81 determines in step S1427 that the FIGHTING continuation flag is not OFF (NO in step S1427), the sub CPU 81 ends the FIGTING in-process.

On the other hand, in S1427, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the FIGHTING continuation flag is OFF (YES in S1427), the sub CPU 81 sets LV.5 of R_ART as the next sub game state and prepares for ART. The medium flag is turned off (S1428). After the processing of S1428, the sub CPU 81 ends the FIGTING-in-progress processing.

[Burning Medium Processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 237, the BURNING in-process performed when the start lever is operated in “BURNING” in LV.5 (PTR) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 81 performs the PTR stock loop lottery process described with reference to FIG. 234 (S1441).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the specialization guaranteed game number counter is 1 or more (S1442). In S1442, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the specialized guaranteed game number counter is 1 or more (YES in S1442), the sub CPU 81 subtracts 1 from the value of the specialized guaranteed game number counter ( S1443).

In S1442, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the specialization guaranteed game number counter is not 1 or more (when S1442 is NO), or after the processing of S1443, the sub CPU 81 performs the BURNING medium addition lottery processing ( S1444). In this processing, the additional winning lottery table in BURNING (see FIG. 133) is referred to, and the additional winning or non-winning lottery is randomly determined based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the addition is successful in S1444 (S1445). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1445 that the addition has not been won (NO in S1445), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1448 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1445 that the addition has been won (in the case of YES determination in S1445), the sub CPU 81 performs the BURNING additional game number lottery process (S1446). In this process, the number of additional games to be added is randomly determined based on the internal winning combination by referring to the BURNING additional game number lottery table (see FIGS. 134 to 136).

Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the number of additional games determined in S1446 to the LV.5 remaining game number counter of R_ART (S1447).

If NO in S1445 or after the process of S1447, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is a BB winning game (S1448). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1448 that the game is not the BB winning game (NO in S1448), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1453 described later.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1448 that the game is a BB winning game (YES in S1448), the sub CPU 81 adds 1 to the value of the specialization guaranteed game number counter (S1449).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the MICHI (BB5) is won (S1450). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1450 that the MICHI (BB5) has not been won (NO in S1450), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1453 described later.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1450 that the MICHI (BB5) is a win (in the case of YES determination in S1450), the sub CPU 81 executes the PTR winning specialization type lottery process (S1451). In this processing, the additional specialization type lottery table (see FIG. 118) at the time of PTR winning is referred to, and the additional specialization type is randomly determined based on the winning opportunity.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the additional specialization type determined in S1451 in the sub RAM 83 (S1452).

When S1448 and S1450 are NO, or after the processing of S1452, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the specialization guaranteed game number counter is 0 (S1453). When the sub CPU 81 determines in step S1453 that the value of the specialization guaranteed game number counter is not 0 (NO in step S1453), the sub CPU 81 ends the BURNING processing.

On the other hand, in S1453, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the specialization guaranteed game number counter is 0 (YES in S1453), the sub CPU 81 determines that the next sub game state is LV.5 of R_ART. Is set, and the ART preparation flag is turned off (S1454). After the processing of S1454, the sub CPU 81 ends the BURNING processing.

[Processing during B_RUSH]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 238 and 239, the B_RUSH mid-process performed at the time of operating the start lever during “B_RUSH” in LV.5 (PTR) will be described.

First, the sub CPU 81 performs the PTR stock loop lottery process described with reference to FIG. 234 (S1471).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the B_RUSH game number counter is 1 or more (S1472). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1472 that the value of the B_RUSH game number counter is 1 or more (YES in S1472), the sub CPU 81 subtracts 1 from the value of the B_RUSH game number counter (S1473).

In S1472, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the B_RUSH game number counter is not 1 or more (when S1472 is NO), or after the process of S1473, the sub CPU 81 performs the B_RUSH medium PTR addition lottery process (S1474). ). In this processing, the PTR additional lottery table in B_RUSH (see FIG. 140) is referred to, and the winning or non-winning of the PTR additional lottery is randomly determined based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the PTR addition has been won in S1474 (S1475). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1475 that the PTR addition has not been won (NO in S1475), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1478 described later.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1475 that the PTR addition has been won (in the case of YES determination in S1475), the sub CPU 81 performs the PTR winning additional specialization type lottery process (S1476). In this processing, the additional specialization type lottery table (see FIG. 118) at the time of PTR winning is referred to, and the additional specialization type is randomly determined based on the winning opportunity.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the additional specialization type determined in S1476 in the sub RAM 83 (S1478).

When S1475 is NO, or after the process of S1478, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is a BB winning game (S1479). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1479 that the game is not a BB winning game (NO in S1479), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1483 described later.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1479 that the game is a BB winning game (YES in S1479), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the MICHI (BB5) is a winning game (S1480). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1480 that the MICHI (BB5) is not a win (in the case of NO determination in S1480), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1483 described later.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1480 that the MICHI (BB5) is a win (in the case of YES determination in S1480), the sub CPU 81 performs the PTR winning additional specialization type lottery process (S1481). In this processing, the additional specialization type lottery table (see FIG. 118) at the time of PTR winning is referred to, and the additional specialization type is randomly determined based on the winning opportunity.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the additional specialization type determined in S1481 in the sub RAM 83 (S1482).

When S1479 and S1480 are NO, or after the process of S1482, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is a BB winning game (S1483). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1483 that the game is a BB winning game (YES in S1483), the sub CPU 81 inserts the current loop rate at the beginning of the B_RUSH stock (S1484). After the processing of S1484, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during B_RUSH.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1483 that the game is not the BB winning game (NO in S1483), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the B_RUSH game number counter is 0 (S1485). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1485 that the value of the B_RUSH game number counter is not 0 (NO in S1484), the sub CPU 81 ends the B_RUSH mid-process.

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1485 that the value of the B_RUSH game number counter is 0 (YES in S1484), the sub CPU 81 performs the B_RUSH continuous lottery process (S1486). In this processing, the B_RUSH continuous lottery table (see FIG. 146) is referred to, and continuation or termination of B_RUSH is randomly determined based on the type of the BR loop rate.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not B_RUSH continuation has been won in S1486 (S1487). In S1487, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the B_RUSH continuation has not been won (in the case of NO determination in S1487), the sub CPU 81 sets LV.5 in R_ART as the next sub game state and is preparing for ART. The flag is turned off (S1488). After the processing of S1488, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during B_RUSH.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1487 that the B_RUSH continuation has been won (YES in S1487), the sub CPU 81 sets "3" in the B_RUSH game number counter (S1489). After the processing of S1489, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during B_RUSH.

[Processing during RTG]
Next, with reference to FIG. 240, the RTG in-process performed when the start lever in “RTG” is operated will be described.

First, the sub CPU 81 performs the PTR stock loop lottery process described with reference to FIG. 234 (S1501).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the specialization guaranteed game number counter is 1 or more (S1502). In S1502, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the specialization guaranteed game number counter is 1 or more (YES in S1502), the sub CPU 81 subtracts 1 from the value of the specialization guaranteed game number counter ( S1503).

In S1502, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the specialization guaranteed game number counter is not 1 or more (when S1502 is NO), or after the processing of S1503, the sub CPU 81 performs the PTR stock lottery process during RTG. (S1504). In this processing, the PTR stock during RTG lottery table (see FIG. 150) is referred to, and the winning or non-winning of the PTR stock is randomly determined based on the type of the PTR loop rate.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether the PTR stock is 1 or more (S1505). In S1505, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the PTR stock is not 1 or more (when S1505 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1509 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1505 that the PTR stock is 1 or more (in the case of YES determination in S1505), the sub CPU 81 adds the lottery result of S1504 to the PTR loop stock (S1506).

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a specialization type lottery process when the PTR is won (S1507). In this processing, the additional specialization type lottery table (see FIG. 118) at the time of PTR winning is referred to, and the additional specialization type is randomly determined based on the winning opportunity.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the additional specialization type determined in S1507 in the sub RAM 83 (S1508).

When S1505 is NO, or after the processing of S1508, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is a BB winning game (S1509). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1509 that the game is not the BB winning game (NO in S1509), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S15141 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1509 that the game is a BB winning game (YES in S1509), the sub CPU 81 adds 1 to the value of the specialization guaranteed game number counter (S1510).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the MICHI (BB5) is won (S1511). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1511 that the MICHI (BB5) is not a win (when the determination in S1511 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1514 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1511 that the MICHI (BB5) is a win (in the case of YES determination in S1511), the sub CPU 81 performs the PTR winning additional specialization type lottery process (S1512). In this processing, the additional specialization type lottery table (see FIG. 118) at the time of PTR winning is referred to, and the additional specialization type is randomly determined based on the winning opportunity.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the additional specialization type determined in S1512 in the sub RAM 83 (S1513).

When S1509 and S1511 are NO, or after the processing of S1513, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the specialization guaranteed game number counter is 0 (S1514). When the sub CPU 81 determines in step S1514 that the value of the specialization guaranteed game number counter is not 0 (NO in step S1514), the sub CPU 81 ends the RTG processing.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1514 that the value of the specialization guaranteed game number counter is 0 (YES in S1514), the sub CPU 81 sets LV.5 of R_ART as the next sub game state. After setting, the ART preparation flag is turned off (S1515). After the processing of S1515, the sub CPU 81 ends the processing during RTG.

[Processing waiting for ART end]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 241 and 242, an ART end waiting process performed when the start lever is operated during the R_ART end waiting will be described.

First, the sub CPU 81 turns off the RTG winning flag (S1521). Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the RT4 transfer replay is won (S1522). When the sub CPU 81 determines in step S1522 that the RT4 transition replay has not been won (NO in step S1522), the sub CPU 81 performs processing of step S1526 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1522 that the RT4 transfer replay is won (YES in S1522), the sub CPU 81 performs the RTG transfer lottery process (S1523). In this processing, the RTG transfer lottery table (see FIG. 147) is referred to, and the winning or non-winning of the RTG transfer is randomly determined based on the number of BBs.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the RTG transfer has been won in S1523 (S1524). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1524 that the RTG transfer has not been won (NO in S1524), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1525 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1524 that the RTG shift has been won (in the case of YES determination in S1524), the sub CPU 81 turns ON the RTG winning flag (S1525).

If NO in S1522 or S1524, or after the process of S1525, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the batting order bell is won (S1526). That is, it is determined whether or not the winning numbers are “42” to “53”.

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1526 that the batting order bell is won (YES in S1526), the sub CPU 81 temporarily sets the next sub gaming state to the normal state (S1527).

In S1526, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the batting order bell has not been won (NO in S1526) or after the processing of S1527, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the batting order bell has been won (S1528). .. When the sub CPU 81 determines in step S1528 that the batting order bell is won (YES in step S1528), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of step S1535 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1528 that the batting order bell has not been won (NO in S1528), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is a BB winning game (S1529). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1529 that the game is a BB winning game (YES in S1529), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1535 described below.

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1529 that the game is not the BB winning game (NO in S1529), the sub CPU 81 performs the EX point acquisition lottery process during LV.1, 3, 4 (S1530). In this processing, the EX points in the LV.3 lottery table (see FIGS. 80 to 82) are referred to, and the EX points are determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the EX point counter during R_ART is 100 or more (S1531). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1531 that the value of the EX point counter during R_ART is not 100 or more (NO in S1531), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1535 (see FIG. 242) described later.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1531 that the value of the EX point counter during R_ART is 100 or more (YES in S1531), the sub CPU 81 sets LV.1 of R_ART to the next sub gaming state. The setting is made (S1532).

Next, the sub CPU 81 conducts initial EX point lottery processing at the time of level transition (S1533). In this processing, the EX points at the time of level transition (refer to FIG. 106) are referred to, and the EX points are randomly determined based on the level of the transfer destination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 sets the EX points acquired in S1533 in the corresponding EX point counter (S1534).

When S1528 and S1529 are YES, when S1531 is NO or after the processing of S1534, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is a BB winning game (S1535). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1535 that the game is not the BB winning game (NO in S1535), the sub CPU 81 ends the ART end waiting process.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1535 that the game is a BB winning game (YES in S1535), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the MICHI (BB5) is a winning game (S1536). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1536 that the MICHI (BB5) has not been won (NO in S1536), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1545 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1536 that the winning is MICHI (BB5) (YES in S1536), the sub CPU 81 performs the PTR winning specialization type lottery process (S1537). In this processing, the additional specialization type lottery table (see FIG. 118) at the time of PTR winning is referred to, and the additional specialization type is randomly determined based on the winning opportunity.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the additional specialization type determined in S1537 in the sub RAM 83 (S1538).

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs an initial EX point random determination process at the time of level transition (S1539). In this process, the initial EX point random determination table at the time of level transition (see FIG. 106) is referred to, and the initial EX points are randomly determined based on the level type of the transfer destination. In S1539, EX points for B_RUSH are determined.

Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the B_RUSH EX points acquired in S1539 to the B_RUSH EX point counter (S1540).

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a B_RUSH mode shift lottery process (S1541). In this processing, the B_RUSH mode transition lottery table (see FIG. 137) is referred to, and the mode type is randomly determined based on the type of the transition source.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (S1542). In S1542, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is not 100 or more (NO in S1542), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1545 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1542 that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (YES in S1542), the sub CPU 81 performs the B_RUSH loop rate random determination process (S1543). In this processing, the B_RUSH loop rate lottery table (see FIGS. 144 and 145) is referred to, and the type of the BR loop rate is randomly determined based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the BR loop rate type determined in S1543 in the sub RAM 83, and initializes the B_RUSH EX point counter (S1544). That is, the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is set to 0.

When NO is determined in S1536 and S1542, or after the processing of S1544, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the MICHI (BB5) is won (S1545). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1545 that the MICHI (BB5) has not been won (NO in S1545), the sub CPU 81 ends the ART end waiting process.

On the other hand, in S1545, when the sub CPU 81 determines that MICHI (BB5) is a win (in the case of YES determination in S1545), the sub CPU 81 sets LV.1 of R_ART in the next sub gaming state (S1546). ).

Next, the sub CPU 81 conducts a level transition initial EX point lottery process (S1547). In this process, the initial EX point random determination table at the time of level transition (see FIG. 106) is referred to, and the initial EX points are randomly determined based on the level type of the transfer destination. In S1547, the EX point during R_ART is determined.

Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the EX point during R_ART acquired in S1547 to the EX point during R_ART counter (S1548). After the processing of S1548, the sub CPU 81 ends the ART end waiting processing.

[Processing when the rotating cylinder is stopped]
Next, with reference to FIG. 243, the processing for stopping the rotating cylinder performed when the rotating cylinder is stopped will be described. This spinning cylinder stop time process is performed when the sub control circuit 42 receives the reel stop command in S177 described above, and is performed during the first stop or the second stop (the pressing order is determined at the second stop). Therefore, it is not done during the third stop). When the sub control circuit 42 receives the reel stop command in S184, the spinning cylinder stop process is not performed.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not there is a push order designation (navigation) (S1581). When the sub CPU 81 determines in step S1581 that there is no push order designation (navigation) (NO in step S1581), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of step S1584 described later.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1581 that there is a push order designation (navigation) (YES in S1581), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the stopped reel is different from the push order designation (navi) reel. It is determined (S1582). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1582 that the stopped reel does not differ from (is the same as) the push order designation (navi) reel (when S1581 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 executes the process of S1584 described later. To do.

In S1582, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the stopped reel is different from the push order designation (navi) reel (when YES in S1582), the sub CPU 81 turns on the navigation depress flag (S1583).

When S1581 and S1582 are NO determinations, or after the processing of S1583, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the current sub game state is specialization preparation (S1584). In S1584, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state is not under specialization preparation (NO in S1584), the sub CPU 81 ends the spinning cylinder stop process.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1584 that the current sub game state is in the preparation for specialization (YES in S1584), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the navigation depression error flag is ON. Yes (S1585). In S1585, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the navigation depressing mistake flag is not ON (NO in S1585), the sub CPU 81 ends the spinning cylinder stop process.

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1585 that the navigation depression error flag is ON (YES in S1585), the sub CPU 81 performs the specialization start process described with reference to FIG. 193 (S1586). After the processing of S1586, the sub CPU 81 terminates the processing for turning cylinder rotation.

[Third stop operation process]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 244 to 246, the third stop operation time process performed at the third stop operation will be described. The third stop operation time process is performed when the sub control circuit 42 receives the display command in S305.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the BB is being carried over (S1601). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1601 that the BB is being carried over (YES in S1601), the sub CPU 81 ends the third stop operation time process.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1601 that the BB is not being carried over (when S1601 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the BB is being carried (S1602). When the sub CPU 81 determines in BB in S1602 (YES in S1601), the sub CPU 81 ends the third stop operation process.

When the sub CPU 81 determines in step S1602 that the BB is not in progress (NO in step S1601), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the ART preparation flag is ON (S1603). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1603 that the ART preparation flag is not ON (NO in S1603), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1606 described below.

On the other hand, in S1603, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the ART preparation flag is ON (when S1603 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the RT game state is the RT0 game state ( S1604). In S1604, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT game state is the RT0 game state (YES in S1604), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1606 described later.

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1604 that the RT gaming state is not the RT0 gaming state (NO in S1604), the sub CPU 81 turns off the ART preparation flag (S1605).

When S1603 is NO determination, S1604 is YES determination, or after the processing of S1605, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the current sub game state is the normal state (S1606). In S1606, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state is not in the normal state (NO in S1604), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1624 (see FIG. 244) described later.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1606 that the current sub game state is in the normal state (YES in S1604), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is a BB winning game (S1607). ). In S1607, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the game is a BB winning game (YES in S1607), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1614 described below.

In S1607, when the sub CPU 81 determines that it is not a BB winning game (NO in S1607), the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT game state after the end of the previous game (game) is RT0 game state, RT1 game state, RT3 game. It is determined whether the state is one of the states (S1608). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1608 that the RT gaming state after the end of the previous game (game) is not the RT0 gaming state, the RT1 gaming state, or the RT3 gaming state (NO in S1608), the sub CPU 81 determines Then, the process of S1614 described below is performed.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1608 that the RT gaming state after the end of the previous game (game) is any one of the RT0 gaming state, the RT1 gaming state, and the RT3 gaming state (YES in S1608), The sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the winning numbers “14” to “24” are won by the internal lottery process (see FIG. 167) (S1609). In S1609, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the winning numbers “14” to “24” have not been won (when S1609 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1612 described below.

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1609 that the winning numbers “14” to “24” are won (YES in S1609), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the RT4 specific replay is a winning prize ( S1610). In S1610, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT4 specific replay is not a win (when S1610 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1612 described below.

On the other hand, in S1610, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT4 specific replay has won (in the case of YES determination in S1610), the sub CPU 81 sets the batting order specific lip to the reference winning combination in the highly accurate stock lottery process (S1611). ).

When NO is determined in S1609 and S1610, or after the process of S1611, the sub CPU 81 performs a highly accurate stock lottery process (S1612). In this process, the high-probability stock lottery table (see FIG. 63) is referred to, and the high-probability stock number is randomly determined based on the reference winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the lottery result of S1612 (the determined high-precision stock number) to the value of the direct hit ART high-precision stock number counter (S1613).

When S1607 is YES, S1608 is NO, or after the processing of S1613, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the RT4 transition replay is a prize (S1614). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1614 that the RT4 transition replay is not a win (in the case of NO determination in S1614), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1624 described below.

On the other hand, in S1614, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT4 transition replay is a win (in the case of YES determination in S1614), the sub CPU 81 adds the RTG to the PTR stock and sets the RTG to the next sub game state. Yes (S1615).

Next, the sub CPU 81 conducts ART grade lottery processing (S1616). In this processing, the ART grade lottery table (see FIGS. 71 to 73) is referred to, and the ART grade type is randomly determined based on the mode type. Then, the sub CPU 81 sets the lottery result of S1616 (determined grade type) to the ART grade (S1617).

Next, the sub CPU 81 conducts initial EX point lottery processing at the time of level transition (S1618). In this process, the initial EX point random determination table at the time of level transition (see FIG. 106) is referred to, and the initial EX points are randomly determined based on the level type of the transfer destination. In S1618, EX points for B_RUSH are determined.

Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the EX point for B_RUSH acquired in S1618 to the EX point counter for B_RUSH (S1619).

Next, the sub CPU 81 conducts a B_RUSH mode transition lottery process (S1620). In this processing, the B_RUSH mode transition lottery table (see FIG. 137) is referred to, and the mode type is randomly determined based on the type of the transition source.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (S1621). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1621 that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is not 100 or more (NO in S1612), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1624 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1621 that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (YES in S1621), the sub CPU 81 performs the B_RUSH loop rate random determination process (S1622). In this processing, the B_RUSH loop rate lottery table (see FIGS. 144 and 145) is referred to, and the type of the BR loop rate is randomly determined based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the type of the BR loop rate determined in S1622 in the sub RAM 83, and initializes the B_RUSH EX point counter (S1623). That is, the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is set to 0.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the current sub game state is waiting for the end of ART (S1624). In S1624, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state is not waiting for ART end (NO in S1624), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1645 (see FIG. 245) described later.

On the other hand, in S1624, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state is waiting for the ART end (YES in S1624), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the batting order bell is won. (S1625). That is, it is determined whether or not the winning numbers are “42” to “53”. When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1625 that the batting order bell has not been won (NO in S1625), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1630 described below.

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1625 that the batting order bell has been won (YES in S1625), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the payout number of medals is nine (S1626). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1626 that the number of paid-out medals is not 9 (when S1626 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1630 described below.

On the other hand, in S1626, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the number of medals to be paid out is 9 (in the case of YES determination in S1626), the sub CPU 81 determines whether the RT gaming state at the time of lever operation and the RT gaming state before winning the prize. It is determined whether they are the same (S1627).

In S1627, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT gaming state at the time of operating the lever is the same as the RT gaming state before winning (YES in S1627), the sub CPU 81 ends ART in the next sub gaming state. The standby state is set (S1628). After the processing of S1628, the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S1630 described below.

On the other hand, in S1627, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT game state at the time of lever operation and the RT game state before winning is not the same (when S1627 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 normally returns to the next sub game state. The state is set (S1629).

There is no transition of RT between the operation of the start lever 16 and the winning of the transition of RT. Therefore, it is usually unlikely that S1627 becomes NO. That is, if the determination in S1627 is NO, it is considered that either an illegal act has been performed or some abnormality has occurred. Therefore, the normal state with the lowest degree of advantage for the player (the initial state set when the setting is changed) is set. In the present embodiment, the ART may be restarted (so-called pullback is generated) while waiting for the ART to be finished, and the probability of winning the ART is higher than in the normal state.

In the case of NO determination in S1625 and S1626 or after the processing of S1628 and S1629, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the RTG transfer flag is ON and the RT4 transfer replay is a prize (S1630). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1630 that the RTG shift flag is ON and the RT4 shift replay is not a win (in the case where S1630 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1638 (see FIG. 245) described later. ..

On the other hand, in S1630, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RTG shift flag is ON and the RT4 shift replay is a winning prize (YES in S1630), the sub CPU 81 adds the RTG to the PTR stock, and next time. RTG is set to the sub game state of (S1631).

Next, the sub CPU 81 conducts initial EX point lottery processing at the time of level transition (S1632). In this process, the initial EX point random determination table at the time of level transition (see FIG. 106) is referred to, and the initial EX points are randomly determined based on the level type of the transfer destination. In S1632, EX points for B_RUSH are determined.

Next, the sub CPU 81 adds the B_RUSH EX points acquired in S1632 to the B_RUSH EX point counter (S1633).

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a B_RUSH mode shift lottery process (S1634). In this processing, the B_RUSH mode transition lottery table (see FIG. 137) is referred to, and the mode type is randomly determined based on the type of the transition source.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is 100 or more (S1635). When the sub CPU 81 determines in step S1635 that the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is not 100 or more (NO in step S1635), the sub CPU 81 performs processing of step S1638 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1635 that the value of the B_RUSH EX point counter is 100 or more (YES in S1635), the sub CPU 81 performs the B_RUSH loop rate random determination process (S1636). In this processing, the B_RUSH loop rate lottery table (see FIGS. 144 and 145) is referred to, and the type of the BR loop rate is randomly determined based on the internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the type of the BR loop rate determined in S1636 in the sub RAM 83, and initializes the B_RUSH EX point counter (S1637). That is, the value of the EX point counter for B_RUSH is set to 0.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the next sub game state is the normal state (S1638). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1638 that the next sub game state is not the normal state (NO in S1638), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1645 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1638 that the next sub game state is the normal state (YES in S1638), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the direct hit ART flag is ON ( S1639). In S1639, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the direct hit ART flag is not ON (NO in S1639), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S1645 described below.

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1639 that the direct hit ART flag is ON (when YES is determined in S1639), the sub CPU 81 sets the direct hit ART flag to OFF and sets the direct hit ART winning grade to the ART grade. (S1640).

Next, the sub CPU 81 sets R_ART LV.3 to the next sub game state, and clears the R_ART LV.3 shift count (S1641).

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the current RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state (S1642) When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1642 that the current RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state (S1642). If YES is determined), the sub CPU 81 turns ON the ART preparation flag (S1643). After the processing of S1643, the sub CPU 81 performs the processing of S1645 described below.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S1642 that the current RT gaming state is not the RT0 gaming state (NO in S1642), the sub CPU 81 turns off the ART preparation flag (S1644).

When S1624, S1638, and S1639 are NO determinations, or after the processing of S1644, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the current sub gaming state is "FIGHTING" (S1645). In S1645, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state is not "FIGHING" (NO in S1645), the sub CPU 81 ends the third stop operation time process.

On the other hand, in S1645, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub gaming state is in FIGTING (when S1645 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the FIGTING in-progress flag is OFF. (S1646). In S1646, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the FIGHTING continuation flag is not OFF (NO in S1646), the sub CPU 81 ends the third stop operation time process.

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1646 that the FIGHTING during continuation flag is OFF (YES in S1646), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the RT3 transition replay is a prize (S1647).

When the sub CPU 81 determines in S1647 that the RT3 transition replay is a prize (YES in S1647), the sub CPU 81 sets LV.5 of R_ART in the next sub gaming state (S1648). After the processing of S1648, the sub CPU 81 ends the third stop operation time processing.

On the other hand, in S1647, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT3 transition replay is not a prize (when S1647 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the current RT game state is the RT4 game state ( S1649).

In S1649, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current RT gaming state is not the RT4 gaming state (NO in S1649), the sub CPU 81 sets LV.5 of R_ART to the next sub gaming state (S1650). ). After the processing of S1650, the sub CPU 81 ends the third stop operation time processing.

On the other hand, in S1649, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current RT gaming state is the RT4 gaming state (YES in S1649), the sub CPU 81 sets FIGHTING to the next sub gaming state (S1651). .. After the processing of S1651, the sub CPU 81 ends the third stop operation time processing.

[Processing during game lock]
Next, with reference to FIG. 247, the game lock process performed when the sub control unit (sub control circuit 42) receives the game lock command during the game lock will be described.
In this embodiment, when there is no command data to be transmitted, the non-operation command data is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42.

First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the RT gaming state is the RT4 gaming state (S1671). In S1671, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT gaming state is not the RT4 gaming state (NO in S1671), the sub CPU 81 ends the game locked process.

On the other hand, in S1671, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the RT game state is the RT4 game state (YES in S1671), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the game is a PREMIUM combo occurrence. (S1672). In S1672, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the game is not a PREMIUM combo occurrence (when S1672 is NO determination), the sub CPU 81 ends the game locked process.

In S1672, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the game is a PREMIUM combo occurrence (in the case of YES determination in S1672), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the current sub game state is “PREMIUM”. (S1673). In S1673, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state is not "PREMIUM" (NO in S1673), the sub CPU 81 ends the game locked process.

On the other hand, in S1673, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the current sub game state is “PREMIUM” (YES in S1673), the sub CPU 81 performs the lottery process for the number of additional games during the PREMIUM combo (S1674). ). In this processing, the additional game number random determination table during the PREMIUM combo is referred to (see FIG. 122), and the additional game number is randomly determined based on the reel effect type. After the processing of S1674, the sub CPU 81 ends the game lock processing.

[Process when changing settings]
Next, with reference to FIG. 248, setting change processing performed when setting is changed will be described. This setting change process is performed when the sub control circuit 42 receives the setting change command in S1.

First, the sub CPU 81 initializes all variables related to the lottery process by the sub control unit (sub control circuit 42) (S1681). Next, the sub CPU 81 clears the direct hit ART highly accurate stock number (S1682).

Next, the sub CPU 81 carries out a setting mode specifying mode MAP lottery process (S1683). In this process, the map type is determined by lottery by referring to the setting mode specifying mode MAP lottery table (see FIG. 58). Then, the sub CPU 81 sets “0” to the specific mode MAP access number and sets the specific mode on the MAP to the next specific mode (S1684).

Next, the sub CPU 81 conducts LV.4 opponent mode lottery processing at the time of setting change (S1685). In this processing, the LV.4 opponent mode lottery table at the time of setting change (see FIG. 117) is referred to, and the opponent mode is randomly determined. After the processing of S1685, the sub CPU 81 ends the setting change processing.

[Explanation of R_ART operation]
In this embodiment, R_ART is composed of a plurality of layers. That is, R_ART is composed of LV.1 to LV.5. Then, in each of LV.1 to LV.4, a game is played for a predetermined period (20 games). On the other hand, the predetermined period (the number of games) of LV.5 (PTR) is basically determined by "PREMIUM", "FIGHTING", or "BURNING" performed after the shift to LV.5.

In LV.1 to LV.4 of R_ART, EX points during R_ART are given by lottery at the time of transfer and lottery based on an internal winning combination in each game. Then, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in LV.1 to LV.4 of R_ART, the process moves to the next higher level (layer). In this embodiment, the predetermined condition is that the total of EX points in R_ART is 100 or more.

On the other hand, in LV.1 to LV.4 of R_ART, when the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the process moves to the next lower level (layer). If the predetermined condition is not satisfied in LV.1, R_ART ends.

Therefore, when the player moves to the next higher level, at least the predetermined period (20 games) of the moved (raised) level and the predetermined period (20 games) of the level that is one level lower than that level are awarded. .. As a result, it is possible to make the player feel as if a lot of privilege that is advantageous to the player is given, rather than simply giving a predetermined number of games (period). As a result, the enjoyment of the game during R_ART(AT) can be improved.

Also, the level does not always go down after playing a game for a predetermined period at the level that goes up. Therefore, when the level shifts to the next higher level, a shift of two or more levels (level up) can be expected. As a result, the increase (so-called addition) of the period in which R_ART is performed can be made monotonous, and the interest of the game during R_ART(AT) of the game can be increased.

Further, the player can grasp whether the end of R_ART(AT) is near or far, for each level (hierarchy), and the end of AT is displayed as compared with the case where the end of AT is represented by the number of remaining games. It is possible to enhance the effect of expressing. Further, when the end of AT is represented by the number of remaining games, when the number of remaining games exceeds a certain value, it becomes difficult for the player to feel the difference. However, by representing the end of R_ART(AT) as a hierarchy as in the present embodiment, it is possible to effectively represent the difference in the period until the end of R_ART(AT).

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the CZ (BB1 to BB4) is shifted to R_ART, it starts from LV.3 of R_ART. As a result, R_ART does not end only at the level (hierarchy) at which it started, and a certain number of medals can be easily obtained by R_ART, and the player's expectation for the start of R_ART(AT) can be increased.

Furthermore, by ensuring the expectation that a certain number of medals will be obtained, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from decreasing even if the predetermined period of each layer is shortened. Further, by shortening the predetermined period of each layer, it is possible to increase the number of layers and to easily satisfy a predetermined condition, and it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in the development and design of game in R_ART.

Further, in the present embodiment, in LV.2 of R_ART, LV.2 loop lottery for determining whether or not to repeat LV.2 (same layer) is performed. As a result, in LV.2, it is possible to repeat the same layer even if the predetermined condition is not satisfied. As a result, the player's discomfort can be reduced even when the predetermined condition is often not satisfied.

Further, when the CZ (BB1 to BB4) shifts to R_ART, since it starts from LV.3 of R_ART, LV.2 can always be passed before R_ART ends. As a result, when CZ (BB1 to BB4) shifts to R_ART, LV.2 loop lottery can be performed without fail, and discomfort can be reduced to enhance the enjoyment of the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the highest tier (LV.5), a specialized zone (“PREMIUM”, “FIGHTING”, or “BURNING” that can lengthen a period in which a game is played (increase the number of games) ]) was provided. As a result, if it is possible to shift to the highest level, LV.5, it is possible to give the player the expectation that the period in which R_ART is performed can be lengthened, and the game during R_ART(AT) It is difficult to be monotonous, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, when MICHI (BB5) is changed to R_ART, it is determined that R_ART starts from LV.1 and is changed to LV.5. As a result, the player's expectation for winning MICHI (BB5) can be increased, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, when MICHI (BB5) is changed to R_ART, the player can experience the flow of changing R_ART from LV.1 to LV.5. As a result, even when CZ (BB1 to BB4) shifts to R_ART, it is possible to be aware of the flow of shifting to LV.5, and it is possible to raise interest in whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied in R_ART. The interest of the game can be enhanced.

In addition, in the present embodiment, an RTG capable of stocking the PTR (LV.5) may be executed when the player shifts to the RT4 gaming state by himself by answering correctly in the pushing order. Then, when RTG ends, LV.5 of R_ART is started. Therefore, by a method different from the lottery, it is possible to allow the player to play the game while having the expectation that the player may shift to the specialized zone that is advantageous to the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, there is a possibility that the RT3 gaming state in which R_ART is performed may be shifted to the RT4 gaming state in which RTG is performed. As a result, during the period from the end of R_ART until the RT game state shifts from the RT3 game state to the RT1 (RT0) game state, it is easy to shift to the RT4 game state (RTG) by pushing the correct answer. As a result, it is possible to expect that R_ART will be started again (so-called pullback) after the end of R_ART.

The configuration and operation of the gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention have been described above, including the operational effects. However, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various embodiments and modifications are included without departing from the gist of the present invention described in the claims.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, each predetermined period of LV.1 to LV.4 is the same. However, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the period in which each tier is executed may be different. Also, the conditions for moving up one step from each layer may be different. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the user to descend from the special layer or to easily move up from the special layer.

Further, in the present embodiment, the level (hierarchy) to be started is determined according to the transition trigger (CZ, MICHI, RTG) to R_ART. However, the gaming machine according to the present invention may be configured such that the starting level (tier) in R_ART is determined by lottery.

For example, if the player selects lottery when shifting from CZ (BB1 to BB4) to R_ART, either LV.2 or LV.4 is determined as the level for starting R_ART, If the player does not select the lottery, LV.3 may be determined as the level at which R_ART is started.

In addition, in the present embodiment, in LV.2 of R_ART, it is determined whether or not the total of EX points has reached the specified value, and if it has not reached the specified value, the LV.2 loop lottery is performed. .. However, the gaming machine according to the present invention may be configured such that the LV.2 loop lottery is performed before it is determined whether or not the total of EX points has reached the specified value.

In this case, the EX points may be carried over. If the lottery is won and the total number of EX points reaches the specified value (satisfies the predetermined condition), the loop of LV.2 is set before moving up one step (LV.3). You may go first. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect representing a state in which it is decided that the shift to the upper stage (LV.3) is established. Examples of the effect representing the state in which it is decided to move up one stage include BGM and a change in the background screen.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the loop rate related to the loop lottery process is configured to be preferentially (high) only when the number of times LV.2 is continued is the first time (see FIG. 112 ). However, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, the loop rate after the second consecutive times may be equal to the loop rate after the first consecutive times. Further, a plurality of loop rates relating to the loop lottery process of LV.2 may be provided instead of a plurality.

Further, in this embodiment, when the specified number of games (for example, 20 games) is exhausted in the RT2 gaming state, the RT gaming state is shifted to the RT0 gaming state. However, the gaming machine according to the present invention may be configured so as not to easily shift to the RT3 gaming state. For example, when the specified number of games is exhausted in the RT2 gaming state, the RT gaming state is shifted to the RT1 gaming state. You may

<Summary>
Conventionally, in the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, there is known a gaming machine having a function of navigating the establishment of a specific small winning combination by a lamp or the like, that is, an assist time (hereinafter referred to as “AT”) function. A game machine has been proposed in which a plurality of games in which the AT function is executed is set as one set, and the AT function is managed in set units (see, for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-200497). In the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2012-200497, a so-called add-on function is provided, which gives one or more sets of ATs when a predetermined condition is satisfied while the functions of ATs are being executed (during AT). doing.

According to such a gaming machine, execution of at least one set of ATs is guaranteed by satisfying a predetermined condition in the ATs, so that there is a high possibility that the total number of gaming media can be obtained. As a result, it is possible to increase the expectation that the number of sets to be added will be determined during AT. Also, by determining the number of sets to be added during AT, it is possible that AT will continue to exceed the rights of the AT granted at the start of AT, and the expectation that AT execution will be decided is further enhanced. Can be increased.

However, in the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2012-200497, a simple game property of whether or not there is an AT set (AT right) is provided, and the game during AT is likely to be monotonous. As a result, there was a fear that the interest of the game would be reduced.

The present invention has been made to meet the above demands, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game during AT.

[ART stage management function]
In the gaming machine of the present invention, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in a plurality of layers (for example, LV.1 to LV.5 of R_ART) in which a game is played for a predetermined period (for example, 20 games), If the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the process moves to a layer (level) one level higher, and the process moves to a layer (level) one level lower. Then, if the predetermined condition cannot be satisfied in the hierarchy (level) one step lower, R_ART ends.

Therefore, when the player moves to a layer (level) one step higher, at least a predetermined period (20 games) of the moved (raised) layer and a predetermined period (20 games) of a layer one step lower than that level are awarded. It will be. As a result, it is possible to make the player feel as if a lot of privilege that is advantageous to the player is given, rather than simply giving a predetermined number of games (period). As a result, the enjoyment of the game during R_ART(AT) can be improved.

Further, the player can grasp whether the end of R_ART(AT) is near or far, for each layer, and the end of AT is represented rather than the end of AT is represented by the number of remaining games. The effect can be enhanced. Further, when the end of AT is represented by the number of remaining games, when the number of remaining games exceeds a certain value, it becomes difficult for the player to feel the difference. However, by representing the end of R_ART(AT) as a hierarchy as in the present embodiment, it is possible to effectively represent the difference in the period until the end of R_ART(AT).

[Intermediate hierarchy start function]
Further, in the present embodiment, when CZ (BB1 to BB4) is shifted to R_ART, it starts from LV.3 of R_ART (a layer other than the lowest layer). As a result, R_ART does not end only at the layer (level) where it started, and a certain number of medals can be easily obtained by R_ART, and the player's expectation for the start of R_ART(AT) can be increased.

[Same layer loop function]
Further, in the present embodiment, in LV.2 of R_ART, LV.2 loop lottery for determining whether or not to repeat LV.2 (same layer) is performed. As a result, in LV.2, it is possible to repeat the same layer even if the predetermined condition is not satisfied. As a result, the player's discomfort can be reduced even when the predetermined condition is often not satisfied.

[Top layer period extension function]
Further, in the present embodiment, a special zone (“PREMIUM”, “FIGHTING”, or “BURNING”) capable of lengthening a period during which a game is played is provided in the highest layer (LV.5). As a result, it is possible to give the player the expectation that the period in which R_ART is performed can be extended if the player can move to the highest level, and it is difficult for the game during R_ART(AT) to become monotonous. The interest of the game can be improved.

[Hierarchical round trip function]
Furthermore, when MICHI (BB5) is shifted to R_ART, the player can experience a flow of shifting from the lowest layer (LV.1) of R_ART to the highest layer (LV.5). As a result, even when CZ (BB1 to BB4) shifts to R_ART, it is possible to be aware of the flow of shifting to LV.5, and it is possible to raise interest in whether or not a predetermined condition is satisfied in R_ART. The interest of the game can be enhanced.

[Self-high RT function]
In addition, in the present embodiment, an RTG capable of stocking the PTR (LV.5) may be executed when the player shifts to the RT4 gaming state by himself by answering correctly in the pushing order. When the RTG ends, the highest layer of R_ART (LV.5) is started. Therefore, by a method different from the lottery, it is possible to allow the player to play the game while having the expectation that the player may shift to the specialized zone that is advantageous to the player.

(Second embodiment)
Next, a gaming machine showing an embodiment of the present invention will be described. Description of the configuration and operation already described in the first embodiment may be omitted.

The gaming machine of the present invention is a gaming machine that randomly determines whether or not to give a privilege based on the probability associated with the set value, and directly refers to the set value that has been set Instead of notifying the effect based on the actual winning number of the bonus, by notifying the effect based on the setting value indirectly estimated, the reliability of the set value with the elapsed time of the game of the player Improve.

Hereinafter, a pachi-slot is taken as an example of a gaming machine showing an embodiment of the present invention, and its configuration and operation will be described with reference to the drawings. In the present embodiment, in order to win a specific small winning combination that is won internally, an assist time (hereinafter, referred to as “AT”) that is a function of navigating with information on a stop operation by a lamp or the like, and a specific symbol combination. When is displayed, a function in which a gaming state in which a winning probability of replay is higher than that in a normal state is activated, that is, an assist replay time (hereinafter referred to as “ART”) which is simultaneously activated with a function of replay time (hereinafter referred to as “RT”) Pachi-slot with the function of) will be described. The transition of the game state to AT and ART (the operation of AT and ART) is given to the player as a privilege by lottery.

<Function flow>
First, the functional flow of the pachi-slot will be described with reference to FIG. 249. In the pachi-slot of the present embodiment, medals are used as a game medium for playing a game. In addition to medals, for example, coins, game balls, game point data, tokens, or the like can be applied as the game medium.

When a player inserts a medal into a pachi-slot and operates a start lever, one value (hereinafter referred to as a random number value) is extracted from random numbers in a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535).

The internal lottery means as the privilege lottery means performs the lottery based on the extracted random number value, the installation value set by the setting means, and the probability stored in the privilege probability storage means, and determines the internal winning combination. The internal lottery means, the setting means, and the privilege probability storage means are one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit 41. By the determination of the internal winning combination, the combination of symbols that is allowed to be displayed along the below-described activated line (winning determination line) is determined. The types of symbol combinations are classified into those related to "winning prizes" in which benefits such as payout of medals, operation of replay (replay), operation of bonuses, etc. are given to the player, and so-called "outliers". The related items are provided.

Here, a method of setting the set value will be specifically described. First, when the power of the pachi-slot is turned on with the key switch of the pachi-slot turned on by a predetermined key, a setting change screen is displayed on the display screen of the pachi-slot. By operating a predetermined button or the like according to the instruction on the setting change screen, it is possible to select the state of the desired set value. After selecting the set value, the set value is fixed by operating the operation lever or the like. Then, when the key switch is turned off by rotating the predetermined key in the opposite direction, the display of the setting change screen ends, and the pachi-slot is in a state where normal games can be played. When the power of the pachi-slot is turned on while the key switch is in the OFF state, the pachi-slot can be played after the normal return process is performed. If the key switch is turned on with a predetermined key while the power of the pachi-slot is turned on, the setting confirmation state is entered, and the current set value is displayed on the display screen or the like. The setting of the set value is performed by the process of the main control circuit 41. Information about the set value is transmitted to the sub control circuit 42 in the command transmission process when the power is turned on. The pachi-slot has six setting values of setting 1 to setting 6, and the winning probability determined to be a predetermined privilege is different for each setting value.

Further, when the start lever is operated, the plurality of reels are rotated. After that, when the player presses the stop button corresponding to the predetermined reel, the reel stop control means performs control for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing when the stop button is pressed. To do. The reel stop control means is one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit 41.

In the pachi-slot, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel within a specified time (190 msec or 75 msec) from when the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reel within this specified time is referred to as the “number of sliding pieces”. In the present embodiment, when the specified period is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding pieces (maximum number of sliding pieces) is set to 4 symbols, and when the specified period is 75 msec, the maximum sliding piece is set. The number is set to one pattern.

The reel stop control means, when the internal winning combination permitting the combination display of the symbols relating to the winning is determined, the combination of the symbols is normally placed on the activated line within a prescribed time of 190 msec (for 4 symbols). The rotation of the reel is stopped so as to be displayed as much as possible. Furthermore, the reel stop control means uses various prescribed times corresponding to the gaming state, and stops the rotation of the reel so that a combination of symbols which is not permitted to be displayed by the internal winning combination is not displayed along the activated line. Let

In this way, when the rotations of the plurality of reels are all stopped, the winning determination means determines whether the combination of symbols displayed along the activated line is related to winning. This winning determination means is also one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit 41. Then, when it is determined by the winning determination means that the displayed combination of symbols is related to winning, a bonus such as payout of medals is given to the player. In the pachi-slot, the above-described series of flows is performed as one game (unit game).

Further, in the pachi-slot, in the flow of the above-mentioned series of game operations, video display performed by a display device such as a liquid crystal display device, light output performed by various lamps, sound output performed by a speaker, or a combination thereof is performed. Various performances are performed by using it.

Specifically, when the start lever is operated, a random number value for production (hereinafter referred to as a random number value for production) is extracted in addition to the random number value used for determining the internal winning combination described above. When the random number value for effect is extracted, the effect content determination means randomly determines the effect to be executed this time from the plurality of kinds of effect content associated with the internal winning combination. Further, the effect content determination means as the privilege lottery means determines whether or not to perform a predetermined effect as the benefit based on the installation value set by the setting means and the probability stored in the privilege probability storage means. .. The effect content determination means and the privilege probability storage means are one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the sub control circuit 42. The installation value set by the setting means is transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 and stored in a predetermined storage means, so that the effect content determination means as the privilege lottery means can refer to the set value. Become. Note that the predetermined effect as the privilege includes, but is not limited to, the above-described AT and ART operations.

Next, when the effect content is determined by the effect content determining means, the effect executing means responds to each of the triggers such as when the reel starts rotating, when each reel stops rotating, and when the presence or absence of a prize is determined. To execute. In this way, in the pachi-slot, the player has an opportunity to know or anticipate the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of symbols to be aimed) by executing the effect contents associated with the internal winning combination. It is provided, and the interest of the player can be improved.

Further, the effect execution means as the set value suggesting means, based on the actual lottery number according to the result of the lottery of the privilege by the internal lottery means and the effect content determination means as the privilege lottery means, among the setting values of a plurality of stages The setting value at any stage from is determined as the setting value suggested to the player. Therefore, the set value suggested to the player does not always match the set value actually set by the setting means. However, as a result of continuous lottery based on the probability associated with the set value, the reliability of the set value suggested to the player is improved.

The setting value may be determined by the setting value suggesting means as follows. For example, the set value suggesting means determines the winning probability actually won for a predetermined privilege having a different winning probability depending on the set value. The method of determining the winning probability is not particularly limited, and, for example, the probability of dividing the number of times of winning of a predetermined privilege by the number of times of internal lottery may be used as the winning probability. Then, the set value suggesting means may determine the set value corresponding to the winning probability as the suggested set value.

In addition, the set value suggesting means stores a table in which the number of internal lottery and the number of winnings are associated with any stage of the set value in advance, and the set value is determined by referring to this table. Good.

Then, the set value suggesting means notifies the effect suggesting the set value at the determined stage. Any form of notification may be used. For example, the display device may display a character or an action of the character set for each set value, a sound effect/BGM by a speaker may be changed for each set value, or a lamp may be used. The display mode may be set for each set value.

Note that the “effect that suggests a setting value” may be an effect associated with the setting value, or may be an effect selected from a plurality of effects at a rate associated with the setting value. .. That is, the set value suggesting means may notify the effect associated with the determined set value (hereinafter, also referred to as suggestive effect). Therefore, the setting value suggesting means selects the effect associated with the determined setting value as the effect indicating the setting value. In this case, the setting value suggesting means may select the effect associated with the determined setting value with a higher probability than the effects associated with other setting values. This allows the player to infer the set value from the notified effect.

In addition, the set value suggesting unit may determine the effect to be notified from the plurality of effects based on a plurality of effects and a ratio associated with the set value. As a result, the player can infer the set value from the ratio of the types of effects in the notified multiple times of effects. In the following description, the setting of different ratios for each set value for a plurality of effects may be referred to as a set difference.

In the present embodiment, the “probability stored in the privilege probability storage means” is a weight for performing the lottery with the probability to be set, but is not limited to this. The information itself indicating the probability may be used, or the information indicating a predetermined range in the extracted random number range may be used.

Further, whether or not to perform a predetermined effect as a privilege is determined by the sub-control circuit 42 functioning as a privilege lottery means, but the present invention is not limited to this. That is, the main control circuit 41 may determine whether or not to perform a predetermined effect as a privilege.

Further, it is not limited to that different winning probabilities are associated with the setting values of the respective stages set by the setting means. Further, it is not limited to notifying the effect based on the set value indirectly estimated based on the actual winning probability of the privilege for all the privileges that are randomly selected based on the set value. It is sufficient that at least one lottery is notified of the effect based on the indirectly estimated setting value.

In this way, the pachi-slot has a throwing operation detecting means for detecting a throwing operation of the game medium, a start operation detecting means for detecting a starting operation by the player based on the detection of the throwing operation by the throwing operation detecting means, and a start operation detecting means. An internal winning combination determination means for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the starting operation by the means, and a plurality of display columns, based on the detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detection means, the game Based on the variation display means for variably displaying the necessary symbols, the stop operation detection means for detecting the stop operation by the player, the determination result of the internal winning combination determination means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means. , Stop control means for stopping the variable display of the symbols, and set values for setting the probabilities of various benefits given to the player are provided in a plurality of stages, and among these set values provided in a plurality of stages The setting means for setting the setting value of that level, the privilege probability storage means for storing the winning probability for each privilege in association with each of the setting values of the plurality of levels, and the setting value that has been set A privilege lottery means for lottery whether or not to grant a privilege to the player based on the winning probability, and a set value suggesting means for notifying an effect that suggests a set value of a stage according to the number of times the prize is actually won, Have.

In this way, the pachi-slot refers to the setting value set in any of the settings of a plurality of stages, and determines whether or not to grant the privilege based on the probability associated with this setting value. On the other hand, the pachi-slot determines a setting value to be suggested to the player based on the number of winnings of the privilege actually won, without referring to the setting value actually set. Then, the pachi-slot reports an effect that suggests the determined set value.
As a result, the pachi-slot does not refer to the set value that is actually set, but determines the set value to suggest to the player from the number of winnings that actually wins the privilege, and makes an effect that suggests this set value. .. Therefore, the set value determined from the number of times the prize is actually won is expected to be close to the actual set value as the game is continued, so that the reliability of the set value suggested by the performance is determined by the game. It can be improved as it continues.

<Process flow>
Referring to FIG. 250, the flow of the process of the pachi-slot relating to the suggestion effect of the set value of the present invention by the configuration in the functional flow of FIG. 249 will be described.

First, the pachi-slot determines whether or not to perform the lottery of the privilege with the probability based on the set value (S2000). That is, the pachi-slot determines whether it is the timing to perform internal lottery or whether to operate the function of navigating with information on the stop operation by a lamp or the like in order to win a specific small winning combination internally won in a predetermined game state. It is determined whether or not to perform the lottery of the privilege, which is the timing of performing the lottery. When the lottery of the privilege is not performed (S2000: NO), the pachi-slot ends this process. When lottery of a privilege is performed (S2000: YES), the pachi-slot refers to the set value (S2001).

Next, the pachi-slot acquires the probability associated with each setting value for the privilege for which lottery is performed (S2002), and performs the privilege lottery process (S2003).

Next, the pachi-slot determines the suggested setting value (S2004). For example, the pachi-slot divides the number of times the bonus is cumulatively added when the bonus is won by the number of times the lottery for the privilege is cumulatively added for each lottery of the privilege, to determine the actual winning probability of winning the benefit, and the probability of winning the bonus. The suggested setting value is determined based on the probability of the privilege for each setting value stored in the storage unit and the determined winning probability. In addition, for example, the pachi-slot acquires the set value associated with the number of times the privilege is won and the number of times the lottery is taken, and determines the suggested setting value.

Next, the pachi-slot determines a suggestive effect (S2005). For example, the pachi-slot determines the set value to be notified from the suggestive effect associated with each set value stored in the suggestive effect correspondence table. At this time, the pachi-slot may be selected so that the suggestive effect corresponding to the setting value determined in step S2004 is determined with high probability. In this case, the pachi-slot does not necessarily select the suggestive effect corresponding to the setting value determined in step S2004. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachi-slot may always select the suggestive effect corresponding to the set value determined in step S2004. In addition, the pachi-slot may set a setting difference for a plurality of effects (for example, types of images and sounds), and may determine the suggestive effect based on a selection ratio of a plurality of related effects. In this case, the player can infer the set value from the difference in the selection ratios of the plurality of effects. Then, the pachi-slot notifies the suggestive effect determined in step S2005 (S2006), and ends this processing.

The privilege for which the actual winning probability is determined is not limited to one. For example, there may be a plurality. Further, when there are a plurality of transition routes to a certain game state (for example, ART), only one route may be used as a privilege to determine the actual winning probability.

Further, the number of times of special lottery and the number of times of special winning may be reset at a predetermined timing. For example, the number of times of special lottery and the number of times of special winning may be reset when it is detected that the player playing the same pachi-slot has changed. The change of the player is detected, for example, when the idle state of the pachi-slot (the state where the inserted game medium is zero) continues for a predetermined period, or when the sensor detects the change of the player, a game such as sand The case where it is detected that the player's membership card has been taken out from the medium management device is an example.

Next, a specific example of application of the present invention to the first embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, a case will be described in which the privilege randomly selected based on the set value is a transition to the ART state.

<Data table>
(Privilege probability storage means)
In the pachi-slot, the sub ROM 82 of the sub control circuit functions as a privilege probability storage means. Specifically, in various ART lottery tables (FIG. 64, FIG. 65, FIG. 68) stored in the sub ROM 82 of the sub control circuit, a privilege (to ART) is set for each of a plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6). The winning probabilities of the transition) are stored in association with each internal winning combination.

When the privilege that is randomly selected based on the set value is a predetermined internal winning combination, the main ROM 52 of the main control circuit 41 functions as a privilege probability storage means. For example, in various internal lottery tables (see FIGS. 15 to 25) stored in the main ROM 52 of the main control circuit 41, each of the privilege (internal winning combination) is set for each of a plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6). The winning probability of is associated and stored.

(Table for suggestive performance)
FIG. 251 is a suggestion effect correspondence table in which suggestion effects associated with each set value are associated. In the suggestion effect correspondence table, the suggestion effect associated with each setting value is associated with the selection probability (weight) for each suggestion setting value.

For example, when “setting 4” is determined as the suggested setting value, the suggestive effect is determined based on the selection probability associated with the setting 4 in the suggestive effect corresponding table. That is, the setting 4 is associated with the weight of “2” for the suggestive effect 1, the weight of “4” is associated with the suggestive effect 2, and the weight of “5” is associated with the suggestive effect 3. Therefore, the suggestion effect 4 is associated with a weight of “80”, the suggestion effect 5 is associated with a weight of “5”, and the suggestion effect 6 is associated with a weight of “4”. Therefore, when "setting 4" is determined as the suggestion setting value, the suggestive effect 4 corresponding to "setting 4" is notified with a probability of 80%. Although not shown, the data corresponding to each suggestive effect is stored in the sub ROM 82, the sub RAM 83, the drawing RAM 85, etc. of the sub control circuit.

Next, the procedure of the main operation process of the pachi-slot 1 will be described with reference to the flowchart. First, in the process of FIG. 165 described in the first embodiment, the power-on process shown in FIG. 252 is executed.

<Flowchart>
[Power-on processing]
In the power-on process, a process of generating initialization command data for transmitting the set value set in the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42 is performed.

As shown in FIG. 252, first, the main control unit 40 determines whether the backup is normal (S2100). In this judgment processing, it is judged whether the backup is normal or not by the error detection using the checksum value.

For example, the main control unit 40 stores the set value and the like of the pachi-slot 1 and the checksum value calculated from the set value and the like in the main RAM 53 as backup data when the power is turned off, and the determination process when the power is turned on (S2100). ), the set value and the checksum value stored in the main RAM 53 are read.

Then, the main control unit 40 compares the checksum value calculated from the read set value and the backup checksum value, and if the comparison results match, determines that the backup is normal. To do.

When determining that the backup is normal (YES), the main control unit 40 sets the backed up setting value and the like (S2101). As a result, if the backup is normal, the set value before the power is turned off is set.

After executing the process of step S2101 or when determining that the backup is not normal in step S2100 (S2100: NO), the main control unit 40 turns on the setting change switch provided in the cabinet 2a of the pachi-slot 1. It is determined whether or not (S2102).

Here, if it is determined that the setting change switch is on (S2102: YES), the main control unit 40 executes initialization processing when changing the setting (S2103).

In the initialization process at the time of changing the setting, for example, the data stored in the internal winning combination storing area and the display winning combination storing area of the main RAM 52 are cleared and the set value is cleared.

Next, the main control unit 40 generates initialization command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42, and stores the generated initialization command data in the communication data storage area assigned to the main RAM 52 ( S2104). The initialization command data represents, for example, whether or not the setting value has been changed, the setting value, and the like. The initialization command data is transmitted to the sub control circuit 42 by a transmission process (not shown), and the sub control circuit 42 can also refer to the set value.

Next, the main control unit 40 executes a set value changing process (S2105). In this set value change processing, a set value is selected from 1 to 6 according to the operation result of the reset switch, and when the reset switch is subsequently operated, the selected set value is confirmed. .. In this way, the main control unit 40 that changes the set value indicating the degree of advantage for the player constitutes an installation changing unit.

Next, the main control unit 40 determines whether or not the setting change switch is in the on state (S2106), and repeatedly executes the process of step S2106 until a determination result that the setting change switch is not in the on state is obtained.

Here, when the determination result that the setting change switch is not on is obtained (S2106: NO), the main control unit 40 generates the initialization command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 41 to the sub control circuit 42. Then, the generated initialization command data is stored in the communication data storage area assigned to the main RAM 52 (S2107), and the power-on process is terminated.

When determining in step S2102 that the setting change switch is not on (S2102: NO), the main control unit 40 determines whether the backup is normal (S2108).

Here, when it is determined that the backup is normal (S2108: YES), the main control unit 40 sets the state of the pachi-slot 1 to the state before power-off based on the backup data stored in the main RAM 52. The process is restored (S2109), and the power-on process is terminated.

When it is determined in step S2108 that the backup is not normal (S2108: NO), the main control unit 40 executes power-on error processing (S2110). In the power-on error processing, the main control unit 40 displays an error display or the like that the backup is not normal.

Note that the main control unit 40 does not release the error state by operating the stop release switch or the reset switch when the backup is in an abnormal state (backup error), and a new setting change is made. The error status is released only when the error occurs.

[ART lottery processing]
As described in the first embodiment, the CZ end ART lottery process (step S556) of the during-CZ (normal time BB) lottery process shown in FIG. 191 and the ART during the normal medium lottery process shown in FIG. 207. In the lottery process (step S819), the transition to the ART state is determined by lottery. The sub CPU 81 of the sub control circuit 42 refers to the probabilities of various ART lottery tables (FIG. 64, FIG. 65, FIG. 68) corresponding to the set values for the lottery of the transition to the ART state, and extracts the random numbers. By doing.

[Set value suggestion process after ART lottery]
After the CZ end ART lottery process of the lottery process during CZ (normal BB) shown in FIG. 191 (step S556) and the ART lottery process of normal lottery process shown in FIG. 207 (step S819) are finished, The sub CPU 81 executes the setting value suggestion process after the ART lottery shown in FIG. 253.

As shown in FIG. 253, the sub CPU 81 first performs cumulative addition of the lottery number of benefits (S2200). The cumulative addition of the number of lotteries may be performed for each of the low-probability state, the high-probability state, and the end of CZ, or may be the total value of all of them. Further, the cumulative addition of the number of lotteries may be performed for each internal winning combination.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the result of each ART lottery process is successful (S2201). Then, when winning the ART lottery (S2201: YES), the sub CPU 81 performs cumulative addition of the number of times of winning the ART state transition (S2202). The cumulative addition of the number of winnings is performed in accordance with the cumulative addition of step S2200.

When the winning in the ART lottery has not been won (S2201: NO), or after the end of step S2202, the sub CPU 81 determines the winning probability of shifting to the ART state (S2203). As described above, in this embodiment, the transition to the ART state can be made from a plurality of routes. That is, the transition to the ART state is possible at the low probability state, the high probability state, and at the end of CZ. The winning probability of the privilege may be determined based on all of the lottery numbers and the winning numbers, or may be determined based on each of the lottery numbers and the winning numbers.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines the suggested setting value (S2204). For example, as shown in FIG. 64, when the internal winning combination in the low probability state is strong cherry, the winning probability of transition to the ART state in setting 1 and setting 2 is “about 0.45%”, and setting 3 And the winning probability of shifting to the ART state in setting 4 is “about 0.95%”, the winning probability of shifting to the ART state in setting 5 is “about 2.05%”, and ART state in setting 6 The winning probability of the transition to is “about 4.05%”. For example, the sub CPU 81 compares the actual winning probability of shifting to the ART state when the internal winning combination in the low probability state determined in step S2203 is strong cherry, with the winning probability in each setting of FIG. A close setting is determined as the suggested setting.

In this example, setting 1 and setting 2 and setting 3 and setting 4 are set to the same winning probability. In such a case, a plurality of benefits for determining the actual winning probability may be set so as to set a plurality of criteria for determining the suggested setting value. Further, in this example, the setting value to be suggested is determined based on the results of only one internal winning combination, but the total probability of all the internal winning combinations may be determined to determine the setting value to be suggested.

Next, the sub CPU 81 determines the content of the suggested effect (S2205). Specifically, based on the set value determined in step S2204, the suggestive effect correspondence table (FIG. 251) is referred to, the suggestive effect to be notified is determined, and this is set as the suggestive effect to be executed. The set suggestive effect is notified to the player by controlling the display device, the speaker, the lamp and the like by a process (not shown).

(Modification)
As shown in FIG. 251, in the present embodiment, the suggestive effect corresponding table is used to select the suggestive effect based on the suggested setting value, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the suggestion effect may be selected using the setting difference table shown below.

(Setting difference table)
FIG. 254 is an example of a setting difference table in which a selection ratio is associated with each setting value for a plurality of effects. In the setting difference table, the probabilities that a plurality of suggestive effects are selected are associated with each setting value.

For example, when "setting 1" is determined as the suggested setting value, the suggestive effect is determined based on the selection ratio associated with setting 4 of the setting difference table. That is, the setting 1 is associated with the ratio of “8/10” to the suggestive effect A, the ratio of “1/10” to the suggestive effect B, and the ratio of “1/10” to the suggestive effect C. Are associated with each other. Therefore, when "setting 1" is determined as the suggestion setting value, "indication production A" is notified with a probability of 80%, "indication production B" is notified with a probability of 10%, and "indication production C" is notified. You will be notified with a probability of 10%. The player can estimate the set value by checking the notification ratios of the suggested effects A to C based on the notification of the suggested effects a plurality of times. In this way, the effect for suggesting the set value may be determined in any way.

Further, in the present embodiment, in determining the suggested setting value, the actual winning number is divided by the actual lottery number to determine the actual winning probability of winning the benefit, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the setting value may be determined using the setting value determination table shown below.

(Winning probability determination table)
FIG. 255 is an example of a setting value determination table in which setting values are associated with winning numbers and lottery numbers. For example, when the counted number of winnings is "5" and the counted number of lottery is "9", the setting value determination table is referred to and the setting value is determined at the stage of "5". Will be done. Thus, the set value may be determined in any way.

(Overview)
As described above, the gaming machine (pachi-slot 1) of the present invention is based on the insertion operation detection means (for example, the medal sensor 35S) for detecting the insertion operation of the game medium and the detection of the insertion operation by the insertion operation detection means. Start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by a person (for example, the start switch 16S), and an internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means ( For example, an internal lottery process (step S6 of FIG. 165) and a variable display means (for example, a variable display means, which is configured by a plurality of display rows and variably displays a symbol required for the game, based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means. Three reels 3L, 3C, 3R and three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R), a stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch 17S) for detecting a stop operation by a player, and an internal winning combination determining means. Based on the determination result and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means, the stop control means (for example, reel stop control processing) for stopping the variable display of the symbols and the probabilities of various benefits given to the player are set. Setting values for setting are set in a plurality of steps, and setting means (for example, a key switch, operation lever) for setting a setting value in any one of the plurality of setting values, and a setting in a plurality of steps. A privilege probability storage unit (for example, a main ROM 52, a sub ROM 82) that stores the winning probability for each privilege in association with each value, and a privilege for the player based on the winning probability associated with the set setting value. Privilege lottery means (for example, internal lottery process (step S6 in FIG. 165), ART lottery process (step S556 in FIG. 191, step S819 in FIG. 207)) that randomly determines whether or not to give a prize, and the prize is actually won. A setting value suggesting means (for example, determination of a suggested setting value (step S2204 in FIG. 253)) for notifying a production that suggests a setting value at a stage corresponding to the number of winnings, determination processing of a suggested production content (step S2205 in FIG. 253). )) and.

According to the above configuration, the gaming machine refers to the setting value set in any of the settings of the plurality of stages, and determines whether to grant the privilege based on the probability associated with this setting value. To do. On the other hand, the gaming machine determines a setting value to be suggested to the player based on the number of winnings of the privilege actually won, without referring to the setting value actually set. Then, the gaming machine notifies the suggestive effect corresponding to the determined set value.

As a result, the gaming machine does not refer to the set value that is actually set, but determines the set value that is suggested to the player from the number of times the prize is actually won, and notifies the suggestive effect based on this. Increase the probability. Therefore, the set value determined from the number of times the prize is actually won is expected to become closer to the actual set value as the game continues, so the reliability of the suggested set value is continued in the game. Can be improved as

Further, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the privilege is a transition to a state of notifying information of a stop operation for assisting winning of a small winning combination.

According to the above-mentioned configuration, the player is notified of the information of the stop operation for assisting the winning of the small winning combination, compared with the privilege of winning the predetermined internal winning combination, which is not all notified to the player. Since it is a privilege, it is possible to make the suggested setting value easily coincide with the setting value estimated by the player, and it is possible to obtain the player's confidence in the gaming machine.

Although the embodiment of the present invention has been described above, it merely exemplifies a specific example and does not particularly limit the present invention, and the specific configuration of each means or the like can be appropriately modified in design. Further, the effects described in the embodiments of the present invention only list the most suitable effects that occur from the present invention, and the effects according to the present invention are limited to those described in the embodiments of the present invention. is not.

Further, in the above detailed description, characteristic portions have been mainly described so that the present invention can be more easily understood. The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described in the above detailed description, but can be applied to other embodiments, and its applicable range is various. Further, the terms and the terminology used in the present specification are used for accurately explaining the present invention and are not used for limiting the interpretation of the present invention. Further, it seems that those skilled in the art can easily infer from the concept of the invention described in the present specification, other configurations, systems, methods and the like included in the concept of the invention. Therefore, the description of the scope of claims should be considered to include an equivalent configuration without departing from the scope of the technical idea of the present invention. In addition, the purpose of the abstract is to simplify the technical contents of this application and its essence by the patent office and general public institutions, and engineers who belong to this technical field who are not familiar with patents, legal terms or technical terms. Therefore, it is possible to make a quick decision by conducting a detailed survey. Therefore, the abstract is not intended to limit the scope of the invention to be evaluated by the description of the claims. Further, in order to fully understand the object of the present invention and the effects peculiar to the present invention, it is desired that the literatures already disclosed be sufficiently taken into consideration for interpretation.

The above detailed description includes the processes executed by the computer. The above description and expressions are provided for the purpose of making the understanding by a person skilled in the art most efficient. As used herein, each process used to derive a result of 1 should be understood as a process that is self-consistent. Further, in each process, transmission or reception of an electrical or magnetic signal, recording, etc. are performed. In the processing in each processing, such a signal is expressed by bits, values, symbols, characters, terms, numbers, etc., but it should be noted that these are used only for convenience of description. There is a need. Further, although the processing in each processing may be described in the same expression as that of a human action, the processing described in this specification is basically executed by various devices. Further, other configurations required for performing each processing will be obvious from the above description.

1... Pachi-slot (gaming machine), 2... Exterior body, 2a... Cabinet, 2b... Front door, 3L... Left reel, 3C... Middle reel, 3R... Right reel, 4L, 4C, 4R... Display window, 11... Liquid crystal display Device, 16... Start lever, 17L... Left stop button, 17C... Middle stop button, 17R... Right stop button, 22L, 22R... Performance switch, 41... Main control circuit, 42... Sub control circuit, 50... Microcomputer, 51... Main CPU, 52... Main ROM, 53... Main RAM, 56... Random number generator, 81... Sub CPU, 82... Sub ROM, 83... Sub RAM

Claims (1)

Bet operation detecting means for detecting a bet operation of the game value,
Start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by the player based on the detection of the bet operation by the bet operation detecting means,
An internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the starting operation by the starting operation detecting means,
Variable display means configured by a plurality of display columns, based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means, variable display means for variable display of the symbols required for the game,
A stop operation detecting means for detecting a stop operation by a player,
Based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determination means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detection means, stop control means for stopping the variable display of the symbol,
Setting values for setting the probabilities of various benefits given to the player are provided in a plurality of stages, and setting means for setting a setting value in any of the plurality of setting values provided,
For each of the setting values of the plurality of stages, a privilege probability storage unit that stores the winning probability for each of the benefits in association with each of the internal winning combinations,
A privilege lottery unit that randomly determines whether or not to grant the privilege to the player based on the set value that is set as the internal winning combination,
A setting value suggesting means capable of executing an effect that suggests a setting value of a stage based on the number of lottery of the privilege by the internal winning combination and the number of winnings actually won to the privilege, and
The effect suggesting the setting value is provided in association with each of the setting values of the plurality of stages,
The setting value suggesting means refers to the setting value of the stage based on the lottery number and the winning number, from among the effects suggesting the setting value associated with each setting value of the plurality of stages, predetermined A gaming machine characterized by being able to execute an effect that suggests one set value in accordance with the selected probability of selection.